JP7485178B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Pachinko machines are a type of gaming machine known in the art, in which game balls are fired into a play area to play the game.

For example, there is a known pachinko machine that is equipped with a variable ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V entry port) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312

However, in conventional gaming machines, the game can easily become monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvement in entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
A variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter the ball;
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined ball is entered into the special ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is configured to allow only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the inner area,
This gaming machine is
A first opportunity ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game;
A second opportunity ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game ;
A first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball entry means ;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
The game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entry means is configured to be changed by a variable means capable of changing the value of a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined route to the special ball entry means by changing a state between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
The variable means is configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means,
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one location and allows the game balls to pass through it one at a time;
A ball passage capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a restricting means is provided which allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball from passing in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game balls that have entered the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means are configured not to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter,
The second route is provided with a delay means capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball,
The game ball that has passed through the specific area and flowed down the first route may or may not enter the second opportunity ball entry means,
The gist of the invention is that the game ball that passes through the specific area and flows down the second route is configured so that it may or may not enter the first trigger ball entry means.

The gaming machine of the present invention can dramatically increase interest.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the inner frame and front frame set in an open state. A front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, rear pack unit, etc. in an open state. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. A flowchart showing the start winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the correct/incorrect determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable time determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a ball counting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special prize winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing non-special prize-winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special gate passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing type-based ball scoring processing. A flowchart showing the V-winning jackpot setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing variable winning device control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a termination setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a blade member opening/closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start prize section control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a third display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a bypass mechanism control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a remaining ball monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. A front view of the central winning unit. 6A to 6C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route allocation member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a route allocation member. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body unit. 1A is a front view showing a rotating body unit with a movable part in a stored state, and FIG. 1B is a front view showing a rotating body unit with a movable part in a protruding state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable part and its related configuration in a stored state, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable part and its related configuration in a protruding state. FIG. 11 is a front view for explaining a route allocation member and the like according to another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional front view for explaining a route allocation area and the like according to another embodiment. A flowchart showing the start pre-winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fourth display control process. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the inner frame and front frame set in an open state. A front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, rear pack unit, etc. in an open state. FIG. 2 is a front view of the variable display unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a variable display unit. A front view of the variable display unit with the prop unit appearing. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the start winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reach determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status check process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a game state identification counter, and a game state judgment value. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a first display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the end of fluctuation setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. A flowchart showing variable winning device control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a second display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the opening and closing feature control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used to determine decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process of the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold display setting process. A diagram to explain the types of jackpots. A diagram showing the configuration of the first jackpot type determination table. A diagram showing the configuration of the second jackpot type determination table. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a fluctuation pattern table for a special jackpot, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a fluctuation pattern table for a complete miss. This is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table when a special jackpot occurs under normal conditions. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of an opening and closing pattern control table. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of a decorative pattern display device in a normal state. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of a decorative pattern display device when a jackpot occurs. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device during a chance mode. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device during gold mode. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a decorative pattern display device during a roulette performance. FIG. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of a decorative pattern display device when a pending display change process is performed. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the role object performance setting process. This is a flowchart showing part of the role-playing setting process, which is a continuation of Figure 98. 13A is a diagram showing the configuration of a reel performance pattern determination table for the "end" time, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the configuration of a reel performance pattern determination table for the "until next time" time. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the upper rotor and the like in a reduced diameter state. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in a diameter-reduced state. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in an expanded diameter state. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in an expanded diameter state. This is a cross-sectional view of line K-K in Figure 101. This is a front view showing some of the lower movable parts (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). This is a side view showing some of the lower movable parts (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation using an upper rotating body. A schematic diagram showing one example of the stopped state (stopped state without enlarged display) of the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies related to the first development performance pattern. This is a schematic diagram showing one example of the stopped state (weak/SMALL expansion stopped state) of the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies in the second development performance pattern. This is a schematic diagram showing one example of the stopped state (strong/SMALL expansion stopped state) of the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies in the third development performance pattern. This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the stopped state of the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies (weak/BIG expansion stopped state) in the fourth development performance pattern. This is a schematic diagram showing one example of the stopped state of the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies (strong/BIG expansion stopped state) in the fifth development performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body according to another embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in Fig. 3, etc., a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes its outer shell, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. However, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories arranged on the game board 30 surface, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted in Fig. 3.

As shown in FIG. 6, the outer frame 11 is made up of an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy extrusion. These frame components 11a to 11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape by removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

In addition, the right frame component 11d has an extending wall 83 that protrudes from near the rear end in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is engaged. Also, a pressing portion 86 that abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 (described later) is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 and protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

In addition, a resin valance panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the upper surface of the valance panel 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to form between the valance panel 87 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as its axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 is designed to be able to be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 when closed. A roughly elliptical window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed structure of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, a lower tray 15 is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame set 14 as a ball receiving tray, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower tray 15 is provided at the front side of the lower tray 15.

A performance button 125 is provided to the left of the bottom tray 15. When the player presses the performance button 125, a specific performance is performed or the performance content is changed on the performance display device 42, which will be described later.

A game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18 is provided to the right of the lower tray 15, protruding toward the front. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the amount of operation of the operation part of the handle 18.

When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, game balls are launched by the launching device 60 (described below) as a launching means, with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation. The handle 18 is also provided with a launch prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of game balls by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is being held. For this reason, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the launch of game balls, or to temporarily stop the launch of game balls while holding the handle 18.

An upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them in a row toward the launching device 60, which will be described later. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are dispensed are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. However, in pachinko machines in which game balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device, etc. to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary.

Furthermore, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) that is provided downstream of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicates with the lower tray 15 opens, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. In other words, the player can move the game balls in the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means are controlled to change their light emission state, such as turning on or blinking, depending on changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play.

For example, a circular illumination section 102 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window section 101. Error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a specified error occurs are provided on both sides of the circular illumination section 102. In addition, a number of small through holes are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 of the circular illumination section 102 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see Figure 3) provided on the rear of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately as in the conventional method, but is round overall and is assembled and then attached.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 (described later) to the discharge outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71).

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 etc. A launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched from the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39 (game board 30). In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60.

In this embodiment, when game balls are continuously detected by the full detection switch for a predetermined period of time, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from firing. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer continuously detected for a predetermined period of time), the launching device 60 is permitted to fire.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60. The ball feeder 63 uses a driving means such as a solenoid to guide the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launcher 60.

In addition, the symbol 67 in Figures 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, so as to almost completely close the exit of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the entrance side of the lower tray communication passage 71. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the entrances (ball inlet portions) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to the payout passage 67 with a predetermined distance between them, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow toward the lower tray communication passage 71, and are paid out through the lower tray communication passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion abutting the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, approximately the center of the front part of the game board 30, which becomes the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

The structure of the game board 30 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is made up of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. The rail 50 may also be used as a ball passage. As a result, game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50. In addition, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. A game ball that is launched with a force greater than a predetermined value will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned, for example, toward approximately the center of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the game board 30. Therefore, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 before passing through the return ball prevention member 53 serving as a regulating means, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the play area.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. The area in which the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged may be the specific area. If a game ball launched from the launch device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

The game board 30 also has a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting winning means, a through gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a variable winning means, etc., which are arranged in through holes formed by router processing and attached from the front side of the game board 30.

Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) that detect game balls that enter various ball entry means, such as the general winning section 31.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, a first start winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the first start winning section 33a, a second start winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second start winning section 33b, and a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) any of the various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls) are paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. For example, if the ball enters the starting winning section 33, three prize balls are paid out; if the ball enters the general winning section 31, five prize balls are paid out; and if the ball enters the variable winning device 32, ten prize balls are paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36, and game balls that do not win in the various winning means such as the general winning section 31 are discharged outside the game area through this outlet 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 4 and Figures 40 to 45.

The central winning unit 37 is disposed in approximately the center of the play area (game board 30). The central winning unit 37 comprises a housing (center frame) 400 that forms an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the play area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent material, and the internal area 401 can be seen through the front panel 402.

A pair of ball entry openings 403 are formed on the upper part of the housing 400, which serve as entrances for game balls flowing down the game area to enter the internal area 401. The central winning unit 37 is also provided with a pair of blade members 404 on the left and right for opening and closing the ball entry openings 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. The "blade members 404" constitute the "opening and closing members" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is arranged so that it can rotate between a closed position in which it closes the corresponding ball entry opening 403, and an open position in which it opens it. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot enter). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is open and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (ball can enter).

As will be described in detail later, the blade members 404 are opened for a predetermined time when a ball enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) and a small prize is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball. In other words, when a small prize is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b), this corresponds to a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) being met in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in sync with each other, so that when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position, the other is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 is divided into a route allocation area 406 where the game ball that enters through the ball entry opening 403 is first guided, a win/lose lottery area 407 located below it, a type lottery area 408 located further below that as a type lottery area, and a role activation lottery area 409 located to the right of the win/lose lottery area 407.

First, the route allocation area 406 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 40 to 42. The route allocation area 406 includes an introduction passage 601 that guides the game ball that entered the internal area 401 from the ball entrance opening 403 to the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400 and then guides it to the center of the route allocation area 406 in the left-right direction, a fall passage 602 that drops the game ball led out from the exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 that opens in the center of the left-right direction of the route allocation area 406 downward, a route allocation member 603 as a route allocation means provided at the bottom of the fall passage 602, a normal guide passage 604 that is provided to the left of the route allocation member 603 and can guide the game ball to the winning/losing lottery area 407, and a special guide passage (special passage) 605 that is provided to the right of the route allocation member 603 and can guide the game ball to the role activation lottery area 409.

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route," and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route."

The pair of left and right entrances 601b of the introduction passage 601 are each provided with an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball that has entered through the ball entry opening 403.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the ball entry opening 403 on the left side always passes through the left entrance 601b, and a game ball that enters the ball entry opening 403 on the right side always passes through the right entrance 601b, so that a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route allocation member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having an axial hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece 613 protruding upward from the shaft portion 611, a left piece 614 protruding leftward from the shaft portion 611, and a right piece 615 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 611.

Axle pin 610 is inserted through shaft hole 611a of shaft portion 611. The rear end of the shaft pin 610 is supported by upper rear wall portion 400a that defines the rear side of fall passage 602, and the front end is supported by front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) that defines the front side of fall passage 602. As a result, route allocation member 603 is supported so as to be rotatable around shaft pin 610.

In addition, a protrusion 617 having a generally triangular shape in front view is formed at a lower position of the route allocation member 603. Under normal circumstances, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route allocation member 603 is maintained in a right-inclined state in which the central piece 613 is inclined to the right of the center position in the left-right direction (position of the pivot pin 610) and the right piece 615 is inclined downward from the horizontal direction by a biasing means (maintenance means) such as a weight or coil spring (not shown).

In this rightward tilted state, the tip 613a of the central piece 613 comes into contact with or is close to the right side wall 602a of the fall passage 602, preventing game balls falling down the fall passage 602 from flowing down into the special guide passage 605 on the right, but allowing them to flow down into the normal guide passage 604 on the left.

In other words, during normal operation when the route allocation member 603 is inclined to the right, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route allocation member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is open, and the game ball falling down the fall passage 602 is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 along the left guide surface formed by the left side surface of the central piece 613 and the top surface of the left piece 614 of the route allocation member 603.

As a result, the route allocation member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614 (see Figure 41 (b)).

As a result, for a specified period of time, the route allocation member 603 is in a left-tilted state in which the central piece 613 is tilted to the left of the center position in the left-right direction (position of the pivot pin 610) and the left piece 614 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is biased against the left inclined surface of the protrusion 617.

In this leftward tilted state, the tip 613a of the central piece 613 comes into contact with or is close to the left side wall 602b of the fall passage 602, so that the game balls falling down the fall passage 602 cannot flow down into the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, but can flow down into the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

In other words, during the specified time that the route allocating member 603 is in the left-tilted state, the normal guide passage 604 is closed by the route allocating member 603, while the special guide passage 605 is open. As a result, if there is a game ball falling down the falling passage 602 at this timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, a second game ball B2 falling continuously after a first game ball B1 guided to the normal guide passage 604), the game ball will be guided to the right special guide passage 605 along the right guide surface formed by the right side surface of the central piece 613 and the upper surface of the right piece 615 of the route allocating member 603.

Once the route allocation member 603 is tilted to the left, it rotates clockwise due to the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the force from the game ball contacting the right piece 615 is also added) and returns to the normal right-inclined state (see Figure 41 (c)).

In this embodiment, the state in which the route allocation member 603 is in the first posture, which is a right-inclined posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route allocation member 603 is in the second posture, which is a left-inclined posture, corresponds to the second state. Also, in this embodiment, the states in which the route allocation member 603 can cause game balls to flow down the first route consisting of the normal guide passage 604, etc., or the second route consisting of the special guide passage 605, etc., such as the first state and the second state, constitute specific states. Of course, the specific states are not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the configuration of the special feature operation lottery area 409 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the special feature operation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide passage 605 can enter (pass). The passage width of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time. In addition, game balls that pass through the special gate 650 are discharged outside the internal area 401 (to the rear side of the game board 30) via a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "trigger ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 that detects game balls passing through it. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "trigger ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by this special gate switch 651, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722 described below. If the activation assist lottery is won, the movable role 722 will operate for a predetermined period of time. Details of the configuration and operation of the movable role 722 will be described later.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, no prize balls are paid out (0 prize balls). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651.

Next, the configuration of the winning/losing lottery area 407 will be described in detail. The winning/losing lottery area 407 is provided with a rotating body unit 410 as a winning/losing allocation means. The rotating body unit 410 has the function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided from the route allocation area 406 via the normal guide passage 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401. The passage width of the normal guide passage 604 is set to a width that allows the game balls to pass through one at a time.

As shown in Figures 43 and 44, the rotating unit 410 includes a unit base 411 that serves as the base, and a unit cover 412 that is attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side of the unit base 411.

A roughly disk-shaped rotating body 414 is attached to a mounting stand 413 that protrudes from the upper surface of the unit base 411, and a rotating body motor 415 is attached to rotate the rotating body 414. On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided on the lower surface of the unit base 411.

The rotating body 414 is installed so that its upper surface faces diagonally upward toward the front side, and the rotation axis is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. The rotating body motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261. With this configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a fixed direction (counterclockwise in this embodiment) at a fixed cycle.

The rotating body 414 has three pockets 416 formed around its outer periphery, each capable of receiving one game ball. The three pockets 416 are divided into one special pocket 416a and the other two non-special pockets 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416b opens toward the outer periphery and upward of the rotating body 414 and has a bottom wall portion 417. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 slopes downward toward the outer periphery of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a opens to the top and bottom on the outer periphery side of the rotating body 414, and does not have a bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b. In addition, the periphery of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a resin material that is colored differently from the other portions. This makes it easier for players to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b.

The unit cover 412 has a generally cylindrical wall portion 431 that is arranged to surround the rotor 414, and a stage portion 432 that is formed to extend from the periphery of the wall portion 431 toward the outer periphery.

The upper edge of the tube wall portion 431 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432, and a gate portion 435 is provided in front of it to connect the inner and outer circumferential sides of the tube wall portion 431.

The upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured to allow the game ball to roll. The portion of the stage portion 432 located behind the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the tube wall portion 431, and the portion located in front of the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the rear (toward the gate portion 435).

As a result, the game ball is guided out of the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604 that opens into the central rear wall 400b of the housing 400 that defines the rear side of the win/lose lottery area 407, and guided to the rear of the stage section 432. While its movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall section 431, the game ball rolls clockwise or counterclockwise toward the front on the stage section 432, and swings back and forth multiple times in front of the gate section 435, and then enters the pocket section 416 when the relative positions of the gate section 435 and the pocket section 416 (special pocket section 416a or non-special pocket section 416b) of the rotating body 414 match.

Furthermore, the unit base 411 is provided with a first V winning passage 427 for guiding game balls contained in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and an out passage 428 for discharging game balls contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b out of the internal area 401.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 in the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotor 414, that is, to the right of the gate portion 435. On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream of the first V winning passage 427, that is, at the far right position of the first V winning passage 427.

The entrance side of the first V winning passage 427 opens on the top surface of the installation table 413, and is configured so that the pocket section 416 of the rotating body 414 can pass above it. A game ball that enters the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate section 435 falls downward from the special pocket section 416a and enters the first V winning passage 427 when the special pocket section 416a and the entrance section of the first V winning passage 427 coincide with each other as the rotating body 414 rotates. At the position corresponding to the first V winning passage 427, a cylindrical wall section 431 that protrudes downward from the back surface of the stage section 432 prevents the game ball from falling out from the side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, when a game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, even if the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 coincide with each other as the rotating body 414 rotates, the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b prevents the game ball contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b from falling (entering) into the first V winning passage 427.

In addition, at a position corresponding to the out passage 428, a notch 431a is formed in the lower edge of the tube wall 431. As a result, when the rotating body 414 rotates further and the position of the non-special pocket 416b containing the game ball matches the position of the out passage 428, the game ball contained in the non-special pocket 416b moves to the outer periphery of the rotating body 414 due to the inclination of the bottom wall 417, and falls (enters) into the out passage 428 through the notch 431a of the tube wall 431.

In addition, a connection passage 429 is formed in the housing 400, which is connected to the outlet of the first V winning passage 427, and the first V winning passage 427 and the type lottery area 408 are in communication with each other through the connection passage 429.

The first V winning passage 427 is also provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing through the passage. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. Therefore, the "first V winning passage 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

When a big win occurs when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427, the big prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from a closed state to an open state, and then one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached after the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of eight game balls have entered the variable winning device 32 constitutes one special prize state, and this is repeated a specified number of times (specified rounds).

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot states are set as a "3-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "15-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 15 times.

However, as will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, when a ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the jackpot state is not initiated immediately, but rather the type of jackpot state is determined in the type selection area 408, and then the jackpot state is initiated.

As described above, in this embodiment, a game ball that enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passes through the first V winning passage 427 is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461, and is guided to the type lottery area 408.

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special ball entry detection switch 462 that detects game balls that pass through it and are discharged outside the internal area 401.

In addition, a protrusion 440 is provided on the upper edge of the tube wall 431 in a circumferentially specific section including above the entrances of the first V-winning passage 427 and the out passage 428, and is formed to extend toward the inner periphery of the tube wall 431.

The protruding portion 440 is configured to cover from above a portion of each pocket portion 416 located below it (an area approximately half the diameter of the rotating body 414). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which another game ball rides up on top of a game ball that has entered a specific pocket portion 416, causing the two game balls, one above the other, to enter the first V winning passage 427 or the out passage 428 in succession, or in which a game ball jumps over the tube wall portion 431 for some reason and enters directly into a pocket portion 416 that is located in a position that coincides with the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428.

As shown in Figures 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism 721 is provided at the rear of the rotating body unit 410. The bypass mechanism 721 includes a movable part 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening housing 433 formed at the most upstream part of the stage 432, and a movable part solenoid 725 as a movable member driving means for operating the movable part 722. The movable part solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by a main control device 261 constituting a movable body control means.

The movable part 722 is assembled so that it can slide (rise and fall) in the vertical direction. In normal operation when the movable part solenoid 725 is in a non-excited state, the movable part 722 is almost entirely housed within the opening housing 433, and its upper surface is generally continuous with the upper surface of the stage 432 (see Figures 44(a) and 45(a)). This housing state of the movable part 722 corresponds to the non-favourable state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 725 for the movable part is excited and the bypass mechanism 721 is activated, the movable part 722 rises and a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage 432 (see Figures 44(b) and 45(b)). Such an operation of the movable part 722 corresponds to a predetermined operation in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable part 722 corresponds to an advantageous state in this embodiment.

The top surface of the movable part 722 is formed with a left inclined portion 727 that slopes gently downward from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the left, and a right inclined portion 728 that slopes gently downward from approximately the center in the left-right direction to the right.

And, under normal circumstances when almost the entire movable part 722 is housed within the opening housing section 433, the game ball guided from the exit section 604a of the normal guide passage 604 that opens into the central rear wall section 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable part 722 is guided to the left or right of the stage section 432 by the left inclined section 727 or the right inclined section 728 on the top surface of the movable part 722.

As shown in Figs. 45(a) and (b), a second V winning passage 730 is provided inside the movable device 722. The passage width of the second V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time.

When the movable part 722 is in a protruding state protruding from the stage portion 432, the movable part 722 blocks the front of the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604, and the entrance portion 730a of the second V winning passage 730 and the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604 face each other (see Figures 44(b) and 45(b)). This allows the game ball to enter the second V winning passage 730 from the normal guide passage 604, and both passages 604, 730 are connected.

In addition, when the movable part 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the outlet portion 730b of the second V winning passage 730 faces the inlet portion 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the back side of the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400. This allows game balls to enter the bypass passage 737 from the second V winning passage 730, and both passages 730, 737 are connected.

In other words, when the movable part 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are connected via the second V winning passage 730 so that the game ball can pass through.

The width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time. In addition, the exit portion 737b of the bypass passage 737 opens in the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400 that defines the rear side of the type lottery area 408, at a position above the 15R ball entrance 731. As a result, when the movable role 722 is in a protruding state protruding from the stage portion 432, the game ball that is normally guided to the guide passage 604 can be guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731 without going through the above-mentioned rotating body unit 410 and the type allocation mechanism unit 741 described later. In other words, by operating the movable role 722, it is possible to avoid allocation by the rotating body unit 410 and the type allocation mechanism unit 741.

The bypass passage 737 is provided with a second special ball entry detection switch 738 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing through the bypass passage 737. When a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted.

However, as will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, when a ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the jackpot state is not initiated immediately, but is instead initiated after the game ball enters the 15R ball entry port 731.

In addition, when there is a game ball remaining in the second V winning passage 730, if the movable device 722 descends and returns to the stored state, the remaining ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 via the lower passage 739 and is configured to be detected by the second special winning ball detection switch 738.

In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738, 10 game balls are dispensed onto the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15). Of course, the number of game balls dispensed in response to these ball entry detection switches is not limited to 10, and may be another number. Also, when a game ball is detected by these ball entry detection switches, no game balls may be dispensed (0 prize balls).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot generated when the game ball enters the first V entry passage 427" and "jackpot generated when the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V entry passage 730" may be referred to collectively as "V entry jackpot."

Next, the type-based lottery area 408 will be described in detail. The type-based lottery area 408 is provided with a 15R ball entry port 731 that, when a game ball enters, grants a "15 round" jackpot state (15 round jackpot), a 7R ball entry port 732 that, when a game ball enters, grants a "7 round" jackpot state (7 round jackpot), and a 3R ball entry port 733 that, when a game ball enters, grants a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot). Here, the "15R ball entry port 731", "7R ball entry port 732" and "3R ball entry port 733" constitute the "type-based ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The 15R entrance 731 is provided with a 15R entrance detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that enters here. Similarly, the 7R entrance 732 is provided with a 7R entrance detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that enters here, and the 3R entrance 733 is provided with a 3R entrance detection switch 736 that detects a game ball that enters here.

The type lottery area 408 is provided with a type allocation mechanism 741 as a type allocation means (type determination means) that allocates the destination of the game balls led to the type lottery area 408 via the first V winning passage 427 and the connecting passage 429 to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733.

The type sorting mechanism 741 includes a starting platform 742 to which the game balls drawn out from the exit 429a of the connecting passage 429 are guided, a first crossing board 744 to which the game balls that have passed through the starting platform 742 are guided, a second crossing board 745 to which the game balls that have passed through the first crossing board 744 are guided, and a 15R guide passage 746 to which the game balls that have passed through the second crossing board 745 are guided and which guides the game balls to the 15R ball entrance 731.

The starting platform 742 is located in the upper left corner of the type selection area 408, and its top surface slopes downward to the right.

The first cross plate 744 is installed to the right of and slightly below the starting platform 742, with its left end supported so that it can rotate around its axis in the front-to-rear direction, and its right end being the free end.

The rotation axis of the first bridge plate 744 is connected to a swing mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swing mechanism is driven and controlled by the main control device 261, so that the first bridge plate 744 swings up and down.

Specifically, the first crossing plate 744 is configured so that its upper surface is inclined slightly downward to the right, allowing it to move between a forward position where it guides the game ball to the second crossing plate 745, and a drop position where its upper surface is inclined more downward than this, allowing it to guide the game ball to the 3R ball entrance 733.

When the game ball guided to the first transfer plate 744 via the starting platform 742 rolls to the right end of the first transfer plate 744, if the first transfer plate 744 is in the forward position, the game ball is guided to the second transfer plate 745.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the first crossing plate 744 rolls to the right end of the first crossing plate 744, if the first crossing plate 744 is in the above-mentioned drop position, the game ball is guided to the 3R ball entrance 733.

In other words, the first crossing board 744 has the function of directing the destination of the game ball guided via the starting platform 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second crossing board 745.

The second cross plate 745 is installed to the right of and slightly below the first cross plate 744, with its left end supported so that it can rotate around its axis in the front-to-rear direction, and its right end being the free end.

The rotation axis of the second bridge plate 745 is connected to a swing mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swing mechanism is driven and controlled by the main control device 261, so that the second bridge plate 745 swings up and down.

Specifically, the second crossing plate 745 is configured so that its upper surface is slightly inclined downward to the right, allowing it to move between a forward position where it guides the game ball to the 15R guide passage 746, and a drop position where its upper surface is inclined more significantly downward, allowing it to guide the game ball to the 7R ball entrance 732.

When the game ball guided to the second transfer plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second transfer plate 745, if the second transfer plate 745 is in the forward position, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the second crossing plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second crossing plate 745, if the second crossing plate 745 is in the above-mentioned drop position, the game ball is guided to the 7R ball entrance 732.

In other words, the second crossing plate 745 has the function of directing the destination of the game ball that passes through the first crossing plate 744 to either the 7R ball entrance 732 or the 15R guide passage 746.

The 15R guide passage 746 is located to the right and slightly below the second crossing board 745, and its upper surface slopes downward toward the 15R entrance 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first and second crossing plates 744 and 745 are configured to oscillate at different cycles. For example, the first crossing plate 744 is configured to oscillate slightly faster than the second crossing plate 745.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734, the 7R ball detection switch 735, or the 3R ball detection switch 736 after the first special ball detection switch 461 detects a ball, a jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. Also, if a ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734 after the second special ball detection switch 738 detects a ball, a jackpot state corresponding to a 15-round jackpot is started.

Now, we return to the explanation of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. 4, the first start winning section 33a is provided to the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37. The second start winning section 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37.

The second start winning section 33b further includes a pair of start opening opening/closing members 33c that can be opened and closed on both sides. In this embodiment, when the start opening opening/closing members 33c are in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second start winning section 33b.

In other words, the first start winning section 33a is always open to game balls, whereas the second start winning section 33b opens the start opening opening member 33c when a game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the ball entry assist lottery, allowing the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

In addition to this, when the start opening opening/closing member 33c is in a closed state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b, and when the ball entry assist lottery is won, the start opening opening/closing member 33c is in an open state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

As described above, the first start winning section 33a is provided with a first start winning switch 224a that detects a game ball that has entered therein. Similarly, the second start winning section 33b is provided with a second start winning switch 224b that detects a game ball that has entered therein. Each of the start winning switches 224a, 224b constitutes a "start winning ball detection means" in this embodiment.

Then, as will be described in more detail later, when a game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, a lottery is held to determine whether the ball will be a "win" advantageous to the player or a "miss."

The "win" in the winning/losing lottery can be a "small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened, or a "big win" in which the large winning opening opening member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning/losing lottery is held based on the detection of a winning ball by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, a fluctuating display and a stationary display are displayed on the special display device 43 described below to inform the winner/loser of the result of the winning/losing lottery.

In this embodiment, when the first start winning switch 224a detects a winning ball and when the second start winning switch 224b detects a winning ball, a common winning lottery is performed and a variable display is displayed on the common special display device 43. However, a first special display device that displays a variable display to inform the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a and a second special display device that displays a variable display to inform the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the second start winning switch 224b may be provided separately. The first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b may be the first or second trigger winning ball detection means. Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, each variable display may be reserved and stored separately, and the corresponding variable display may be consumed in the order in which it was stored or in such a way that one has priority over the other. In addition, when this configuration is adopted, the allocation ratios of the types of jackpot states that are granted if the lottery is won may be different or the same.

In the game area on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, a flow-down area is formed through which the game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in the flow-down area on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured so that the game balls flowing down can pass through them one by one. The flow-down area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be the first flow-down route, which is the first route, and the flow-down area on the left side may be the second flow-down route, which is the second route. In addition, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that detects the game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the through gate switch 225 detects a game ball, a ball entry assist lottery is held to determine whether or not the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is opened. When the ball entry assist lottery is won, the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

At the top right of the game board 30, there are provided a through gate display device (normal symbol display device) 41 that displays the results of a ball entry assist lottery based on balls entering (ball passing) through the through gate 34, a special display device (special symbol display device) 43 that displays the results of a win/lose lottery based on balls entering each of the start winning sections 33a and 33b, and a special gate display device 44 that displays the results of an operation assist lottery based on balls entering (ball passing) through the special gate 650. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 constituting the first display means is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps.

The configuration of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be configured, for example, with a different number of lamp groups, or may be configured with a different display device such as a seven-segment display device, a dot display device, or a liquid crystal display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b), a variable display (switching display) is started to inform the result of the winning/losing lottery, and when the variable display is stopped after a predetermined time, a mode corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery is displayed. The first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b may be the first or second trigger ball entry means. Furthermore, the display content of the special display device 43 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, so that the result of the winning/losing lottery is definitively displayed.

If a jackpot is won in this lottery, the large prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is switched from a closed state to an open state, and once the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of eight game balls have entered the variable prize winning device 32, one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached is considered one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to award a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a "direct hit jackpot").

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the jackpot state (V entry jackpot) occurs not only when a "jackpot" is won in a winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering the start entry section 33 (first start entry section 33a or second start entry section 33b), but also when the game ball enters the first V entry passage 427 through the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special entry detection switch 461, or when the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 through the movable role 722 (second V entry passage 730) and is detected by the second special entry detection switch 738.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) during the variable display of the special display device 43, the variable display for that ball will be displayed after the variable display currently being performed has ended. In other words, the variable display of the special display device 43 will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of variable displays that can be held is determined for each type of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, a total of four variable displays are held in response to the game balls that have entered the first start winning section 33a and the second start winning section 33b.

The number of reserved times for the variable display of the special display device 43 is indicated by lighting a special display device reserved lamp 47 provided near the special display device 43. In this embodiment, the special display device reserved lamp 47 is composed of four lamps, and the number of reserved times is indicated by appropriately switching the state of each lamp between on and off.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the start winning section 33 during a big win or small win, the corresponding change display is also reserved and is executed after the big win or small win state ends.

In the through gate display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a variable display (switching display) is started to display the result of the entry assist lottery, and when the variable display is stopped after a predetermined time, a mode corresponding to the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed. If the result of the entry assist lottery is a winning result corresponding to the opening of the start opening opening member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display device 41, the variable display is stopped, and then the start opening opening member 33c is opened. In addition, the display content of the through gate display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, so that the result of the entry assist lottery is definitively displayed.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 while the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, the change display for that portion will be displayed after the current change display has ended. In other words, the change display of the through gate display device 41 will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of times that the change display can be held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times are held, and the number of times that are held is displayed by lighting the through gate hold lamp 48 provided near the through gate display device 41. In this embodiment, the through gate hold lamp 48 is composed of four lamps, and the number of holds is indicated by appropriately switching the on/off state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) is started to display the result of the activation assist lottery, and when the variable display is stopped after a predetermined time, a mode corresponding to the result of the activation assist lottery is displayed. If the result of the activation assist lottery is a winning result that activates the movable device 722, the movable device 722 will be activated after a predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44 and the variable display is stopped. In addition, the display content of the special gate display device 44 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the activation assist lottery is definitively displayed.

Although more details will be given later, in this embodiment, even if a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the change in display (the result of the operation assist lottery) for that part is not withheld.

In addition, a performance display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37. The performance display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the performance display device 42, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43, and the content is displayed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is located in the center of the bottom of the game area (game board 30). The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big win occurs, the big winning opening opening member 32a is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state in which game balls can win into the big winning opening.

Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that supplies game balls, a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into one unit, and since the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203".

First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the central winning unit 37 from behind is provided on the rear of the game board 30 and protrudes rearward. In addition, a display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are removably attached to the rear side of the frame cover 213.

The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In addition, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the insides can be seen.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning section 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning means. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a specified trace is left behind. This makes it easy to discover whether the board box 263 has been tampered with.

The back frame set 215 is further provided with a first board relay board (not shown) which is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 etc. and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) that is electrically connected to the various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board relay board is electrically connected to the internal ball entry detection switch 437, the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the round ball entry detection switch (15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736), the second special ball entry detection switch 738, and the special gate switch 651. This second board relay board relays the various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector, just like the first board relay board.

In contrast, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, which detect the entry of a ball into the start winning sections 33a and 33b, are connected directly to the main control unit 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

With the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are input into the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown, a large prize opening solenoid that drives the large prize opening opening member 32a to open and close is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 by the variable prize winning device 32, and a start opening solenoid that drives the pair of start opening opening members 33c to open and close is provided in the second start winning section 33b. The back frame set 215 also has a third board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids to the main control unit 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis that extends vertically. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is provided with multiple external connection terminals for relaying various information transmissions to the hall computer of the gaming hall, etc., and is not labeled for convenience. For example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, time-saving mode, etc.), terminals for outputting information regarding the opening of the front frame set 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91, 92 described below, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no ball in the tank error, and payout error, and terminals for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right portions (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 is provided with an opening on the top side, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and further, a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is also provided with a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24 V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the rear pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, which is journalled on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened to the rear. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage section 217, a discharge chute (not shown) is formed to discharge the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, game balls that win in each winning means such as the general winning section 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that do not win in any of the winning means are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate entities and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed integrally.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are removably attached to the rear side of the lower frame set 251 in a stacked manner.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a circuit board box 313a and fixed to the rear side of the lower frame set 251. For convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but in reality they are composed of a single board (printed circuit board).

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and is fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened remains.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside can be seen.

The payout control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returning to the normal state).

The power supply 313 is further provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, since the state before the power outage is stored and retained when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall closes), if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323.

As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. The inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed thereon that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or the like from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defensive performance. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the rear side, and when the inner frame 12 is in a closed state, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launching device 60), and as shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be inserted and removed from the switch main body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward, and the inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces backward. When the detection unit is in a state where it protrudes from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is inserted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control device 261. In other words, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The main control device 261 constitutes the special game state granting means and opening/closing control means in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 502 are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of CPU 501 and the return addresses of control programs executed by CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all data stored in the stack area, working area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

The backup area 503a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off (including the time of power off; the same applies below) so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was off when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on (including the power is turned on when the power is cleared; the same applies below). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described later) when the power is turned off due to a power outage or the like, and when a power outage occurs, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the working area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, through gate display device 41, special display device 43, special gate display device 44, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41, special display device 43, and special gate display device 44 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the performance display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards, etc. are not shown in the illustration, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various detection switches that can constitute specified detection means, such as the general winning switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switches 224a, 224b, through gate switch 225, internal ball winning detection switch 437, special ball winning detection switches 461, 738, non-special ball winning detection switch 462, round ball winning detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651, as well as various electrical components such as various boards, a blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the blade member 404, a rotor motor 415 that rotates the rotor 414, a movable part solenoid 725 that moves the movable part 722 up and down, and a motor that swings the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminal sections (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections etc. form the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means comprises a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, a RAM 553 which is a memory which temporarily stores various data etc. when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed, an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and also various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory which temporarily stores work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 551.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555, and is also connected to the display control device 45. In addition, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the performance button 125, various illumination units, and the lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (e.g., a performance pattern command such as a variation pattern command) sent from the main control device 261, and causes the performance display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not there is a win, and the performance display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays information in accordance with the display of the special display device 43.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512 that stores the control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a may be backed up, and data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off, so that when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, like the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SK1 is input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer in which commands sent from the main control device 261 are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls; a specific command to permit the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and the flag is turned on when the specific command is received, and turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before the power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout return command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state is restored to before the power was cut off, and is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the memory area. When commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the command is updated by returning to the beginning of the memory area. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on each pointer.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a launch control device 312, a payout device 358, etc.

The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation section (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and to a card unit (ball lending unit) placed to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and receives ball lending operation commands from the player and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent from a ball lending device or the like to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, it is possible to omit the card unit connection board 314.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the launch device 60 is operated under the conditions that a launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the launch prohibition button 18a (see FIG. 1) that stops the launch is not operated, and game balls are launched at predetermined intervals with a strength according to the amount of operation of the handle 18. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to launch at intervals of approximately 0.6 seconds (approximately 100 balls per minute).

The display control device 45 executes the display of the decorative patterns on the performance display device 42 according to instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input port 527 is connected to an input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. The input port 527 is also connected to the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 via the bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via the bus line 531, and the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and performs control of the VDP 526 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) by analyzing the received command or performing a predetermined calculation process based on the received command. This performs display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and the display content of the performance display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524. Character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as designs to be displayed on the performance display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the performance display device 42. The VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of the CPU 521, video RAM 524, etc., and mediates the reading and writing of data, and reads out display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a specified timing and displays it on the performance display device 42.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24V AC power supplied from an external source, generates a +12V power supply to drive various switches and motors, a +5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supplies to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc. Note that the launch control unit 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V power supply, +5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control unit 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the power outage processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM clear switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clear switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clear switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clear signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a win/lose random number counter C1 is used in a win/lose lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big win that opens the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening opening member 32a) or a small win that opens the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) based on the detection of the start winning switches 224a and 224b, a variable time selection counter C2 is used to determine the time (variable time) of the variable display performed on the special display device 43, an initial value random number counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the win/lose random number counter C1, a ball entry assist random number counter C3 is used in a ball entry assist lottery to determine whether or not to open the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) based on the detection of the through gate switch 225, and an operation assist random number counter C4 is used in an operation assist lottery to determine whether or not to operate the movable role 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651.

Counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM 503 is provided with a special variable reserve area as a reserve memory area in which the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area in which the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is stored. Both the special variable reserve area and the normal variable reserve area have one execution area and four reserve areas (reserved areas 1 to 4).

In addition, in each of the special variable hold areas, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored in chronological order in accordance with the winning history of the game balls in the first and second start winning sections 33a and 33b. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total, as described above.

Furthermore, in each holding area of the normal variable holding area, the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball through the through gate 34. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the through gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 399, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 399) as the closing value, it returns to 0, which is the lower limit as the opening value. Normally, when the win/no-win random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/no-win random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/no-win random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the win/no-win random number counter C1 is stored in the win/no-win random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (the timing when detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing lottery, which is conducted based on the value of the winning/losing random number counter C1 stored in the special variable reserve area, produces one of the following lottery results: "small win," "big win," or "loss." The winning/losing lottery process related to the big win lottery and small win lottery constitutes the opening lottery process in this embodiment.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of random numbers that result in a "jackpot" is one, and the value is "0." In other words, there is a 1/400 probability of winning a "jackpot," and the special display device 43 displays a stop display in a manner corresponding to a "jackpot" (a combination of lit lamps), resulting in a 15-round jackpot state.

In addition, there are 398 random numbers that can be the "small prize", and the values are "2 to 399". In other words, the probability of winning the "small prize" is 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" in this embodiment includes a "short small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Therefore, among the values of the win/loss random number counter C1, "2 to 21" corresponds to a "long small win", and "22 to 399" corresponds to a "short small win".

When a "short small win" is won, the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a "short small win", and the blade members 404 open for 0.5 seconds. When a "long small win" is won, the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a "long small win", and the blade members 404 open for 1.5 seconds. Here, the opening/closing pattern determination means in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 which executes the small win lottery and the big win lottery, and which determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing members such as the blade members 404.

In addition, the value of the win/lose random number counter C1, "1", corresponds to a "lose", and in the event of a "lose", the special display device 43 displays a stop in a manner (combination of lit lamps) that corresponds to a "lose".

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 includes a win/lose determination table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win."

In addition, in this embodiment, after the big win state ends, a game state is provided in which the time (variation time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. This game state ends when the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43 even if the next big win state does not occur after the big win state ends, and then returns to the normal game state.

Hereinafter, the game state in which the change time of the special display device 43 is shortened will be referred to as the "time-shortened mode," and the normal game state in which the normal change display is performed without shortening the change time will be referred to as the "normal mode." The specific change times of the special display device 43 in the "time-shortened mode" and "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time-saving mode", the start opening opening/closing member 33c of the second start winning section 33b is opened relatively frequently, resulting in a "high ball entry state" in which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b. As a result, in the "time-saving mode", it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b, compared to the "normal mode" in which the start opening opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened, resulting in a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second start winning section 33b.

Specifically, in "normal mode", the through gate display device 41, which displays the results of the entry ball assist lottery that is held based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34, has a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and the opening time of the start opening opening member 33c when the entry ball assist lottery is won is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in "time-shortened mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the start opening opening member 33c when the entry ball assist lottery is won is 2 seconds.

In other words, in the "time-saving mode," the through gate display device 41 fluctuates for a shorter time, and the start opening/closing member 33c is open for a longer time, compared to the "normal mode." Because the start opening/closing member 33c is open for a longer period of time, game balls enter the second start winning section 33b more frequently, winning/losing lotteries are held continuously, and ball holding is improved.

In this way, in the "time-saving mode," if the reserved variable display of the special display device 43 successively wins a small prize (although the flow of closing the vane members 404 once, performing the variable display, and then opening is the same, the variable time is shorter), the vane members 404 will be opened almost continuously (in rapid succession). This makes it easier to cause multiple game balls to enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 all at once.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or a "small win (short small win and long small win)" in the winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, as well as the opening time of the blade member 404 when a "small win (short small win and long small win)" occurs, are the same in both modes (time-saving mode and normal mode).

In addition, the probability of winning the ball entry assist lottery, which is conducted based on the passage of a game ball through the through gate 34, and the probability of winning the operation assist lottery, which is conducted based on the passage of a game ball through the special gate switch 651, are the same in all modes.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and to return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e. 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (when detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the variable time selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area of RAM 503.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the case of a "small win" in the win/lose lottery in "normal mode" is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds." The fluctuation time selection table that is referenced when determining whether the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 corresponds to a "2-second fluctuation" or a "3-second fluctuation" is pre-stored in ROM 502. Therefore, ROM 502 that stores the fluctuation time selection table and the like constitutes the first fluctuation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

In addition, when the lottery results in a "jackpot" or "loss" in "normal mode," the time the special display device 43 changes is "7 seconds."

On the other hand, the time fluctuation of the special display device 43 in the "time-saving mode" is always "0.1 seconds" regardless of the result of the winning/losing lottery ("small win", "big win" or "miss"). Note that the time fluctuation of the special display device 43 is not limited to the four of 2-second fluctuation, 3-second fluctuation, 7-second fluctuation and 0.1-second fluctuation according to this embodiment, and a different time fluctuation may be used.

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to use different prime numbers for the size of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, and to use numbers that are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The ball entry assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The ball entry assist random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34.

Normally, there are eight possible winning random number values, ranging from 1 to 8. When the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, the through gate display device 41 displays a varying value for a predetermined period of time, and then displays a stationary value in a manner (combination of lit lamps) that corresponds to a win or loss, and if a win occurs, the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) opens for a predetermined period of time.

The activation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19). The activation assist random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is obtained when the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

Normally, there are 15 random numbers that can be winning, ranging from 1 to 15. When the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, a fluctuating display is performed for a predetermined period of time on the special gate display device 44, and then a stationary display is performed in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to a win or loss, and if a win occurs, the movable role 722 of the bypass mechanism 721 is in a protruding state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the activation assist lottery constitutes the activation lottery process in this embodiment, and the "lottery process execution means" and "state lottery means" are constituted by the functions of the main control device 261 that executes the activation assist lottery.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, here, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, followed by the main processing.

Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, the process of reading the various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of the various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information is saved. If a game ball is paid out in response to the detection of a switch, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is incremented and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a detection signal has not been input, this process ends as it is. In the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. When this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter C1, the variable time selection counter C2, the goal assist random number counter C3, and the operation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, "399", "9", "9", and "19", respectively), they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Then, in step S304, a start winning process is executed in response to a winning in the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b), in step S305, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the game ball passing through the through gate 34, and in step S306, a ball counting process is executed in response to the ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

In the following step S307, special winning processing is executed in response to detection by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 (ball entering the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or detection by the second special ball entry detection switch 738 (ball entering the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730 of the movable device 722).

Furthermore, in step S308, non-special winning processing is executed in response to detection by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 (entry into the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414), and in step S309, special gate passing processing is executed in response to the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650.

Then, in step S310, the type-based ball entry process is executed in response to detection by the round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (balls entered into the 15R ball entry port 731, the 7R ball entry port 732, and the 3R ball entry port 733), and the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start-up winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 13.

In addition, the execution area of the special variable pending area and each pending area are provided with a win/lose random number storage area that stores the value of the win/lose random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area that stores the value of the variable time selection counter C2, and a start winning discrimination flag for determining whether the pending variable display is based on a ball entering either the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b.

In addition, in the special variable pending area in this embodiment, apart from the areas for storing the values of the hit/miss random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 described above, a big win occurrence flag indicating that a "big win" has been won in the win/miss lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, a miss flag indicating that a "miss" has been won, a long small win occurrence flag indicating that a "long small win" has been won, and a short small win occurrence flag indicating that a "short small win" has been won are provided. In addition, a 2-second variable flag, a 3-second variable flag, and a 7-second variable flag are provided to indicate the variable time in the special display device 43.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the value of the pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first and second start winning sections 33a and 33b, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If the result of the negative determination in step S501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S501, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If the answer is no in step S502, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, where the reserved counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step S504, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process in step S303 above are stored in the first empty reserve area of the special variable reserve area. Here, the specified condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special variable reserve area during a specified jackpot state. Alternatively, the specified condition may be satisfied with a specified percentage, for example a 60% probability, when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special variable reserve area during a specified jackpot state.

In step S505, the start winning discrimination flag of the reserved area in which the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on. In this embodiment, the start winning discrimination flag is set to on when the reserved variable display is based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33a, and is set to off when the held variable display is based on a ball entering the second start winning section 33b.

In the next step S506, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win." The win/loss determination process will be described in detail later.

In the next step S507, a change time determination process is performed to determine the change time in the special display device 43 based on the value of the change time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special change pending area. The change time determination process will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S508, a process for setting a start command is performed. The start command includes information indicating whether the reserved variable information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the variable display) is based on a ball entering the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b, information indicating a "small win" or "big win," information indicating the variable time, etc., which is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

Here, the details of the hit/miss determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. 14. Note that in this embodiment, the hit/miss determination process also determines the type of small hit (long small hit, short small hit).

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area matches "0", which is the value corresponding to a "jackpot". The specified condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to a specific jackpot, such as a guaranteed jackpot, that may result in a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or high support mode after the end of the jackpot state, are stored in the special variable reserve area during a specific jackpot state. Then, if the determination is affirmative in step S5101, i.e., if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S5101 is negative, step S5103 determines whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable pending area is equal to "1", which is the value corresponding to a "lose". If the result of step S5103 is positive, i.e., if it is determined to be a "lose", the loss flag is turned on in step S5104, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5103 is negative, i.e., if it is determined to be a "small win", then in step S5105, it is determined whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to a "long small win". If the result of step S5105 is positive, then in step S5106, the long small win occurrence flag is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

Also, if the result of step S5105 is negative, i.e., if it is determined that a "short small win" has occurred, the short small win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the fluctuation time determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. The function of executing the fluctuation time determination process of step S507 constitutes the first fluctuation pattern selection means in this embodiment.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode is selected. If the result of step S5201 is affirmative, in step S5202, a 0.1-second fluctuation flag is set to ON, indicating that the fluctuation time of the variable display displayed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds, and then this process ends. In other words, if the time-saving mode is selected, the fluctuation time of the corresponding variable display is always set to 0.1 seconds, regardless of whether the result of the win/lose lottery is a big win, a long small win, a short small win, or a miss.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5201 is negative, then in step S5203, it is determined whether or not a long small win occurrence flag was set in the immediately preceding win/loss determination process. If the result of step S5203 is positive, i.e., if it is determined to be a "long small win," then in step S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either "0" or "1."

If the result of step S5204 is negative, i.e., if the value of the change time selection counter C2 is any of "2 to 9", then in step S5205, a 3-second change flag is turned on, indicating that the change time of the change display displayed on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S5204 is positive, then in step S5206, a 2-second change flag is turned on, indicating that the change time of the change display displayed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S5203 is negative, then in step S5207, it is determined whether the short small win occurrence flag is on. If the result of step S5207 is positive, i.e., if a "short small win" occurs, then in step S5208, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either "0" or "1."

If the answer is yes in step S5208, then in step S5205, a 3-second fluctuation flag is set to on, indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is no in step S5208, then in step S5206, a 2-second fluctuation flag is set to on, indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, and then this process ends. In other words, there is a higher possibility that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

If the result of step S5207 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," then in step S5209, the 7-second fluctuation flag, which indicates that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is 7 seconds, is turned on, and then the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, after the processing of step S508, or if a negative judgment is made in step S502, in step S509, it is judged whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning section 33b based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If a negative judgment is made in step S509, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made, in step S510, the pending counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the next step S511, the values of the win/loss random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored in the first available reserved area in the special variable reserved area. In step S512, a win/loss determination process is performed. Note that the win/loss determination process in step S512 is the same as the win/loss determination process in step S506 above, and a detailed description will be omitted.

In the next step S513, a variable time determination process is performed. Note that the correct/incorrect determination process in step S513 is similar to the variable time determination process in step S507 above, and a detailed description is omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a setting process for the preceding command is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If the result of step S601 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S601 is positive, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc, which counts the number of holds in the variable display performed on the through gate display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S602 is positive, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, then the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Then, in the next step S604, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process in step S303 above is stored in the first free memory area of the normal variable reserve area of RAM 503. After that, the through-gate passing process is terminated.

Next, the ball entry count process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the entrance 601b of the introduction passage 601 has been detected, thereby determining whether or not a gaming ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7201 is affirmative, then in step S7202, a ball entry command is set to the sub-control device 262 to inform the sub-control device 262 that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 receives the ball entry command, it is configured to output a ball entry sound effect and turn on/flash a ball entry lamp (not shown) to notify the player that the ball has entered.

After that, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for determining the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by 1. In the following step S7204, a setting process for a monitoring timer that is taken into consideration in the remaining ball monitoring process is performed. In this embodiment, the monitoring timer is set to "10000" every time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected. Even if a predetermined value has already been set in the monitoring timer, it is overwritten with "10000". The monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in the normal process (the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 described later) that is performed every 4 mec. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. 18. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information from the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7301 is positive, then in step S7302, the jackpot flag described below is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If the result of step S7302 is positive, then this process is terminated. In other words, during the jackpot state, even if a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, or if a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 through the movable role 722 (second V winning passage 730) and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate the corresponding jackpot state is not granted.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7302 is negative, then in step S7303, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag, indicating that the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 has detected a ball entry, is already on. If the result of step S7303 is positive, then this process ends. In other words, if it has already been decided that a jackpot state will be generated (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), then even if the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects a ball entry again, that jackpot will be invalidated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7303 is negative, the special prize flag is turned on in step S7304, and then the process ends.

In this embodiment, when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects a ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, but the type of jackpot state to be granted has not been determined. Therefore, the jackpot state is not initiated until the type is determined.

Similarly, when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects an entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, but the game ball has not yet entered the 15R ball entry port 731. Therefore, the jackpot state is not initiated until the game ball enters the 15R ball entry port 731 and a "15-round jackpot" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. 19. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball from the non-special winning ball detection switch 462. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game ball is discharged outside the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) via the out passage 428. If the determination in step S7401 is negative, this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7401 is positive, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1 in step S7402, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the special gate passing process in step S309 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 20.

In step S7501, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If the determination in step S7501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S7501, i.e., if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, then in step S7502, it is determined whether or not the third display flag described below is ON, i.e., whether or not a variable display is being performed on the special gate display device 44. If the answer is YES in step S7502, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7502 is negative, then in step S7503, it is determined whether or not a feature operation flag (described later) is on, i.e., whether or not the movable feature 722 is in operation (protruding state). If the result of step S7503 is positive, then this process is terminated.

As a result, even if a game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the operation assist lottery for that portion is invalidated, and no new right to operate the movable device 722 is granted.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7503 is negative, then in step S7504, the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in a predetermined actuation assist random number storage area set in RAM 503.

In the following step S7505, the special gate passing flag is turned on, and in step S7506, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then the process ends.

Next, the type winning ball processing in step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag is set to ON. If the result in step S7601 is negative, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7601 is positive, then in step S7602, it is determined whether or not the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7602 is positive, then in step S7603, the 15R jackpot flag, which indicates a 15-round jackpot, is set to ON. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S7602 is negative, then in step S7605, it is determined whether or not the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7605 is positive, then in step S7606, the 7R jackpot flag, which indicates a 7-round jackpot, is set to ON. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S7605 is negative, then in step S7608 it is determined whether or not the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 has detected a ball entry. If the result of step S7608 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S7608 is positive, then in step S7609 the 3R jackpot flag is set to ON, indicating that this is a 3-round jackpot. Then, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control device 261 at the time of the power outage to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. The CPU 501 then suspends the ongoing control and starts NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power outage occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12. The contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 9. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-controllers (sub-controller 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON) or not, and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 to clear (delete) the backup data. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the next step S104 to determine whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S111 as well. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the next step S106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. If the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S111 as well.

In the processing of step S111, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-control device 262 and the dispensing control device 311, which are the sub-side control devices. Then, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the validity of the backup based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return to the initial state when you turn on the power, for example when the hall opens for business, you turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process moves to RAM 503 initialization processing (step S112, etc.). That is, in step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), the process at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of recovery from power failure) is executed, provided that the power failure occurrence information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored, and in step S108, the power failure occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command is sent to restore the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure, and in step S110, the used registers are restored from the backup area 503a of RAM 503. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 10. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S201 to S212 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, external output processing is performed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings of the special display device 43 and the second start-up winning section 33b, etc., updated in the previous processing, and to transmit output data such as commands to each control device on the sub side.

For example, when starting a variable display on the performance display device 42, a variable pattern command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In other words, the variable pattern command is a command signal that is output to the sub-control device 262 to cause the performance display device 42 to perform a display performance that matches the display performed on the special display device 43. In response to this, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variable pattern command determines the display mode of the performance display device 42 based on the command, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display that display mode on the performance display device 42.

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the performance display device 42, a confirmation command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In response to this, the sub-control device 262, which has input the confirmation command, issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display performance) being performed on the performance display device 42 based on the command.

However, in this embodiment, as described below, when the jackpot state is in progress, when the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, or when the central winning unit 37 is open (in a small winning state), the first display timer that measures the fluctuation time in the special display device 43 is not decremented (see FIG. 23). Therefore, if the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects a ball entry during the fluctuation display of the special display device 43 (performance display device 42) and the special winning flag is turned on, a confirmation command will not be sent to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the special winning flag ends, and will be sent after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the next step S204, a V-winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a jackpot is set based on the game ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, entering the first V-winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and being detected by the first special ball-entry detection switch 461, or entering the bypass passage 737 via the movable role 722 (second V-winning passage 730) and being detected by the second special ball-entry detection switch 738. Details of this V-winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the type of display to be performed on the special display device 43 and the control contents of the special display device 43 are set, and hit determination and the performance pattern on the performance display device 42 are set. The details of this first display control process will be described later. Note that the first display control means in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the first display control process.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32, i.e., what control is to be performed on the variable winning device 32, is set. As a result, when a big win state (special game state) is reached, the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening member 32a) is executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the blade member opening/closing process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. The blade member opening/closing process will be described in detail later.

In step S208, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the type of display to be performed on the through gate display device 41 and the control contents of the through gate display device 41 are set. The second display control process will be described in detail later.

In step S209, the start winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the start opening opening member 33c of the second start winning section 33b are set. The start winning section control process will be described in detail later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, the type of display to be performed on the special gate display device 44 and the control contents of the special gate display device 44 are set. Details of this third display control process will be described later. The display control means in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the third display control process.

In step S211, a role-playing device drive control process for the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this process, drive control process for the rotating body unit 410, drive control process for the bypass mechanism 721, drive control process for the type allocation mechanism 741, etc. are performed.

For example, in the drive control process for the rotating body unit 410, control is performed such as rotating the rotating body 414 in a counterclockwise direction at a constant speed, and in the drive control process for the type allocation mechanism 741, control is performed such as swinging the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm.

In addition, in the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721, when a predetermined condition is met, control is performed such as protruding the movable part 722. Details of the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721 (hereinafter referred to as the "bypass mechanism control process") will be described later.

In step S212, a remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to check whether or not a game ball is present in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. The remaining ball monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S213, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information has been set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power failure occurrence information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S214 whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, a positive determination is made in step S214, and the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the result of step S214 is negative, the process proceeds to step S215, where the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. After this process, the process proceeds to step S213. In other words, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing at the time of the determination in step S214, the random number initial value counter CINI is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing of the next execution of normal processing.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S212 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter C1) can be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S216 onwards is performed as power failure processing when the power is cut off. The power failure processing first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S216, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S217, and stores the value of the stack pointer in the backup area 503a in step S218. Then, in step S219, a power failure notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step S220, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 503. Then, in step S221, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

The processing of step S213 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to changes in the game state performed in steps S201 to S212, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of step S215 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle, and it can be stored easily. In addition, when returning to the state before the power interruption, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing burden of the main control device 261 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data at the time of the power interruption from being changed, and the state before the power interruption can be reliably stored.

Next, the V-winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag (see the special winning process in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the first special winning detection switch 461 or the second special winning detection switch 738 is on. If the determination in step S1501 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1501 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1503, where it is determined whether the 15R jackpot flag, which indicates that a game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, is set to on.

If the answer is YES in step S1503, then in step S1504, the round number counter for determining the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state is set to "15", and the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special winning flag is turned off, and the big win flag, which indicates that the big win state is in progress, is set to on. Then, in the following step S1506, the first variable flag, which indicates that the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 32 is in progress, is set to on, in step S1507, the first variable timer used to control the opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 is set to "7500", and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", after which the process ends.

If the result of step S1503 is negative, then in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the 7R jackpot flag, which indicates that a game ball has been detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, is set to on. If the result of step S1509 is positive, then in step S1510, the round number counter is set to "7", and the process proceeds to step S1505, where the same process as described above is carried out.

If the result of step S1509 is negative, then in step S1513, it is determined whether or not the 3R jackpot flag, which indicates that a game ball has been detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, is set to on. If the result of step S1513 is negative, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S1513, the round number counter is set to "3" in step S1514, and then the process proceeds to step S1505, where the same process as above is performed.

Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S801, the jackpot flag is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If the determination in step S801 is affirmative, i.e., if the jackpot state is in progress, this process ends. In other words, during the jackpot state, no new variable display is started, and no variable display that has already started is ended.

The jackpot state includes the period during the jackpot state (special game state), the opening period before the jackpot state starts, and the ending period after the jackpot state ends. In general, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display on the special display device 43 stops in a manner corresponding to a jackpot to when the first opening starts on the variable winning device 32), the performance display device 42 displays a message informing the user of the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, during the ending period (a predetermined period after the opening of the final round on the variable winning device 32 has ended), the performance display device 42 displays a message informing the user of the end of the jackpot state and the mode that will be assigned after the jackpot.

If the result of step S801 is negative, then in step S802 it is determined whether the special winning flag is on or not. The special winning flag is set to on when a game ball is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and is set to off when the jackpot flag is set to on (see step S1505 of the V-winning jackpot setting process). If the result of step S802 is positive, then this process is terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, no new variable display is started, and no variable display that has already started is ended.

On the other hand, if the result of step S802 is negative, then in step S803, it is determined whether the small win open flag is set to ON. The small win open flag is set to ON when the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, i.e., during a small win state, as will be described in detail later.

If the answer in step S803 is positive, the process ends. In other words, while the central winning unit 37 is open (during a small win state), no new variable display is started, and no variable display that has already started is ended.

On the other hand, if the answer is negative in step S803, the setting status of the first display flag is checked in step S804 to determine whether or not a change is being displayed on the special display device 43. If the first display flag is set to on, it is considered that a change is being displayed, and if the first display flag is set to off, it is considered that a change is not being displayed. As will be described in more detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the change display on the special display device 43 starts (see step S808), and is turned off when the change display on the special display device 43 is stopped (see step S812).

If the result of step S804 is negative, that is, the game is not in a jackpot state, the right to a jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is not open (in a small winning state), and the special display device 43 is not displaying a variable display, the game proceeds to step S805, where it is determined whether the value of the pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by a ball entering the start winning section 33, is greater than 0. If the result of step S805 is negative, that is, if no variable displays are stored in the pending state, the game ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S805 is positive, i.e., if at least one variable display is stored as pending, then in step S806, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pending counter Na.

In the next step S807, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the special variable reserved area. This shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special variable reserved area to the execution area side in order, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. Note that in this shift process, not only the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, but also the on/off setting states of the jackpot occurrence flag, miss flag, long small win occurrence flag, short small win occurrence flag, 2-second variable flag, 3-second variable flag, and 7-second variable flag are shifted.

In the next step S808, the variable display setting process is performed. Details of the variable display setting process are now described with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether the variable information corresponds to a "jackpot" by determining whether the jackpot occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is set to on. As a modified example, it is also possible to once again refer to the win/loss determination table in the same manner as in the win/loss determination process of the start winning process, and determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variable reserve area is "0", which is a value corresponding to a jackpot.

If the result of step S901 is positive, i.e., if the player wins the "jackpot" in the win/lose lottery, then in step S902, a direct jackpot flag is set to ON, indicating that the player has won the "jackpot" in the win/lose lottery (a "direct jackpot"). After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area is set to ON.

If the result of step S903 is affirmative, then in step S904, a fluctuation pattern that will result in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S905, a value "1750" equivalent to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S903 is negative, then in step S906, a variation pattern (jackpot shortened pattern) that shortens the variation time to result in a jackpot is determined, and a variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S907, a value "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds, is set for the first display timer used to control the variation of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S901 is negative, then in step S908, the system determines whether or not the result is a "miss" by determining whether or not the miss flag in the execution area of the special variable pending area is set to on. As a variant, the system may determine whether or not the result is a "miss" by determining again whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1", in the same manner as the win/loss determination process of the start winning process.

If the result of step S908 is positive, i.e., if it is a "miss", then in step S909, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation pending area is set to on. If the result of step S909 is positive, then in step S910, a fluctuation pattern that will result in a miss (miss fluctuation pattern) is determined, and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also sent to the sub-control device 262. Then, in step S911, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the first display timer, and then the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S909 is negative, then in step S912, a variation pattern that shortens the variation time to result in a miss (miss shortening pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262. In the following step S913, a value "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds, is set for the first display timer used to control the variation of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S908 is negative, i.e., if it is a "small win", the wing open flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether the long small win occurrence flag in the execution area of the special variable pending area is on. As a variant, it may be determined whether or not a "long small win" has been won by determining again whether or not the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any of "2 to 21", in the same manner as the win/loss determination process of the start winning process.

If the result of step S915 is positive, i.e., if it is a "long small win", then in step S916, it is determined whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to ON. If the result of step S916 is positive, then in step S917, a fluctuation pattern (long small win 3-second fluctuation pattern) is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, the first display timer is set to a value of "750", which corresponds to three seconds. Furthermore, in step S919, the opening/closing control timer used to control the opening and closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750", which corresponds to three seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for three seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S916 is negative, then in step S920 it is determined whether the 2-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to on. If the result of step S920 is positive, then in step S921 a fluctuation pattern is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 2 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small win 2-second fluctuation pattern), and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S922, the first display timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to two seconds. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to two seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for two seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S920 is negative, then in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small win shortened pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a long small win is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S925, the first display timer is set to a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in step S926, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. This results in the special display device 43 displaying a variable value for 0.1 seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S915 is negative, i.e., if it is a "short small win", then in step S927, it is determined whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to ON. If the result of step S927 is positive, then in step S928, a fluctuation pattern (3-second fluctuation pattern for a short small win) is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and further, a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, the first display timer is set to a value of "750", which corresponds to three seconds. Furthermore, in step S930, the opening/closing control timer used to control the opening and closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750", which corresponds to three seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a three-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S927 is negative, then in step S931 it is determined whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag for the execution area is set to on. If the result of step S931 is positive, then in step S932 a fluctuation pattern is determined in which the special display device 43 displays a fluctuation for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (short small win 2-second fluctuation pattern), and further a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S933, the first display timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to two seconds. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to two seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for two seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

If the result of step S931 is negative, then in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small win shortening pattern) is determined that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a short small win, and a fluctuation pattern command is set so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is also sent to the sub-control device 262.

In the next step S936, the first display timer is set to a value of "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in step S937, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. As a result, the special display device 43 displays a variable value for 0.1 seconds, after which the blade member 404 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag, which indicates that a variable display is being performed on the special display device 43, is set to ON. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, if the result of step S804 is affirmative, i.e., if the display is changing, the process proceeds to step S809, where the first display timer decrement process is performed. In other words, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Then, the process proceeds to step S810, where the value of the first display timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the predetermined variable time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", step S810 is determined to be positive.

If the result of step S810 is negative, then in step S811, a switching display setting is made to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and this process ends. Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process of the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This realizes the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 at the timing of the first display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S810, i.e., if the timing for stopping the variable display on the special display device 43 has arrived, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the next step S813, the special display device 43 is set to display a stop display. Based on the settings of this stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process of the next normal process. That is, if there is a "big win", the multiple lamps constituting the special display device 43 are displayed as stopped (e.g. lit for only a few seconds) in a manner (combination) corresponding to a "big win", if there is a "miss", the lamps are displayed as stopped in a manner corresponding to a "miss", if there is a "long small win", the lamps are displayed as stopped in a manner corresponding to a "long small win", and if there is a "short small win", the lamps are displayed as stopped in a manner corresponding to a "short small win".

Furthermore, in the stop display setting process in step S813, a setting process is performed to send a confirmation command to the sub-control device 262 to perform a stop display on the performance display device 42.

Then, in the following step S814, the discrimination information setting process is performed, and then the process ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit jackpot flag is set to ON. If the result of step S1001 is positive, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/lose lottery, the jackpot setting from step S1002 onwards is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, a jackpot flag indicating whether or not a jackpot state is being reached as a special game state is set to ON. In the following step S1003, a first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in an open state is set to ON. In this embodiment, when the first variable flag is ON, the variable winning device 32 is set to an open state.

Next, in step S1004, a first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and indicates whether a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening, is set. In this example, a value of "7500", which corresponds to 30 seconds, is set for the first variable timer. This makes the maximum opening time per round (the longest time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter is set to indicate the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the special prize state occurs, i.e., the number of times the opening and closing process of the variable prize-winning device 32 is executed). Here, the value "15", which indicates the total number of rounds, is set to correspond to a "direct jackpot".

In the next step S1006, a winning counter is set to count the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In this example, the value is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls that can enter per round. This process then ends. During the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see step S301 in FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223. If it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one.

Also, if the result of step S1001 is negative, i.e., if the lottery determines that the player has not won the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation count counter is set. The fluctuation count counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-saving mode (high ball entry state). In this embodiment, the time-saving mode continues until the fluctuation display is performed four times on the special display device 43 after the end of the jackpot state, and the counter value is set to "4" after the end of the jackpot, as described below.

Here, if the counter value of the fluctuation counter is "0", this process ends. On the other hand, if the fluctuation counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the time-saving mode is in effect, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the counter value of the fluctuation counter is "0" or not. In other words, it is determined whether the current fluctuation display is the fourth fluctuation display since the end of the jackpot (after the time-saving mode is applied). If the value of the fluctuation counter is "0" here, in step S1010, the time-saving mode flag is turned off, and in step S1011, the normal mode flag is turned on, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation counter is not "0", this process ends as it is.

Next, the variable prize-winning device control process in step S206 will be explained with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S1201, the jackpot flag is checked to determine whether or not a jackpot is occurring. If the result is negative, the process ends.

If the result of step S1201 is affirmative, the count value of the first variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on.

If the result of step S1203 is affirmative, i.e., if the variable winning device 32 is open, the process proceeds to step S1204, where it is determined whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0." In other words, in step S1204, it is determined whether the open time of the variable winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If the result of step S1204 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1205, where it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 has reached the specified number per round (8 in this example). If the result of step S1205 is negative, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (the timing for the end of the round) has not yet arrived, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S1204 or step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, where it is determined whether the counter value of the round number counter is "0." In other words, it is determined whether the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been opened) has reached a specified number of times.

If the result of step S1206 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the process ends. The details of the process are described later.

If the result of step S1206 is negative, i.e., if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number, then in step S1208, a round advance process is performed, and the process ends. In the round advance process, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1. In other words, the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeated until the number of rounds that have been performed reaches the specified number set in advance. In addition, in the round advance process, the first variable flag is turned off, and the first variable timer is set to the wait time (interval time) until the next round begins.

If the result of step S1203 is negative, i.e., if it is during an interval between rounds, the process proceeds to step S1209, where it is determined whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If step S1209 returns a positive result, i.e., the interval period has ended and it is time to start the next round, then the round start process is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (in this example, "7500") is set in the first variable timer, and the maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, "8") is set in the winning counter. If step S1209 returns a negative result, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, then this process is terminated.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. If the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state. On the other hand, if the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in a closed state.

The end setting process of step S1207 will now be described with reference to FIG. 27. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot in progress flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time-saving mode flag is set to on. That is, in this embodiment, the time-saving mode is granted after the end of the jackpot state for all jackpot types, including the "direct jackpot" and the "V prize-winning jackpot ("15-round jackpot", "7-round jackpot", and "3-round jackpot").

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, the variation counter is set to "4" before proceeding to step S1306. In other words, after the big win ends, the time-saving mode is activated until the variation display is performed four times. In step S1306, a process is performed to turn off various big win flags. After step S1306, this process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process of step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade open flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is on. If the result of step S1801 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1801 is YES, then in step S1802, it is determined whether or not the small win open flag, which indicates that the blade members 404 are open, is ON. If the result of step S1802 is NO, that is, if the blade members 404 are about to open due to a "small win" win, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". As described above, if it is determined that a "small win" has been won during the variable display setting process, a value equivalent to the same time as the variable display variable time displayed on the special display device 43 is set for the opening/closing control timer (see steps S919, S923, S926, S930, S934, and S937). Therefore, at the same time as the corresponding variable display ends, this determination is also determined to be positive.

If the result of step S1803 is negative, the value of the open/close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1804, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S1803 is positive, i.e., the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, the small win open flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806.

Then, in step S1807, it is determined whether the long small win occurrence flag for the execution area of the special variable pending area is set to ON. If the determination in step S1807 is affirmative, in step S1808, the opening/closing control timer is set to a value of "375", which corresponds to 1.5 seconds, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1807 is negative, the opening/closing control timer is set to a value of "125", which corresponds to 0.5 seconds, in step S1809, and the process ends.

If the answer is YES in step S1802, then in step S1810, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". If the answer is NO in step S1810, then in step S1811, the value of the opening/closing control timer is decremented by 1, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing has come to close the blade member 404, the small win open flag is turned off in step S1812, the blade open flag is turned off in step S1813, and the blade member 404 is closed in step S1814, after which the process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the blade member opening and closing process in step S207 constitutes an opening and closing control means capable of executing the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means in this embodiment a predetermined number of times (capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner).

Next, the second display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2101, the setting status of the second display flag, which indicates whether or not the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, is checked to determine whether or not the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change (switching display). In more detail, if the second display flag is on, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is displaying a change, and if the second display flag is off, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is displaying a stopped state, which corresponds to a state in which the display for the through gate is stopped.

If the answer is negative in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0. If the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process ends.

Also, if the change is not being displayed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the normal change hold area. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the normal change hold area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

After that, in step S2105, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display (switching display) on the through gate display device 41 have been met. In detail, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed on the through gate display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the time for the variable display on the through gate display device 41 varies between the time-saving mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. In the time-saving mode, the second display timer is set to a value of "125", which corresponds to 0.5 seconds, and in the normal mode, the second display timer is set to a value of "1250", which corresponds to 5 seconds. The predetermined open game state may be the game state of a specific jackpot during which a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or high support mode may be granted after the end of a special jackpot, for example, or the open period of the specific jackpot. During the jackpot state, the second display timer is set to "1250", just like in the normal mode.

Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. Note that, based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the variable display (switching display) will start in the through gate display device 41.

If the result of step S2101 is affirmative, i.e., if the through gate display device 41 is displaying a variable value, the process proceeds to step S2106, where a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is subtracted by 1.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2107, where it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S2107, the second display in progress flag is turned off in step S2108, and a stop display setting is made in step S2109 to display a stop display on the through gate display device 41. Then, based on the contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process.

As mentioned above, whether or not a win has been made is determined based on the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variable reserve area. Specifically, the winning value is "1 to 8" out of the values 0 to 9 on the ball-entering assist random number counter C3.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2110, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stopped display corresponds to a win, setting processing is performed to open and close the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c). Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on, and the opening time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for determining whether the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is in the open state or not.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) differs between the time-saving mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. In the time-saving mode, the second variable timer is set to a value of "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds, and in the normal mode, the second variable timer is set to a value of "100", which corresponds to 0.4 seconds. During the jackpot state, the second variable timer is set to "100", just like in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2107, a switching display setting is made in step S2111 to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41, and this process ends. Then, based on the contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This realizes the variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41 at the timing of the second display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

Next, the start prize section control process in step S209 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 30.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag, which indicates whether the second start winning section 33b (start opening opening member 33c) is in the open state, is on. If it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning section 33b is in the closed state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2201 is affirmative, i.e., if the second variable flag is on, the second start winning section 33b is deemed to be in an open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is subtracted by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2203, where the value of the second variable timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified open time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0", step S2203 is judged as positive. If the judgment here is negative, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2203 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2204, where an end setting process is performed, and the process ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, the second variable flag is turned off.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the second start winning section 33b in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the start opening opening member 33c is output to the second start winning section 33b (start opening solenoid), and the second start winning section 33b is in an open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the start opening opening member 33c is output to the second start winning section 33b, and the second start winning section 33b is in a closed state.

Next, the third display control process of step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31.

First, in step S2301, the setting status of the third display flag, which indicates whether or not a changing display is being performed on the special gate display device 44, is checked to determine whether or not a changing display (switching display) is being performed by the special gate display device 44. In more detail, if the third display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is being performed on the special gate display device 44, and if the third display flag is off, it is considered that a stopped display is being performed, which corresponds to a state in which the changing display is stopped on the special gate display device 44.

If the answer is negative in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302, where it is determined whether the special gate passing flag is on. If the answer is negative in step S2302, i.e., if the special gate passing flag is not on, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passing flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2303, where the special gate passing flag is turned off. In the following step S2304, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for variable display (switching display) in the special gate display device 44 have been met. In detail, the third display in progress flag is turned on, and a third display timer setting process is performed. The third display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed in the special gate display device 44, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is in time-saving mode or normal mode, the variable display time is uniformly set to 1 second, and the third display timer is set to a value of "250", which corresponds to 1 second.

Then, after step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. Note that, based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process of the next normal process, the variable display (switching display) will start on the special gate display device 44.

If the result of step S2301 is affirmative, i.e., if the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable value, the process proceeds to step S2306, where a third display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is subtracted by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2307, where it is determined whether the count value of the third display timer is "0", i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S2307, the third display in progress flag is turned off in step S2308, and a stop display setting is made in step S2309 to display a stop display on the special gate display device 44. Then, based on the contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to display a stop display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process in the next normal process.

As mentioned above, whether or not a prize has been won is determined based on the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 stored in the activation assist random number storage area. Specifically, the winning value is "1 to 15" out of the values 0 to 19 on the activation assist random number counter C4.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2310, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stopped display corresponds to a win, setting processing is performed to perform drive processing of the movable role 722 of the bypass mechanism unit 721. Specifically, the role operation flag is turned on, and the operation time is set in the role operation timer.

The reel in operation flag is information used to determine whether the movable reel 722 is in operation.

The reel operation timer is a means for measuring the operation time (remaining time) of the movable reel 722, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the start of operation. In this embodiment, the reel operation timer is set to a value of "1000", which corresponds to 4 seconds.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2307, a switching display setting is made in step S2111 to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44, and this process ends. Then, based on the contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process in the next normal process. Specifically, the combination of lit lamps is set to be switched sequentially. This realizes the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 at the timing of the third display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the reel drive control process in step S211 above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the reel operation flag, which indicates whether the movable reel 722 is in operation, is on. If it is determined that the reel operation flag is not on (the movable reel 722 is in a stored state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the above step S2401 is answered in the affirmative, i.e., if the reel operation flag is on, the movable reel 722 is deemed to be in a protruding state, and the reel operation timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the reel operation timer is subtracted by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2403, where the value of the reel operation timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified protruding time has elapsed. Here, when the specified protruding time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the reel operation timer becomes "0", step S2403 is judged as positive. If the judgment here is negative, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2403 is positive, the process proceeds to step S2404, where an end setting process is performed, and the process ends. In the end setting process of step S2404, the reel operation flag is turned off.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the reel operation flag, various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism 721 (movable reel solenoid 725) in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the reel operation flag is on, a drive signal is output to put the movable reel solenoid 725 into an excited state, and the movable reel 722 is in a protruding state. On the other hand, when the reel operation flag is off, a drive signal is output to put the movable reel solenoid 725 into a non-excited state, and the movable reel 722 is in a stored state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. First, in step S7101, in order to identify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0" or not.

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by one based on the detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and decremented by one based on the detection of the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and the special gate switch 651.

If the result of step S7101 is positive, i.e., if there are no game balls remaining in the internal area 401, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7101 is negative, then in step S7102, it is determined whether the value of a monitoring timer for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the last time a game ball entered the internal area 401 is "0."

If the result of step S7102 is negative, the value of the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and the process ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the internal area 401, the monitoring timer is set to "10000". Therefore, 40 seconds after the last ball enters the internal area 401, the monitoring timer becomes "0". In this embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the internal area 401 to when it is discharged (specifically, the time from when the game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437 to when the game ball is detected by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736, or the special gate switch 651) is approximately 8 to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7102 is positive, that is, if the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter does not become "0" even after a significant amount of time has passed since the game ball entered the internal area 401 and was released, it is assumed that a ball jam has occurred within the internal area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control such as turning on the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the release of game balls is performed. After that, this processing is terminated.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 34, and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 35.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processes executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311 are put on hold for a while, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command reception flag is turned on to store that the command has been transmitted from the main control device 261, and this reception interrupt process is terminated. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated to store the next command received in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process of the command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it may be confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command may be stored in the command buffer of RAM 513 and the command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started when the power is turned on and reset.

First, in step S3101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in the following step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power failure occurrence information is set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 513 is saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization of RAM 513 in step S3115 and subsequent steps.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information has been set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored in step S3109, the power failure occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. Also, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not power interruption information is set in the backup area 513a. If the power interruption information is set here, it means that the power has been cut off, and the process from step S3123 onwards is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. In the power outage processing, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, a command judgment process to be described later is executed. Then, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, in step S3127, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 513a, and in step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step S3122 checks for information on the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage can be made easier. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so that recovery can be made easily, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 36. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first in step S3201, a command is obtained from the main control unit 261 and a judgment process is performed on that command.

Here, the command determination process of step S3201 will be explained with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step S3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed the initialization of RAM 513 when the power was turned on, so in step S3308 the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3309 the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3311 the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 performs initialization processing of RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command, so the timing at which RAM 503 and the timing at which RAM 513 are initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as the RAM 513 being initialized and being unable to perform control corresponding to the received command. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step S3307, the command judgment process is terminated without clearing the working area of RAM 513 and initializing RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the initialization of RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received with the payout permission flag on. In such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed with the payout permission flag on, a disadvantage such as not being paid out when there are remaining winning balls occurs, causing a loss to the player, but since the initialization of RAM 513 is prevented with the payout permission flag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Also, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to permit the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information of a power outage and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area, and stores it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command sent from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. In addition, when a prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the payout of prize balls can be performed early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Now, let us return to the flowchart in Figure 36 for further explanation. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. If the payout permission flag has not been turned on, this process is terminated. In other words, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being paid out before a command is sent from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the result of step S3202 is positive, then in step S3203, permission to launch is set for the launch control device 312, and in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation should be started, the state return operation is executed. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returned to normal).

After that, in step S3205, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full but not yet set in response to a change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full but not yet set in response to a change in the state of the lower tray. Also, in step S3206, the tank ball no-ball state (bulb out state) or the tank ball no-ball not yet set state (bulb present state) is set based on a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball no-ball state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no-ball switch, and when the tank ball is no longer present, the tank ball no-ball state is set, and when the tank ball is no longer present, the tank ball no-ball state is set.

Then, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, the condition is notified.

Next, the payout control process for the prize balls and loan balls is executed. In detail, the payout number setting process is executed in step S3208, the motor control status acquisition process is executed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is executed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is jammed. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 38. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the command sent from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step S3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is configured as a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the memory area, and when commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the memory area is returned to the beginning and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on each pointer.

In the next step S3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the variable information included in the advance command in a pending information storage area provided in RAM 553. The advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by a ball entering either the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b (setting of the start winning discrimination flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a big win (setting of the big win occurrence flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a long small win or a short small win (setting of the long small win occurrence flag or the short small win occurrence flag), information indicating whether the variable display corresponds to a miss (setting of the miss flag), and information indicating the variable display time (setting of the 2-second variable flag, the 3-second variable flag, the 7-second variable flag, or the 0.1-second variable flag).

The pending information storage area, like the special variable pending area of the main control unit 261, has four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4) and one execution area. The pending information storage area stores the variable information contained in the preceding command in chronological order according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the variable display (information stored in the special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the variable information stored in the special variable pending area of the main control unit 261 can also be grasped by the sub-control unit 262.

Here, the pending information storage process in step S3903 will be explained with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a preceding command has been received (whether or not the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, a pending counter Np that counts the number of pending variable information items stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by 1.

In the next step S4103, the variable information, including information on whether or not the initial command is a big win, information on whether or not the initial command is a small win, information on the variable time, etc., is stored in the first available reserved area in the reserved information storage area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used in determining the content of the performance display are obtained, and the values are stored in the same reserved area in which the variable information was stored.

After performing the processing of step S4104, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, where it is judged whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive judgment is made in step S4105, the value of the pending counter Np is decremented by 1 in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the pending information storage area. This data shift process is a process in which the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the pending information storage area is shifted sequentially to the execution area, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → first pending area, third pending area → second pending area, fourth pending area → third pending area, and so on.

After performing the processing of step S4107, or if a negative judgment is made in step S4105, this processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, where it is judged whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3911.

In step S3905, update processing is performed on various counters used when determining the performance display content. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, various calculation processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and setting the output of the command are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 when a variation pattern command is received. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the performance display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various types of performances (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

The display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during a big win, and the necessary display command is generated each time based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. Normally, the display command related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 is roughly divided into a normal variable data group and a reach performance data group, and basically, the data constituting these data groups are output in sequence in accordance with a time order determined in advance based on the above-mentioned variable time timer, thereby performing display performance according to various variable patterns. For example, if the normal variable data group is normal variable data 1, normal variable data 2, ..., normal variable data m, and the reach performance data group is reach performance data 1, reach performance data 2, ..., reach performance data n, data output is performed in the order of normal variable data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal variation, and then data output is performed in the order of reach performance data 1 → 2 → ... → n with the start of reach performance.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to commands from the sub-control device 262, and starts displaying changes on the performance display device 42. Once a change pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the performance display continues in cooperation with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until a confirmation command is received. Then, when a confirmation command is received, the display of changes on the performance display device 42 is stopped.

In addition, in step S3906, the presence or absence of operation of the effect button 125 is also confirmed, and if operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the change count counter is set to "4" in the end setting process, or if the value of the change count counter is decremented by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command to that effect is output from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, if the sub-controller 262 receives an activation notice command output from the main controller 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, an activation notice display may be performed to warn that it is a super hot time when the movable device 722 will be activated.

For example, the device may notify the player of the number of seconds remaining until the movable device 722 is activated, or may notify the player of the timing at which the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603, thereby ensuring that the movable device 722 will be activated at a better timing.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of the lamps and decorations is set to synchronize with the performance performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display performance performed by the performance display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set to synchronize with the effects performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effects performed by the effect display device 42. In addition, when audio-related commands, such as an error notification, are sent from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, control settings for the customer waiting performance (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed while the performance display device 42 is not performing a display performance corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43) and other processing are performed.

In step 3910, an external output process is executed to transmit a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3909 to each device. For example, when causing the performance display device 42 to perform a display performance corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After steps S3905 to S3910 are executed every 1 msec, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3911, where it is judged whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 553. The information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control device 261.

If no information about the power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step S3912, where it is determined whether or not RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step S3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process is put into an infinite loop to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step S3913. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring and each output port is turned off. In addition, the stored information on the power failure occurrence is erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing is looped infinitely.

As described above in detail, according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched into the game area enters the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) and a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the game area, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball entry opening 403 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is open, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 is guided to the drop passage 602 via the introduction passage 601.

The ball that falls through the drop passage 602 is directed by a route allocation member 603 to a normal guide passage 604 that can lead to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or a special guide passage 605 that can lead to the special device operation lottery area 409.

However, under normal circumstances, the route allocation member 603 is inclined to the right and the special guide passage 605 on the right side is closed, so that the game balls falling down the fall passage 602 are guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

When the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, the route allocation member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined time due to the force it receives from the game ball that comes into contact with it. Therefore, if a game ball falls down the fall passage 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide passage 605.

The game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 is guided to the win/lose lottery area 407, and its destination is allocated by the rotor unit 410 (rotor 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted.

Then, the game ball detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408, where the type of jackpot is determined. After the type of jackpot (number of rounds) is determined, the jackpot state begins.

Meanwhile, the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 is guided to the accessory activation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650. Then, when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an activation assist lottery is held, and if the activation assist lottery is won, the movable accessory 722 is activated for a predetermined period of time.

When the movable part 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are connected via the second V winning passage 730 inside the movable part 722.

When a game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable device 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737, and when the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted.

Then, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot begins.

In other words, when the movable device 722 is in an operating state (protruding state), the game ball that is guided to the normal guide passage 604 is guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731 without passing through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism 741.

The main effects of this embodiment are described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable role 722 in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area 401. In particular, in this embodiment, by activating the movable role 722, it is possible to perform a game presentation that increases the expectation of the occurrence of a V-winning jackpot. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722, and the movable role 722 is configured to be activated if the activation assist lottery is won.

As a result, the movable part 722 does not move constantly, either periodically or continuously, and does not operate every time the special gate switch 651 detects a ball entering the jackpot. This prevents the presentation related to the movable part 722 from becoming monotonous, and increases the player's anticipation of the operation of the movable part 722.

In addition, by providing the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 with a trigger ball entry means (special gate 650) that detects the operation trigger of the movable role 722, whether or not the movable role 722 will be in an advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further increasing the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401 and cannot flow down (cannot enter) the first V winning passage 427, etc. If the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 is configured to flow down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable role 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable role 722 will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine will be easily committed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable role 722. In addition, there is a risk that it will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc. through the normal guide passage 604 without passing through the special gate 650. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the game ball that passes through the special gate 650 and the game ball that the movable device 722 acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various problems mentioned above can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a route allocation member 603 is provided that allocates the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 to either a normal guide passage 604 that can guide the ball to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or a special guide passage 605 that can guide the ball to the role activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650).

For example, when two game balls successively enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the first game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, and the second game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605. As a result, when two game balls successively enter the internal area 401, it is possible to direct the game balls to both the normal guide passage 604 and the special guide passage 605, respectively, thereby making the effect of the movable device 722 more effective.

However, in this embodiment, the launching device 60 is configured to launch game balls at 0.6 second intervals, and the wing members 404 of the central winning unit 37 are opened for 0.5 seconds during a "short small win", and for 1.5 seconds during a "long small win". This makes it difficult for situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple game balls landing in succession on the central winning unit 37 during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing members 404) is open, to occur frequently.

Under such a configuration, if multiple game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open period of the blade member 404), the movable device 722 acts (assists) to increase the probability that the game ball will not enter the V, and there is a risk that the player's expectations will fade and interest will decrease when multiple game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 consecutively at the same time.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the time period during which the display changes (the time from when a specific game ball passes through the special gate 650 until the movable device 722 starts to operate) displayed on the special gate display device 44 is set to "1 second," and the operating time of the movable device 722 after it starts to operate is set to "4 seconds."

As a result, even if, for example, other game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650, or other game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650 do not enter the V, game balls that subsequently enter the central winning unit 37 will be given a higher chance of entering the V.

In other words, game balls other than the game ball that entered the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball that passed through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open period of the blade member 404) are given a chance to win a V with a higher probability.

More specifically, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the entrance portion 601b as the specific area) flows down the normal guide passage 604, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the entrance portion 601b) flows down the special guide passage 605, and then the game ball that flows down the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 is activated, in the normal When the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 604 passes through the movable device 722, the movable device 722 has not yet been activated, and the game ball that has flowed down the normal guide passage 604 is not acted on (assisted by) the movable device 722 and does not win the V prize. Even if this is the case, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 during the next open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) (the game ball that passes through the entrance 601 after the next time) will flow down the normal guide passage 604, and the action of the movable device 722 will provide a chance to win the V prize.

Of course, instead of the above configuration, various set times such as the time it takes for the variable display performed by the special gate display device 44 to change (the time until the movable device 722 starts to operate) and the operation time of the movable device 722 after it starts to operate can be set to times different from the above set times, and after a certain game ball passes through the special gate 650, after a relatively long period of time (for example, after one minute or more), the game ball that enters the internal area 401 flows down into the normal guide passage 604, and the action of the movable device 722 provides a chance to win a V prize.

This configuration allows the player to actively play the game, trying to get the game ball to enter the central winning unit 37, even after confirming that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. As a result, the player's interest can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to the above-described embodiments in any combination of all or part. It is also possible to combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine that combines the functions of a gaming machine (so-called old type 1 pachinko machine) in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes to create a jackpot state (direct jackpot) when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and the functions of a gaming machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a central winning unit 37 opens and closes when a small jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and a gaming ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427, etc., to create a jackpot state (V winning jackpot).

It is not limited to this, and may be implemented as other types of pachinko machines in which a predetermined gaming value is awarded. The gaming value may include, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) awarded during a jackpot, and gaming modes such as a high probability mode awarded after the jackpot ends. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball machines.

For example, when a game ball enters the start winning section 33, a predetermined lottery process is not performed (or a lottery process with a 100% probability of winning may be performed), and the central winning unit 37 opens based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, and the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427 or the like, creating a jackpot state (a type of game machine known as the old type 2 pachinko machine).

In addition, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot state occurs in which the central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means opens and closes. In such a case, the variable winning device 32 may be omitted. In other words, in a gaming machine of the type in which a jackpot state occurs in which a specified variable ball entry means (a large winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering a specified starting ball entry means, a movable body may be provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Also, the machine may be implemented as a type of gaming machine that includes a variable ball entry means such as a central entry unit 37 that opens when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering the start entry section 33, and that awards a specific gaming value when a gaming ball that enters the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means such as a V entry port. In other words, in this type of gaming machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b constituting the specific area, and a game ball that enters the right ball entry opening 403 always passes through the right entrance 601b constituting the specific area, and a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437 constituting the specific detection means. However, various configurations related to the specific area and the specific detection means, such as the position and number at which the specific area and the specific detection means are provided, are not limited to the configuration related to the entrance 601b and the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, one or more specific areas and specific detection means may be provided at a position different from the left and right entrances 601b, such as a configuration in which one exit 601a of the introduction passage 601 is set as a specific area and the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is placed there as the specific detection means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403, etc. (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601, and the pair of left and right inlets 601b) may be omitted. For example, the left ball entry opening 403, etc. (including the left blade member 404, the left part of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet part 601b on the left side) may be omitted, and only the right ball entry opening 403, etc. (including the right blade member 404, the right part of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet part 601b on the right side) may be provided. This results in a configuration in which a ball passage (the right part of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and which can guide the game balls one by one to the outlet part 601a, which is a specific area provided only at one location, is provided only at one location. In other words, the game balls that do not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the internal area 401 by passing through the outlet part 601a. In addition, the ball passage (the right side of the lead-in passage 601) is located in a position where only game balls that are shot with a certain strength (right-handed hit) and fly over the central winning unit 37 can pass through.

Alternatively or in addition to this, a ball passage (such as a ball passage member having a ball passage) capable of guiding game balls one by one to the ball entrance opening 403 on one side (including the blade member 404 on one side, one side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet portion 601b on one side) may be provided at an outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37 (for example, the right side).

In addition, in a specific area such as the outlet 601a or inlet 601b of the introduction passage 601, the passage may be configured to allow the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction (towards the internal area 401), while being provided with a restricting means (such as a valve-shaped member that changes state from a first state to a second state depending on the force received from the game ball) that restricts the game ball from passing in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction.

The probability of winning in various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (such as lottery processing using software or lotteries using mechanical mechanisms) is set appropriately for each model, and any value can be used. It goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate.

It may also be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which the gaming balls are circulated within the gaming machine and not directly paid out to the player, i.e. a so-called sealed-in type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and may have a different configuration.

For example, in the above embodiment, the types of jackpot states are set as a "3-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "15-round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 15 times, but the invention is not limited to these and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may also be configured to occur.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that can only generate one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot), rather than a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states.

(c) The configuration of the game mode granted after the end of the jackpot state (such as the granting period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time-saving mode is applied in which the time (changing time) of the changing display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the changing display is performed four times on the special display device 43, but the period during which the time-saving mode is applied is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving mode may be configured to continue after the end of the jackpot state until the next jackpot state occurs.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the time-saving mode, a high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot state (direct jackpot) is increased may be given as the game mode after the jackpot state ends. A specific game mode such as the time-saving mode or high-probability mode may be set as a special game state. When a jackpot that entitles the player to the high-probability mode after the jackpot state ends, a so-called special jackpot, occurs, the special display device 43 may display the stop in a specific manner corresponding to the special jackpot. Of course, the game machine may be configured so that the time-saving mode, high-probability mode, etc. are not given after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the ball entry assist lottery, which is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the through gate 34, and the probability of winning the operation assist lottery, which is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the special gate switch 651, are configured to be the same in either mode.

In addition to this, the game mode after the end of the big win state may be a mode (high support mode) in which the probability of winning the ball entry assist lottery, the probability of winning the operation assist lottery, the probability of winning a small win (especially a long small win), etc. is higher than in the normal mode, instead of or in addition to the time-saving mode or the high probability mode. At least one of these high support modes may be a specific game mode.

(d) The configuration related to the device activation lottery (device activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the device activation lottery area 409, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable device 722. If the activation assist lottery is won, the activation condition is met and the movable device 722 is activated.

In addition to this, for example, the configuration may be such that, without performing a lottery process, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, the activation condition is always met and the movable device 722 is activated.

It may also be configured to include a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the count value reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, an operating condition is met and the movable device 722 is activated. It may also be configured to include a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the count value reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and an operating condition is met and the movable device 722 is activated.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery that determines whether or not to activate the movable role 722 may be performed not by software lottery processing, but by providing a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a crown in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 and performing the lottery based on the behavior of the game ball. However, performing the lottery processing by software is preferable in terms of simplifying the configuration of the central winning unit 37.

For example, in the role activation lottery area 409, instead of the game ball always passing through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), the game ball may pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate (or not).

(d-3) In addition, in the above embodiment, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the operation trigger of the movable part 722 is configured to be provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, but the location at which the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this and may be a different location.

For example, the central winning unit 37 may be configured to have a second internal area (an area where balls can enter from an entrance portion different from the ball entry opening 403 that is opened and closed by the blade member 404) different from the internal area 401, and a trigger ball entry means (special gate) may be provided in the second internal area.

(d-4) Also, like the through gate 34, a trigger ball entry means (special gate) may be provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter (pass through). The configuration relating to the trigger ball entry means is not limited to a ball entry means such as a through gate through which an entering game ball can pass, but may also be a ball entry means such as a winning port through which an entering game ball is discharged outside the game area. Then, a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined winning port, and the movable device 722 may be configured to operate when a predetermined operating condition is met, such as when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. For example, as described below, when a game ball is detected by the start winning section 33a, 33b (start winning switch 224a, 224b) during a lottery invalid period, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722, and if the activation assist lottery is won, the activation condition is established and the movable role 722 is activated.

In addition, a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 may pass through the special gate 650, be detected by the special gate switch 651, and then return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, rather than being ejected to the back side of the game board 30.

In addition, a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 may pass through the special guide passage 605 without being detected by a specified ball detection means, return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, and then enter a trigger ball entry means (such as a special gate) provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, where it may be detected by a trigger ball entry detection means (such as a special gate switch).

However, if the trigger ball entry means (special gate) that detects the activation trigger of the movable gimmick 722 is located outside the central winning unit 37, there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means (special gate switch) to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to be committed by activating the movable gimmick 722. From this perspective, it is more preferable that the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is located within the central winning unit 37.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display starts on the special gate display device 44, and after a predetermined time, a stationary display is made in a manner corresponding to the result of the activation assist lottery, and if the result of the activation assist lottery is a winning result, the movable device 722 is then configured to operate.

Not limited to this, the display means for displaying the results of the activation assist lottery (special gate display device 44) may be omitted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the change time of the change display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may include multiple change patterns with different change display times.

For example, the main control device 261 may be configured to include a fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times, and a fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a gaming ball by the special gate switch 651, and to control the special gate display device 44 based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means.

This allows the time from when the special gate display device 44 starts to display the change to when it stops to be variable. In turn, it allows the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 to when the movable device 722 actually goes into an operating state (advantageous state) to be variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, even if a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, the change display (the result of the activation assist lottery) for that part is not withheld. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that part is invalidated, and the right to activate the movable device 722 is not newly granted.

In addition to this, when a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, and this is detected by the special gate switch 651, the device may be configured to include a hold means (variable hold area) that can hold a predetermined number of variable displays (operation assist lottery results).

The holding means (variable holding area) may be configured to have one execution area and multiple holding areas, similar to the normal variable holding area that stores the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 in the above embodiment, and the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 may be stored in chronological order in the multiple holding areas in accordance with the passing history of game balls through the special gate 650. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the value of the operation assist random number counter C4, and other information may be stored.

(e) The configuration related to route allocation (route allocation area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route allocation member 603 in the above embodiment is supported so as to be swingable, and is normally maintained in a right-inclined state by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown), so that a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 can flow down to the left-side normal guide passage 604. In this state, when a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 is guided to the left-side normal guide passage 604, the route allocation member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614, and is configured to be in a left-inclined state for a predetermined time, so that a game ball falling through the fall passage 602 can flow down to the right-side special guide passage 605.

The configuration of the route allocation means (shape, operation mode, etc.) is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, an axle pin 610 is fixed to the axle 611 of the route allocation member 603, the axle 611 protruding toward the rear side of the upper rear wall 400a, and further, as shown in FIG. 46, an action piece 800 is formed extending downward from the rear end of the protruding axle pin 610, and a pair of coil springs 801, 802 are provided as a maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from the left and right, so that the route allocation member 603 is normally configured to maintain a balanced state (reference posture) with no left-right tilt in the center position of the central piece 613 (position of the axle pin 610)

By configuring it in this way, when a game ball falls onto the route allocation member 603, which is normally in a balanced state, it is not clear whether the game ball will be guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side or the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

When a game ball that has fallen onto the route allocation member 603 in an equilibrium state is guided, for example, to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the route allocation member 603 rotates once in a clockwise direction due to the force of the game ball contacting the right piece 615, and enters a right-inclined state (first position) [see FIG. 41(a)], and then rotates counterclockwise due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, and enters a left-inclined state (second position) [see FIG. 41(b)]. After that, the route allocation member 603 swings left and right multiple times, and then returns to an equilibrium state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, such that it enters a right-inclined state again.

Similarly, when a game ball that has fallen onto the route allocation member 603 in a balanced state is guided, for example, to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, the route allocation member 603 rotates once counterclockwise due to the force of the game ball contacting the left piece 614, becoming inclined to the left, and then rotates clockwise due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, becoming inclined to the right. After that, the route allocation member 603 swings left and right multiple times, becoming inclined to the left again, and then returns to a balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802.

In this configuration, when two game balls fall consecutively onto the route allocation member 603 in an equilibrium state, if the first leading game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left, the second following game ball will be guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right. Conversely, if the first leading game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right, the second following game ball will be guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left.

The above configuration does not require a driving means for driving the route sorting member 603, and while adopting a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which multiple game balls that fall continuously are sorted alternately into different routes. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration and control, and to make the device more compact.

(e-2) In the route allocation member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, a weight may be attached to the lower end of the action piece 800, so that the route allocation member 603 is normally kept in a balanced state, but can be freely swung by the action of the game ball.

(e-3) In the route allocation member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, a drive means (allocation drive means) such as a motor that swings the route allocation member 603 may be provided, so that the route allocation member 603 swings periodically or continuously between a right-tilted state and a left-tilted state. In addition, the route allocation means such as the route allocation member 603 may be normally in a stopped state, and may be in a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is met and a specific state is reached.

(e-4) The route allocation means does not have to be movable, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or may be integral with it. In other words, the route may be allocated based on the random behavior of the game ball. In addition, the position and number of the route allocation means and other various configurations related to the route allocation means are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, one or more route allocation means may be provided in a position different from that of the above embodiment (another variable ball entry means different from the central winning unit 37).

(f) The configuration of various guidance routes is not limited to the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the time from when the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) and the movable device 722 is in an advantageous state is shorter than the movable body arrival time from when the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the movable device 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604).

If the time required for the game ball to reach the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 to reach an advantageous state is longer from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 to the movable device 722 (the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604) than the time required for the game ball to reach the movable device 722 (the exit 604a of the normal guide passage 604), when two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable device 722 before the movable device 722 operates, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

In addition, in order to lengthen the time it takes for the game ball guided into the normal guide passage 604 to reach the movable device 722, it is possible to, for example, lengthen the distance the game ball needs to travel to pass through the normal guide passage 604. Alternatively or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the normal guide passage 604.

Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane that causes the game ball to go back and forth or make a circuit in the same place several times before moving on, or a rib or the like that stops the momentum of the game ball and allows it to move on over time.

(f-2) For example, in the above embodiment, only one special guide passage 605 is provided to guide the game ball to the special gate 650 as a second route (trigger ball entry guide route) that guides the game ball sorted by the route sorting member 603 to the trigger ball entry means (special gate). However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may include multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes) that differ in the time it takes for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means (special gate) from the route sorting member 603.

By providing multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes), the period from the time when the game ball is allocated by the route allocation member 603 (predetermined trigger) to when the movable device 722 actually enters an operating state (advantageous state) can be varied.

In addition, with the above configuration, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 to when it reaches the trigger ball entry means (special gate) can be varied by a mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball, so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further increasing the interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in Figure 47, the configuration may include a first second route (first special guide passage 605A) in which the time it takes for the game ball to reach an advantageous state from the time the game ball is guided by the route distribution member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the first trigger ball entry means (first special gate 650A) and the movable device 722 becomes activated is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the game ball is guided by the route distribution member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the game ball reaches the movable device 722 (exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604), and a second second route (second special guide passage 605B) in which the time it takes for the game ball to reach an advantageous state from the time the game ball is guided by the route distribution member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 until the movable device 722 becomes activated is shorter. Here, the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" constitutes the "first downflow route," and the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" constitutes the "second downflow route" (and so on).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, a first special gate switch 651A is provided in the first special gate 650A to detect a game ball passing through it, and a second special gate switch 651B is provided in the second special gate 650B to detect a game ball passing through it. Here, the "first special gate switch 651A" constitutes the "first trigger ball entry detection means," and the "second special gate switch 651B" constitutes the "second trigger ball entry detection means" (same below).

The passage width of each of the special guide passages 605A, 605B and the special gates 650A, 650B is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one at a time. In addition, game balls that pass through each of the special gates 650A, 650B are discharged outside the internal area 401 via a discharge passage (not shown).

In addition, a slide member 655 capable of opening and closing the entrance is provided at the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is provided so that it can slide in the front-rear direction. When displaced to a forward protruding position, it is in a closed state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and when displaced to a rearward retracted position, it is in an open state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is open.

When the slide member 655 is in a closed state, the game balls sorted by the route sorting member 603, which serves as an upstream route sorting means, pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and are guided to the first special guide passage 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in an open state, the game balls sorted by the route sorting member 603 are guided to the second special guide passage 605B.

The sliding member 655 may be configured to constantly repeat the sliding movement, or the state of the sliding member 655 may be changed periodically or randomly. In addition, the sliding member 655 may be controlled so that the proportion of the sliding member 655 that is in the open state and the proportion of the sliding member 655 that is in the closed state differ in a particular state.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) in this embodiment, and can change the destination of the game ball to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)." In addition, the route allocation means such as the route allocation member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655.

When a game ball is detected by each of the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an activation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722. If the activation assist lottery is won, the movable role 722 is activated for a predetermined period of time. Note that the probability of winning the activation assist lottery may be different when the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A in a specific state from when the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. In other words, the probability that the movable role 722 can be in a predetermined activation state may be different when the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)".

In the example shown in FIG. 47, ribs 653A and 653B are provided on the first special guide passage 605A, which is the path along which the game ball moves, to lengthen the path length of the first special guide passage 605A, and the game ball's momentum is stopped so that it moves forward over time.

In addition to or in place of the ribs 653A and 653B, other delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage or a crane, a mechanism that makes the game ball go back and forth or go around the same place several times before moving forward) may be arranged in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A, 650B (special gate switches 651A, 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B, but instead, a game ball passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B may move toward one special gate (special gate switch) and be detected by the same special gate switch.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 47, if the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball will always pass through the first special gate 650A (first special gate switch 651A), and if the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball will always pass through the second special gate 650B (second special gate switch 651B). However, without being limited to this, the game ball may be configured to pass (or not pass) through the first special gate 650A or the second special gate 650B as the trigger ball entry means at a predetermined rate. In addition, the proportion of game balls that can pass through the trigger ball entry means (the proportion of movable device 722 that can be in a specified operating state) may be different when the game ball flows down the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)."

(f-3) A configuration with multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above will be more effective under the configuration related to the route allocation member 603 exemplified in (e-1) to (e-3) above.

If the time required for the game ball to reach the special gate 650 and the movable device 722 to be in an advantageous state is longer from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 to the time the game ball reaches the movable device 722, when the route allocation member 603 guides the game ball to the special guide passage 605, the time required for the game ball to reach the movable device 722 to be in an advantageous state, if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable device 722 before the movable device 722 is activated, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball is directed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 and the second game ball is directed to the normal guide passage 604, the likelihood of a jackpot occurring increases, and the player will watch with anticipation the behavior of the game ball that has been guided to the special guide passage 605.

On the other hand, if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable role 722 from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the normal guide passage 604 is shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the movable role 722 from the time the game ball is guided by the route allocation member 603 to the special guide passage 605 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 and the movable role 722 is in an advantageous state, if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the special guide passage 605 by the route allocation member 603 and the second game ball is allocated to the normal guide passage 604, it will be clear that the game ball will reach the movable role 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable role 722 ends, unless the movable role 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, and this may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball is directed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603 and the second game ball is directed to the special guide passage 605, the likelihood of a jackpot occurring increases, and the player will watch with anticipation the behavior of the game ball that has been guided to the special guide passage 605.

Therefore, if the configuration has multiple second routes (trigger ball entry guide routes) as described above, even if two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the normal guide path 604 or the special guide path 605, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route (first special guide path 605A) with a long time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route (second special guide path 605B) with a short time to reach the advantageous state." This leaves the possibility that the timing at which the movable device 722 operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable device 722 will match, so the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

(g) The configuration related to the winning/losing lottery (winning/losing lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a rotor unit 410 (rotor 414) is provided as a win/lose allocation means. The rotor 414 has one special pocket 416a for a jackpot and two non-special pockets 416b for losses, and rotates at a constant speed in a counterclockwise direction.

For example, the number and ratio of pockets 416a and non-special pockets 416b on the rotating body 414 may be changed to change the probability of winning the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In addition, the rotating body 414 may be configured to have, for example, a special pocket section 416a for a 3R jackpot and a special pocket section 416a for a 7R jackpot, and a jackpot type lottery may also be conducted in the win/lose lottery area 407. In such a case, the type lottery area 408 may be omitted.

(g-3) Instead of the rotating body 414, the configuration may include another winning/losing lottery mechanism, such as a crown.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) The type-based lottery area 408 is provided with a type-based allocation mechanism 741 as a type-based allocation means (type-based determination means) that allocates the destination of game balls to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733.

Instead of the type-sorting mechanism 741, the device may be configured with another type-selection mechanism, such as a crane.

(h-2) The type selection area 408 may be omitted, and the type of jackpot state to be awarded may be determined when a gaming ball enters a special ball entry means such as the first V winning passage 427. In other words, the type determination that determines the type of jackpot state may be performed by software-based determination processing.

(i) The configuration of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the route allocation area 406 (route allocation member 603) and the device activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) may be omitted. In such a case, for example, when a ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, an activation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to activate the movable device 722.

However, if the movable part 722 is simply configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the ball entry detection by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, the movable part 722 will operate at the same timing every time a game ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

Therefore, in such cases, it is preferable to also employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration described above that makes the fluctuation time variable.

(j) The configuration (position, shape, operation mode, advantageous state, etc.) of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 is not limited to the configuration related to the movable device 722 in the above embodiment, and other configurations such as an opening and closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable device 722 according to the above embodiment is configured to be in an operating state (advantageous state) so as to avoid the winning/losing lottery performed by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery performed by the type allocation mechanism 741, and to guide the game ball that is normally guided to the guide passage 604 directly to the 15R ball entrance 731.

In other words, when the movable part 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is configured to make it easier to get a V-winning jackpot than when the movable part 722 is in an inoperable state (non-advantageous state), and it is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the 15R ball entrance 731, which corresponds to the 15R jackpot that is the most advantageous to the player out of the multiple types of special game states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot).

In addition to this, the configuration may be such that the game ball is guided to the entrance of the type lottery area 408 while avoiding the win/lose lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and only the right to generate a jackpot state is granted.

(j-2) Also, a movable body may be provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the movable body changes state to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type allocation mechanism 741 may be avoided, and the game ball may be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731.

(j-3) The rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotating body 414, which normally rotates at a constant speed, may change to an advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, and the special pocket portion 416a for the jackpot may stop temporarily at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435, or the special pocket portion 416a for the jackpot may move at a very slow speed through a position corresponding to the gate portion 435.

(j-4) The rotor 414 may be configured to have, for example, a special pocket 416a for a 3R jackpot, a special pocket 416a for a 7R jackpot, and a special pocket 416a for a 15R jackpot, and the rotor 414 may be controlled so that the special pocket 416a for the 15R jackpot moves at a very high speed through the position corresponding to the gate 435 during normal play (non-advantageous state), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the special pocket 416a for the 15R jackpot, and when the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and an advantageous state is reached, the special pocket 416a for the 15R jackpot may be controlled to stop temporarily at the position corresponding to the gate 435, or to move at normal speed through the position corresponding to the gate 435.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism 741 (first bridge plate 744, second bridge plate 745) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first and second crossing plates 744 and 745, which normally oscillate, may change to an advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, and may stop temporarily at the advance position, or may spend more time at the advance position, making it easier for the game ball to enter the 15R ball entrance 731.

(j-6) The movable body (movable gadget 722, rotating body 414, type allocation mechanism 741, etc.) may also be configured to have a plurality of operating states (advantageous states). This may also be configured to be determined by the results of a predetermined operation lottery process. In this way, when the movable body is set to an operating state (advantageous state), the operation pattern determination means in this embodiment is configured by a function that determines which of the plurality of operation patterns is to be executed.

Furthermore, when a movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), it may be configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the special ball entry means (V entry passage 427, 730, etc.) and it is easier to get a V entry jackpot than when the movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Also, when a movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), it may be configured so that it is easier to get a predetermined type of special game state (for example, a 15R jackpot, which is the most advantageous for the player) out of multiple types of special game states (for example, a 15R jackpot, a 7R jackpot, a 3R jackpot) than when the movable body such as the movable part 722 is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, if a winning result is obtained by the activation assist lottery, during the activation start period before the movable role 722 is activated, the performance display device 42 or other performance means may be configured to be capable of executing an opening performance as a pre-activation performance that suggests that the movable role 722 will be activated.

In addition, when a variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and a static display is performed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery, such an opening performance is performed after the static display. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which a variable display is not performed), the opening performance is performed after the winning result is obtained from the operation assist lottery.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262 may be configured to include a performance pattern storage means for storing multiple performance patterns that determine the performance time of the opening performance, a performance pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the multiple performance patterns stored in the performance pattern storage means based on the establishment of an activation condition (for example, when a winning result is obtained through an activation assist lottery), and a performance control means capable of controlling a predetermined performance means based on the performance pattern selected by the performance pattern selection means.

This configuration makes it possible to vary the activation start period (e.g., the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when an activation condition is met) to when the movable device 722 actually enters an advantageous state.

(k-2) The activation start period from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when an activation condition is met) to when the movable reel 722 actually enters an advantageous state may be made variable without performing the above-mentioned opening effect or other effects.

For example, the main control device 261 may be configured to include an operation pattern storage means for storing multiple operation patterns that determine the operation start period from when the operation conditions are met until the movable role 722 enters an operating state, an operation pattern selection means that can select one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the special gate switch 651, and a control means that can control the movable role 722 based on the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

(l) In addition to game effects using movable objects such as the movable role piece 722, the configuration may be such that other game effects are performed.

(l-1) For example, a specific process advantageous to the player may be executed when a predetermined condition is met based on the detection of a game ball being discharged outside the internal area 401 through a discharge route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special ball entry detection switch 462) or the special guide passage 605 (special gate switch 651) without being guided to the first V winning passage 427, etc. The specific process execution means in this embodiment is constituted by the functions of the main control device 261, etc. that execute such processes.

This allows new gameplay to be provided by utilizing not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the first V winning passage 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged through the discharge route (second route), resulting in a dramatic increase in interest for players.

(l-2) For example, a counting means is provided to count the number of game balls detected by ball detection means (discharged ball detection means) such as the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 or the special gate switch 651, and a predetermined condition is met when the count value reaches a predetermined number or more, or a predetermined lottery process is executed when the count value reaches a predetermined number or more, and a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and a specific process advantageous to the player is executed.

Such specific processing may include, for example, processing to lengthen the time that the movable device 722 remains in an activated state, processing to increase the probability of winning in the activation assist lottery, processing to make it easier for game balls to enter the special pocket 416a of the rotating body 414, and processing to make it easier for game balls to be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731 in the type lottery area 408.

(m) The small prize opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the blade member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 and the large prize opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the large prize opening opening member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 are not limited to the above embodiment.

(m-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 is configured with two opening and closing patterns, a "short small hit" and a "long small hit", but this is not limited thereto, and the blade member 404 may be configured with one or three or more opening and closing patterns.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade members 404 of the central winning unit 37 are opened for 0.5 seconds during a "short small win" and for 1.5 seconds during a "long small win", but the opening mode (opening time) of the blade members 404 is not limited to the above embodiment and may be configured to have other opening modes with different opening times.

(m-3) In the above embodiment, the opening and closing operation (opening operation) of the blade member 404 is performed only once (one round) for each small win (the result of one winning or losing lottery performed based on the ball detection by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b), but this is not limited to the above, and the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 may be performed two or more times (multiple rounds) for each small win.

(m-4) For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple opening and closing patterns with different numbers of opening and closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, such as a configuration having a first opening and closing pattern in which the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed once (one round) and a second opening and closing pattern in which the opening and closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed twice (two rounds). However, when a predetermined opening and closing pattern (for example, a long small win with an opening for 1.5 seconds) is performed among the multiple opening and closing patterns, it is preferable that the movable body such as the movable role 722 is more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening and closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short small win with an opening for 0.5 seconds).

(n) In the above embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring process (step S212) is performed in consideration of the remaining balls in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. In addition, in the first display control process (step S205), it is determined whether or not the wing member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is in the midst of a small win, and if it is in the midst of a small win, a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already started is not ended.

In place of or in addition to these configurations, if a game ball is detected in the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) during the opening of the small win of the wing member 404 of the central winning unit 37, the big win lottery and small win lottery may not be executed. In other words, a lottery invalid period may be set.

In addition, taking into consideration the discharge period of the remaining balls, the lottery invalid period may include the opening period of the blade member 404 as the open game state (small win opening period), as well as a predetermined period after the end of the opening period (after the blade member 404 is closed). Of course, the lottery invalid period is not limited to this, and may be a different period. For example, the lottery invalid period may include the period from when the game ball enters the start winning section 33 to when the small win opening begins. Also, in a type of gaming machine in which a predetermined lottery process is performed even during a predetermined winning state (during the opening and closing control of the variable ball entry means), the lottery invalid period may be a predetermined period (lottery period) during which the predetermined variable ball entry means is caused to execute a predetermined opening.

In a pachinko machine in which the lottery invalid period is set, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery is invalid before starting the initial winning process of step S304 above, and if it is invalid, only the prize ball payout setting (prize ball command setting) for the initial winning section 33 is performed without storing various counter values such as the win/lose random number counter C1 in the initial winning process, while if it is not invalid, the configuration may be such that it transitions to the initial winning process.

In addition, when such a configuration is adopted, instead of or in addition to the activation assist lottery for the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), an activation assist lottery may be held to determine whether or not to activate the movable device 722 when a game ball is detected in the start winning section 33 (first start winning section 33a or second start winning section 33b) during the lottery invalid period, and the movable device 722 may be activated if the activation assist lottery is won.

When an activation assist lottery is held for the start winning section 33, the role activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650 and special gate switch 651) and related components may be omitted.

Here, an example of pre-start winning processing that can be executed before starting the start winning processing of step S304 in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48.

First, in step S7700, a predetermined flag or the like is referenced to determine whether or not the lottery is invalid. In this example, the small prize opening period of the central winning unit 37 and a predetermined period after the end of the small prize opening period are set as the lottery invalid period. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the lottery is not invalid, the process ends and the process proceeds to the start winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7700 is positive, i.e., if the lottery is invalid, then in step S7701, it is determined whether the game ball has won the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b. If the result of step S7701 is negative, this process ends and the process proceeds to the start winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7701 is affirmative, i.e., if it is determined that the game ball has won in the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b, then in step S7702, it is determined whether the third display flag is on, i.e., whether the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable value. If the result of step S7702 is affirmative, then this process is terminated and the process proceeds to the start winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7702 is negative, then in step S7703, it is determined whether the above-mentioned feature operation flag is on, i.e., whether the movable feature 722 is in operation. If the result of step S7703 is positive, then this process ends and the process proceeds to the start-up winning process of step S304.

As a result, even if a game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, and the game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, the activation assist lottery for that portion is invalidated, and no new right to activate the movable device 722 is granted.

In addition to this, when a new game ball enters the first start winning section 33a or the second start winning section 33b while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a change or while the movable device 722 is in operation, and this is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, the configuration may include a hold means (variable hold area) that can hold a predetermined number of variable displays (operation assist lottery results).

The holding means (variable holding area) may comprise one execution area and multiple holding areas, similar to the special variable holding area that stores the values of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 in the above embodiment, and the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 may be stored in chronological order in the multiple holding areas in accordance with the winning history of game balls in the start winning sections 33a and 33b. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2, and other information may be stored.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7703 is negative, then in step S7704, the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in a random number storage area for the lottery invalid period set in RAM 503.

In the following step S7705, the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned on, and in step S7706, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 newly stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period is a value corresponding to an assist win. Here, if the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is a value corresponding to an assist win, that is, if an operation assist wins, this corresponds to the case where the specified conditions in this example are satisfied.

In this example, whether or not a win has been made is determined based on the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period. Specifically, the winning value is "1 to 5" out of the values "0 to 19" of the activation assist random number counter C4. In other words, the probability of winning an assist is 5/20. Of course, this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which an assist win has a different winning probability may also be used.

In the next step S7707, a variable time determination process is performed to determine the variable time in the display device for the invalid period (not shown), which constitutes the second display means, based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period, and then this process ends. Therefore, the second variable pattern selection means in this example is constituted by the function of executing the variable time determination process etc. in step S7707.

The correspondence between the value of the variable time selection counter C2 and the variable time in the display device for the invalid period is stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a variable time selection table for the lottery invalid period (not shown). Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variable time selection table and the like constitutes the second variable pattern storage means in this example.

For example, if the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is any of "0 to 2" out of "0 to 9", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the display device for the invalid period is set to 3 seconds, if it is any of "3 to 5", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the display device for the invalid period is set to 5 seconds, and if it is any of "6 to 9", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the display device for the invalid period is set to 7 seconds.

Next, the fourth display control process performed in the normal process of FIG. 10 in relation to the display device for the invalid period will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. Note that the second display control means in this example is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the fourth display control process.

First, in step S7801, the setting status of the fourth display flag, which indicates whether or not a variable display is being performed on the display device for invalid periods, is checked to determine whether or not a variable display is being performed by the display device for invalid periods. In more detail, if the fourth display flag is on, it is considered that a variable display is being performed on the display device for invalid periods, and if the fourth display flag is off, it is considered that a stopped display is being performed, which corresponds to a state in which the variable display is stopped on the display device for invalid periods. The display device for invalid periods and the display device for special gates 44 may be a common device.

If the result of step S7801 is negative, the process proceeds to step S7802, where it is determined whether the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is on. If the result of step S7802 is negative, i.e., if the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is not on, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is on, the process proceeds to step S7803, where the start winning discrimination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned off. In the following step S7804, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the display device for the invalid period have been met. In more detail, the fourth display in progress flag is turned on, and a fourth display timer setting process is performed. The fourth display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed on the display device for the invalid period, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, a value corresponding to the variable time determined in the variable time determination process in step S7707 above is set in the fourth display timer. That is, a value of "750" corresponding to 3 seconds, a value of "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds, or a value of "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the fourth display timer.

Then, after step S7804 ends, the fourth display control process ends. Note that if a control signal to start a variable display is output to the display device for the invalid period in the external output process of the next normal process based on the settings in the start setting process, the variable display will start on the display device for the invalid period.

If the result of step S7801 is affirmative, i.e., if the invalid period display device is displaying a variable value, the process proceeds to step S7806, where a fourth display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the fourth display timer is subtracted by 1.

Then, the process proceeds to step S7807, where it is determined whether the count value of the fourth display timer is "0", i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S7807, the fourth display in progress flag is turned off in step S7808, and a stop display setting is made in step S7809 to perform a stop display on the display device for the invalid period. Then, based on the contents of this stop display setting, a control signal is output to the display device for the invalid period in the external output processing in the next normal processing to cause the display device for the invalid period to perform a stop display.

Then, proceed to step S7810, perform discrimination information setting processing, and end this process. In this process, if the stopped display corresponds to a win, perform setting processing to drive the movable role 722 of the bypass mechanism unit 721. Specifically, the role operation flag is turned on, and an operation time is set in the role operation timer. In this embodiment, a value "3000" corresponding to 12 seconds is set for the role operation timer. This controls the movable role 722 to a specified operation state (advantageous state). Note that the movable body control means in this example is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that performs drive processing of the movable role 722 based on this setting content.

On the other hand, if the result of step S7807 is negative, then in step S7811, a display switching setting is made to continue the variable display of the display device for the invalid period, and this process ends. Then, based on the contents of this display switching setting, a control signal is output to the display device for the invalid period in the external output process of the next normal process to cause the display device for the invalid period to perform a display switching. This realizes the variable display of the display device for the invalid period at the timing of the fourth display control process, i.e., every 4 msec.

Therefore, the random number storage process (storage of the activation assist random number counter C4) in step S7704 and the win/lose determination process in step S7706 constitute the activation lottery process (activation assist lottery) in this example, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes this activation lottery process constitutes the lottery process execution means (invalid period lottery process execution means).

The set time selection means in this example is also configured by the functions of the main control device 261, which executes the random number storage process (storage of the variable time selection counter C2) in step S7704 and the variable time determination process in step S7707.

As described above, in this example, the small prize opening period during which the central prize winning unit 37 executes a predetermined opening based on the entry of a game ball into the start prize winning section 33 and the predetermined period after the end of the small prize opening period (during the remaining ball monitoring period) are set as the lottery invalid period, and if a new game ball enters the start prize winning section 33 during the lottery invalid period, an operation assist lottery is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable role 722, and if the operation assist lottery is won, the movable role 722 is activated.

As a result, even during the opening period of the central winning unit 37, which would not normally have been triggered to open, a situation advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable device 722 performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning section 33.

In the past, when some players realized that the game ball would not enter the V-winning zone at the time the central winning unit 37 related to the start winning zone was opened when the game ball entered the start winning zone 33, some players would stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start winning zone 33 unnecessarily while the central winning unit 37 was open.

In contrast, according to this example, even in such a situation, after a game ball has entered the start winning section 33, the player will continue to shoot game balls in an attempt to get a new game ball to enter the start winning section 33 in order to receive assistance from the movable device 722, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits awarded to the player differ depending on whether the game ball enters the start winning section 33 during the opening period of the central winning unit 37 or not, which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

In addition, in the configuration of this example, if a relatively small value is set for the reel operation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable reel 722 can be operated immediately after a game ball enters the start winning section 33 during a specified lottery invalid period, and the movable reel 722 can act on a game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 during the opening of a small prize before the lottery invalid period.

On the other hand, if a relatively large value is set for the reel operation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable reel 722 can act on a game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37 after the end of a specified lottery invalid period. As a result, even if there is no game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 at the time the game ball enters the start winning section 33 during the lottery invalid period, the movable reel 722 will act on the game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37 that is opened at a specified timing thereafter, providing a chance for a V win.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the gaming ball has entered the start winning section 33 during the lottery invalid period, the player can actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the central winning unit 37. As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional Issue A. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the moving body would periodically or continuously perform a predetermined action unrelated to the game, or the moving body would perform a predetermined action every time the variable ball entry means was opened. As a result, the presentation related to the moving body could be monotonous, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the moving body tended to wane. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means A1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A movable body that is provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A ball entry means provided so that a game ball can enter (or pass through) the ball;
A chance ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the chance ball entry means;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball-entry detection means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a movable body control means that is capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring about a predetermined advantageous state, at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means A1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, this means is configured to determine by lottery whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, for example, the movable body will not operate constantly, either periodically or continuously, and it will not perform a predetermined operation every time a predetermined trigger occurs, such as when the variable ball entry means opens. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation related to the movable body from becoming monotonous and to increase the player's anticipation of the movable body operating.

In particular, in this means, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration without the need to provide a new complex mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism that performs a lottery based on the behavior of the game ball.

In addition, examples of the location of the "trigger ball entry means" include "within the internal area of the variable ball entry means," "within an area of the variable ball entry means that is different from the internal area," and "within the game area outside the variable ball entry means."

Means A2. The gaming machine described in means A1, characterized in that the trigger ball entry means is configured to allow a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game.

According to the above-mentioned means A2, by providing a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the trigger for the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the interest.

In addition, if the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to operate is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to occur and activate the movable body.

In response to this, according to the above-mentioned means A2, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Means A3. The gaming machine described in means A1 or A2, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means A3, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means A4. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine described in any one of means A1 to A3, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means A4, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

In addition, if a configuration is provided with a first flow route (the first first route) through which game balls that have passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means, and a second flow route (the second first route) through which game balls that have passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the first flow route (the first first route), the overall proportion of game balls that flow down to the special ball entry means will be higher. In such a case, in consideration of the balance of interests between the player and the game hall, the probability of the occurrence of a special game state must be set low, which may reduce the interest of the player.

Means A5. A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means A5, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means A5, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means A5 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A4, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means A5 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to have multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means A6. A display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the trigger ball detection means and performs a stop display in a predetermined mode based on the lottery result of the activation lottery process;
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A5, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to bring the movable body into the specified advantageous state after a stopped display is made on the display means.

If the moving object were to suddenly move without warning, players who had not been paying close attention to the moving object would be unable to grasp the situation and would be at risk of becoming confused.

In response to this, means A6, by providing the display means, can make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the game presentation using the movable body, and further increase the interest of the player.

Means A7. A fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation display times;
A fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
The gaming machine described in means A6 is characterized by comprising a display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

The above-mentioned means A7 makes it possible to vary the time from when the display means starts to display the variable to when the display means stops. In addition, it is possible to vary the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means to when the movable body actually becomes advantageous.

This prevents the moving body from always performing actions at the same timing, making it possible to prevent the game presentation using the moving body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body. This in turn reduces the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with that timing.

Means A8. A gaming machine as described in any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means A8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means A9. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means A10. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A9, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means A11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means A1 to A10, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means A11, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue B. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the moving body would periodically or continuously perform a predetermined action regardless of the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the presentation related to the moving body would tend to be monotonous, causing players to lose interest in the moving body. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means B1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A movable body that is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a movable body control means that is capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring about a predetermined advantageous state when predetermined operating conditions are met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means.

According to the above-mentioned means B1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, in this means, by providing a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to move in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

In addition, if the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the trigger for the movable body to operate is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or the like may be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to occur and activate the movable body.

In response to this, the present invention provides a trigger ball entry means within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means B2. A predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area is provided,
The gaming machine described in means B1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the specified detection means, where the gaming ball detected by the specified detection means can be entered.

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on detection by the above-mentioned specified detection means, the movable body will operate at the same timing every time a game ball enters the variable ball entry means (internal area).

As a result, the presentation of the moving objects becomes monotonous, and it becomes easier for players to grasp the timing of the movements of the moving objects, which may lead to fraudulent behavior such as vibrating the gaming machine to coincide with that timing.

In response to this, the above-mentioned method B2 can prevent the effects related to the movable object from becoming monotonous and can also prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior.

Means B3. A trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means is provided;
A gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operating condition can be established when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means.

By using the above-mentioned means B3, it is not necessary to perform a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, thereby simplifying the control process.

Means B4. A chance ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the chance ball entry means;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball-entry detection means;
The gaming machine described in means B1 or B2 is characterized in that the operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means B4, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Means B5. A gaming machine as described in any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that a gaming ball that has entered (or passed through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (cannot enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means B5, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means B6. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of means B1 to B5, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means B6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

Means B7. The gaming machine described in means B6, characterized in that it has a plurality of the second routes configured so that the time required for the gaming ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different.

If the movable body were configured to operate at a fixed timing each time from the time the game ball was allocated by the route allocation means, the presentation related to the movable body would become monotonous and the timing of the movement of the movable body would be easily grasped by the player, which could lead to fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B7, the operation start period from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means to the time when the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

This prevents the moving body from always performing actions at the same timing, making it possible to prevent the game presentation using the moving body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body. This in turn reduces the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with that timing.

Note that "the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route allocation means to the trigger ball entry means is different."

In addition, a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) may be provided separately for each of the "plurality of second routes," or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes" may move toward a single trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball entry detection means.

For example, the configuration may include "a first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a first trigger ball entry means, and a second second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a second trigger ball entry means."

Furthermore, the configuration may include a trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) that can periodically or randomly change the destination of the game ball to at least the "first second route" or the "second second route." With such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be increased.

Means B8. The gaming machine described in means B6, characterized in that it is provided with a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means, if two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, if the time it takes for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means and the movable body to be in a predetermined advantageous state is shorter from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the route allocation means causes the game ball to flow down the first route, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means, and the second game ball is allocated to the first route, unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, it will be clear that the game balls will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B8, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the possibility remains that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match depending on whether the second game ball is allocated to the "first second route with a long time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a short time to reach the advantageous state", so the player can closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

Means B9. A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means B9, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means B9, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means B9 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means B9 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to have multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means B10. A gaming machine as described in any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means B10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means B11. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means B1 to B10, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means B10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means B12. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means B1 to B11, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means B13. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means B1 to B12, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body performs the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means B13, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue C. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as multiple game balls entering the variable ball entry means at the same time in succession, depending on the timing of the entry of these multiple game balls, the multiple game balls may all head toward the special ball entry means, or may not all head toward the special ball entry means and may be guided to the discharge section or non-special ball entry means, etc., which can easily cause problems.

In general, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are configured so that when a player has already acquired the right to a special gaming state, if a new gaming ball enters the special ball entry means, that special gaming state is not granted.

Therefore, even if two game balls consecutively enter the special ball entry means, two special game states are not granted, but only one special game state occurs, which may cause the player to have negative feelings such as loss, waste, or waste.

As a result, there is a concern that even if a favorable situation occurs for the player, such as when a special game state is granted, the player's interest may decrease.

Conversely, if all of the game balls were guided to the discharge section, etc., the player's expectations that, since multiple game balls entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, this would be advantageous in getting a game ball to enter the special ball entry means would not be met, and interest would likely decrease.

In this sense, there was a desire to further increase interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the excitement when multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means.

Means C1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
a first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of a game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
a movable body that is provided in an internal area of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing at least between an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route (can act on the game ball);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a movable body control means that can execute control to make the movable body perform a predetermined operation to create a predetermined advantageous state when predetermined operating conditions are met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a gaming ball entering the trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means," "when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means C1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of the ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, this means is configured with a route allocation means that can allocate the destination of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means to a first route or a second route.

As a result, for example, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball will flow down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball will flow down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body even more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation that a special game state may occur by having multiple game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Furthermore, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the outcome will differ depending on which route the first game ball and the second game ball follow, so players will be more likely to pay close attention with anticipation to the behavior of the game balls that are assigned by the route assignment means. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest.

Means C2. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means for maintaining the route allocation means in the first state,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that when a gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means maintained in the first state, the route allocation means is configured to change to the second state due to the force received from the gaming ball.

Under the configuration related to the above-mentioned means C2, in order to operate the above-mentioned movable body, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the trigger ball entry means, and in order to cause the game ball to enter the trigger ball entry means, it is necessary to change the route allocation means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

In other words, to operate the movable body, at least two game balls must be successively inserted into the variable ball entry means, the first preceding game ball must flow down the first route by the route allocation means maintained in the first state, and the second succeeding game ball must flow down the second route by the route allocation means changed to the second state.

As a result, gameplay can be made more reliable, in that it is more advantageous for the player to have multiple game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means than to have only one.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the above-mentioned means C2, for example, "means C2. The route allocation means is,
A route allocating member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means (such as a biasing means) capable of maintaining the route allocation member in the first position,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that, when a gaming ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first position, the route distribution member is changed to the second position (for example, against the biasing force of a biasing means) by the force received from the gaming ball.

Means C3. The gaming machine described in means C2, characterized in that the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is placed in a predetermined advantageous state is shorter than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body.

If the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in an advantageous state is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the first route by the route allocation means and reach the movable body, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means C3 can prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and prevent a decline in the interest of the player.

The "time to reach advantageous state" only needs to be shorter than the "time to reach movable body" and is intended to include, for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly from the route allocation means (such as a configuration in which the distance to the opportunity ball entry means is zero).

In addition, one example of how the "movable object arrival time" can be increased is by increasing the distance the game ball needs to travel to pass through the "first route."

Alternatively or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed on the "first route." Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane, which causes the game ball to go back and forth or make a circuit of the same location several times before moving on, or a configuration in which ribs or the like are used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow it to move on over time.

In addition, it is preferable that "the movable body arrival time from the time the game ball is caused to flow down the first route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the movable body is shorter than the advantageous end arrival time from the time the game ball is caused to flow down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body is placed in a predetermined advantageous state until the advantageous end arrival time ends."

If the "movable body arrival time" is longer than the "advantageous end arrival time," and two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means, and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body after the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce the player's interest.

Means C4. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which at least the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that it is provided with a distribution drive means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball is always allocated to either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball is allocated to the other route, then the outcome will be decided when the two game balls that enter in succession are alternately allocated by the route allocation means due to the relationship between the above-mentioned "time to reach advantageous state" and the above-mentioned "time to reach movable body" that is preset, which may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C4, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, it is not determined whether the first game ball will be allocated to the first route or the second route, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunction can be suppressed.

As a result, players can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state, preventing a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which at least the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means for maintaining the route allocation means in a reference state between the first state and the second state,
When the route allocation means is maintained in the reference state, the game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocation means maintained in the reference state, the route allocation means is changed to the second state by the force received from the game ball,
The gaming machine described in means C1 is characterized in that when a gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means maintained in the reference state, the route allocation means is configured to change to the first state due to the force received from the gaming ball.

The above-mentioned means C5 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means C4. In particular, this means does not require a drive means for driving the route allocation means, so a relatively simple configuration can be adopted, while realizing a configuration in which multiple (two) game balls flowing continuously are alternately caused to flow down different routes. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration and control, make it more compact, etc.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the above-mentioned means C5, for example, "means C5. The route allocation means is,
A route allocation member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which at least the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means (e.g., a biasing means) capable of maintaining the route allocation member in a reference position between the first position and the second position,
When the route allocating member is maintained in the reference position, the game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route.
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocation member maintained in the reference position, the route allocation member is changed to the second position by the force received from the game ball,
The gaming machine described in the means C1 is characterized in that, when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating member maintained in the reference position, the route allocating member is changed to the first position by the force received from the game ball.

Means C6. The gaming machine described in means C4 or C5, characterized in that it is provided with a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body is in an advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the time the gaming ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the gaming ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in an advantageous state is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the first route by the route allocation means and reach the movable body, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, if the time it takes for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means and the movable body to be in an advantageous state is shorter from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in an advantageous state than the time it takes for the game ball to flow down the first route by the route allocation means, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means, and the second game ball is allocated to the first route, unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, it will be clear that the game balls will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C6, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route with a longer time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a shorter time to reach the advantageous state", so there remains a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match, allowing the player to closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

In addition, a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) may be provided separately for each of the "first second route" and the "second second route", or a game ball passing through each of the "first second route" or the "second second route" may move toward one trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball entry detection means.

For example, the configuration may include "a first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a first trigger ball entry means, and a second second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a second trigger ball entry means."

Furthermore, the configuration may include a trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) that can periodically or randomly change the destination of the game ball to at least the "first second route" or the "second second route." With such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be increased.

Means C7. A gaming machine as described in any one of means C1 to C6, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means C7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means C8. A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means C8, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means C8, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means C8 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means C8 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after it starts to operate, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means C9. A gaming machine as described in any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means C9, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means C10. The special game state granting means is configured to be capable of granting a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player;
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means C1 to C9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means C11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means C1 to C10, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means C12. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means C1 to C11, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means C12, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue D. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body was configured to operate at a fixed timing each time, for example, when a gaming ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

As a result, in the past, players could figure out the timing of the moving object's movement and potentially commit fraud, such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In addition, the effects related to moving objects can easily become monotonous, and in this respect, there was a need for further improvements in interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent behavior and increase entertainment value.

Means D1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A movable body that is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
and a movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by a predetermined ball detection means),
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from at least a predetermined trigger (e.g., the establishment of the operating condition) to the movable body reaching the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the above-mentioned means D1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In particular, in this means, by making variable the period (e.g., the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (e.g., when the operating condition is met) until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the movable body does not operate at the same timing every time, and this makes it possible to prevent the game presentation using the movable body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the risk that a player will be able to figure out the timing of the movement of the movable body. This in turn reduces the risk of fraudulent conduct, such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with that timing.

Means D2. A means for triggering a ball to enter (or pass) the game ball that has passed through the specific area;
A timing ball entry detection means is provided for detecting a game ball that has entered the timing ball entry means,
The gaming machine described in means D1 is characterized in that the operating condition can be established based on the detection of a gaming ball by the trigger ball entry detection means.

If the trigger ball entry means that activates the movable body is located outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), there is a risk that a wire or other material could be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection, making it easier for fraudulent acts to be committed, resulting in the activation of the movable body.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned method D2, the movable body is configured to operate due to the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunctions can be suppressed.

Here, for example, if the configuration is such that "when a game ball is detected by the trigger ball detection means, the operating condition is met," then it is not necessary to execute a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, and this can simplify the control process. In addition, it can also prevent fraudulent acts such as installing a fraudulent ROM with an altered program related to the lottery process.

Means D3. An actuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of actuation patterns that define an actuation start period from the establishment of the actuation condition to the time when the movable body is in the predetermined advantageous state;
The gaming machine described in means D2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operation pattern selection means which can select one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern memory means based on the detection of a gaming ball by the trigger ball entry detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means D3, a plurality of patterns of the activation start period (e.g., the opening period) are prepared, and a predetermined activation start period is selected from these by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the above-mentioned activation start period. In turn, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the action and effect of the above-mentioned means D1, etc. can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, this method eliminates the need to provide a complex mechanical selection mechanism in the variable ball entry means, and simplifies the structure of the variable ball entry means.

Means D4. During the operation start period, a performance means capable of executing a pre-performance (opening performance) that suggests that at least the movable body will be in the predetermined advantageous state;
A performance pattern storage means for storing a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
The gaming machine described in means D3 is characterized in that it comprises a presentation control means capable of controlling the presentation means based on a presentation pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

By using the above-mentioned means D4, an advance performance is performed that suggests that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player can be made aware in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player feels a sense of excitement as he does not know when the moving object will reach the predetermined advantageous state, and hopes that the moving object will reach the predetermined advantageous state at a time that is favorable to him. This allows the player to pay close attention to the behavior of the game ball as well as the game presentation related to the moving object, further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the activation start period from when the activation conditions are met until the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is variable, if the activation start period becomes relatively long, there is a risk that the player will feel anxious or angry that the movable body will not be in a predetermined advantageous state even though the activation conditions are met.

In response to this, the present method can prevent such problems from occurring and prevent players from losing interest.

Means D5. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection means,
A gaming machine described in any one of means D2 to D4, characterized in that the operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means D5, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Means D6. A display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the trigger ball detection means and performs a stop display in a predetermined mode based on the lottery result of the activation lottery process;
A variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different variation display times;
A fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
A display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means D2 to D5, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to bring the movable body into the specified advantageous state after a stopped display is made on the display means.

According to the above-mentioned means D6, by providing the above-mentioned display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player feels a sense of excitement as they do not know whether the moving object will reach the desired advantageous state, and they will pay close attention to the moving display along with the behavior of the game ball, hoping that it will achieve an advantageous state, further increasing the player's interest.

As a result, the game presentation related to the moving object can attract more attention, further increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned means D6, the time from when the variable display starts on the display means until when the stopped display is made can be made variable. In other words, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until when the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the activation start period. In turn, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means D1, etc.

Means D7. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means and does not allow the game ball to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any of means D2 to D6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

Even if a situation favorable to the player arises, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means D7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

The "predetermined trigger" may be when the game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means.

Means D8. The route allocation means (route allocation mechanism, route allocation member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
a distribution driving means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means;
The gaming machine described in means D7 is characterized in that it has a plurality of second routes configured so that the time required for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means differs.

If the movable body were configured to operate at a fixed timing each time from the time the game ball was allocated by the route allocation means, the presentation related to the movable body would become monotonous and the timing of the movement of the movable body would be easily grasped by the player, which could lead to fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means D8, by providing multiple second routes, it is possible to vary the period from when the game ball is allocated by the route allocation means to when it reaches the trigger ball entry means.

In turn, the period from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means (a specified trigger) to the time when the movable body actually attains an advantageous state can be made variable.

In addition, according to this method, the period from when the game ball is allocated by the route allocation means to when it reaches the trigger ball entry means can be made variable by a mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball, so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the interest.

Note that "the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route allocation means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route allocation means to the trigger ball entry means is different."

In addition, a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) may be provided separately for each of the "plurality of second routes," or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes" may move toward a single trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball entry detection means.

For example, the configuration may include "a first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a first trigger ball entry means, and a second second route that allows the game ball to flow down to a second trigger ball entry means."

Furthermore, the configuration may include a trigger route change means (downstream route allocation means) that can periodically or randomly change the destination of the game ball to at least the "first second route" or the "second second route." With such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be increased.

Means D9. As the second routes,
The gaming machine described in means D8 is characterized in that it has a first second route in which the advantageous state arrival time from the point at which the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches the specified advantageous state is longer than the movable body arrival time from the point at which the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the movable body, and a second second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is longer than the time taken for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means, if two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means and the first game ball is allocated to the first route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the second route, the player will know that the game balls will reach the movable body before the movable body is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, if the time from when the game ball flows down the second route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state is shorter than the time from when the game ball flows down the first route by the route allocation means until the game ball reaches the movable body, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball is allocated to the second route by the route allocation means and the second game ball is allocated to the first route, it will be clear that the game balls will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, unless the movable body is maintained in the predetermined advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, and interest may be significantly reduced.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means D9, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession and the first game ball is allocated to either the first route or the second route, the second game ball that follows may be allocated to either the "first second route with a longer time to reach the advantageous state" or the "second second route with a shorter time to reach the advantageous state", so there remains a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body will match, allowing the player to closely watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation of the occurrence of a special game state.

The "second second route" only needs to take a shorter time for the game ball to pass through than the "first second route," and is intended to include, for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the trigger ball entry means directly from the route allocation means (such as a configuration in which the distance to the trigger ball entry means is zero).

In addition, one possible way to increase the time it takes for the gaming ball to pass through the "first second route" is to increase the distance the gaming ball travels to pass through the "first second route".

In place of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the gaming ball is installed on the "first second route." Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane, which causes the gaming ball to go back and forth or make a circuit of the same location several times before moving on, or a configuration in which ribs or the like are used to stop the momentum of the gaming ball and allow it to move on over time.

Furthermore, a delay means such as that described above may be installed within the "first route" so that the time it takes for the game ball that has flowed down the first route to reach the movable body is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to pass through the "second second route."

Means D10. A gaming machine described in any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means D10, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means D11. A gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means D11, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means D11, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body, the movable body has not yet been activated, and even if the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means D11 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means D11 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means D12. A gaming machine as described in any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means D12, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means D13. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means D1 to D12, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means D14. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
A gaming machine described in any of means D1 to D13, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means D15. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means D1 to D14, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means D15, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue E. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a guide route that directs game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and also have a deviation route (discharge route) for discharging game balls that deviate from the guide route out of the internal area.

However, in the past, even if a gaming ball had entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, once the gaming ball had deviated from the guide route and been guided to a deviated route, it would not contribute to the game within the variable ball entry means and would simply be ejected. In this respect, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means E1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A first route (guiding route) through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
A second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down the first route to outside the internal area;
A ball detection means (discharged ball detection means) capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second route;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific process execution means capable of executing a specific process advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is met based on the detection of a gaming ball by the ball detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means E1, based on the detection of a game ball being discharged via the second route (discharge route), a specific process that is advantageous to the player is executed, such as making it easier for a special game state to occur.

This allows new gameplay to be provided by utilizing not only the behavior of game balls flowing down the first route (guidance route) toward the special ball entry means, but also game balls discharged via the second route, dramatically increasing the interest of players.

Means E2. The gaming machine described in means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means.

By using the above-mentioned means E2, it is possible to execute a specific process that is advantageous to the player every time a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means, thereby dramatically increasing the interest of the player.

Means E3. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process based on the detection by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above-mentioned means E3, it is no longer necessary to execute a specific process advantageous to the player every time a gaming ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the monotony of the specific process can be suppressed and the player's anticipation for the specific process being executed can be increased. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

Means E4. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met when the number of gaming balls counted by the counting means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

By using the above-mentioned means E4, even if the number of game balls that deviate from the first route (guidance route) and flow into the second route (discharge route) becomes relatively large, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

Means E5. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The gaming machine described in means E1 is configured so that the predetermined condition is met at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

By using the above-mentioned means E5, it is no longer necessary to execute a specific process advantageous to the player every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, and therefore the same effect as the above-mentioned means E3 is achieved.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, a movable body is provided that can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
The specific process execution means
A gaming machine described in any of means E1 to E5, characterized in that it is equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined action and bring it into a predetermined advantageous state when the predetermined condition is met.

According to the above-mentioned means E6, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

Means E7. A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine described in means E6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

In the configuration related to the above-mentioned means E6, for example, when the above-mentioned specified condition is about to be met, if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as multiple (e.g., two) game balls entering the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the second route (discharge route), there is a risk of a malfunction such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body may be.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means E7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct one game ball towards the first route, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

As a result, players will be able to watch with anticipation the behavior of the game balls as they are distributed by the route distribution means, further increasing interest.

Means E8. The gaming machine described in means E6 or E7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball is more easily allowed to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means E8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means E9. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
The gaming machine described in means E6 or E7 is characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means E10. A gaming machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the one after the first gaming ball.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means E10, game balls other than the game ball that entered the special ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the specified condition does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the specified condition does not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game, trying to get the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, even after confirming that the predetermined conditions have been met. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means E10 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during an open state period following the open state period through which the opening/closing member has passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means E10 can be easily realized by adjusting the time from when the specified condition is met until the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means, without having to cause multiple game balls to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means E11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means E6 to E10, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to create the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means and satisfies predetermined conditions during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

According to the above-mentioned means E11, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Means E12. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
A gaming machine described in any of means E1 to E10, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Conventional Issue F. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, conventional variable ball entry means had entry ports (specific areas) in multiple locations, for example on both the left and right sides, so there were cases where game balls entered the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time.

Therefore, even if multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a time advantageous to the player, depending on the timing of the game balls' entry, they may get in each other's way, and none of the game balls may head for the special ball entry means, and the game balls may not flow in the route the player desires, which may reduce the player's interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the player's interest.

Means F1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
A first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
A second route that allows game balls that do not flow down the first route to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of a game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
a movable body that is capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route (can act on the game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the game machine into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
The specific area is provided in only one location and allows the game balls to pass through it one by one;
A gaming machine characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding gaming balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a gaming ball entering the trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means," "when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means F1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of the ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in this method, by providing a trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

In particular, this means is configured with a route allocation means that can allocate the destination of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means to a first route or a second route.

As a result, for example, if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball will flow down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball will flow down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body even more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation that a special game state may occur by having multiple game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

In addition, in this means, the specific area is provided in only one location through which the game balls can pass one by one, and a ball passageway capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided in only one location, so that the game balls can be appropriately guided one by one to the route allocation means. This makes it possible to more reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the outcome will differ depending on which route the first game ball and the second game ball follow, so players will be more likely to pay close attention with anticipation to the behavior of the game balls that are assigned by the route assignment means. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest.

Means F2. The gaming machine described in means F1, characterized in that gaming balls that do not pass through the ball passage are configured to be unable to pass through the specific area.

If the ball passage were configured to allow game balls that do not pass through the ball passage to pass through the specific area, there is a risk that the game balls that do not pass through the ball passage may interfere with other game balls that pass through the ball passage and flow down toward the specific area. In contrast, the above-mentioned means F2 prevents game balls from passing through the specific area unless they pass through the ball passage, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned malfunction and further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means F1.

Means F3. The gaming machine described in means F1 or F2, characterized in that the ball passage is provided outside the variable ball entry means, either to the left or right of the opening and closing member.

According to the above-mentioned means F3, the game balls can be guided one by one into the opening and closing member. This makes it possible to prevent problems such as multiple game balls entering the opening and closing member at the same time and getting stuck.

Means F4. A gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, characterized in that the ball passage is provided so that only gaming balls launched by the launching means with a predetermined strength can pass through.

According to the above-mentioned means F4, the ball passage is provided only at a position (e.g., to the right of the variable ball entry means) through which only game balls launched by the launching means with a predetermined strength (e.g., right-handed hit) can pass, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means F1, etc.

Means F5. A gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F4, characterized in that it is provided with a restricting means for permitting the passage of a gaming ball in a predetermined direction in the specific area, while restricting the passage of the gaming ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the above-mentioned means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball passage in succession, the behavior of the first preceding game ball can prevent the first preceding game ball from colliding with the second following game ball, thereby preventing them from getting in each other's way. As a result, the effect of the above-mentioned means F1 can be further improved. Here, the above-mentioned regulating means also includes a means that changes state from a first state to a second state due to the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F5, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means F6, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means F7. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means F7, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means F7, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means F7 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any of means F1 to F6, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means F7 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means F8. A gaming machine described in any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means F8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means F9. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means F1 to F8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be created that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means F10. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
A gaming machine described in any of means F1 to F9, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means F11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means F1 to F10, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to create a predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body performs the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

According to the above-mentioned means F11, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue G. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the presentation related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, for example, in which the movable body performs a predetermined action every time a gaming ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to wane. In this respect, further improvements in entertainment value are desired.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means G1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A first opportunity ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the game ball;
A first opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball entry means;
A second opportunity ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
A second opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball entry means;
a first flow route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second flow route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow to the second opportunity ball entry means;
A route allocating means (downstream route allocating means) capable of allocating the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route;
a movable body that is capable of changing a state between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that has passed through the specific area;
and a movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the game ball entering the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a specific state, the probability of the predetermined advantageous state being reached differs between when the gaming ball flows down the first flow route and when the gaming ball flows down the second flow route.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a game ball entering the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, "when a game ball is detected by the first trigger ball entry detection means or the second trigger ball entry detection means" and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the first trigger ball entry detection means or the second trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means G1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this means, by providing various trigger ball entry means (various trigger ball entry detection means) that detects the action trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

Furthermore, this means is configured so that the probability of a predetermined advantageous state being reached differs when the gaming ball flows down the first flow route from when it flows down the second flow route. This makes the player pay more attention to the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the interest.

Means G2. The gaming machine described in means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the first flow route to reach the first opportunity ball entry means is different from the time or distance required for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the second flow route to reach the second opportunity ball entry means.

By using the above-mentioned means G2, the period until the movable body can reach a predetermined advantageous state can be varied depending on whether the game ball flows down the first flow route or the second flow route.

This prevents the moving body from always performing actions at the same timing, making it possible to prevent the game presentation using the moving body from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

Means G3. The gaming machine described in means G1 or G2, characterized in that it is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of gaming balls in the first flow route or the second flow route.

According to the above-mentioned means G3, even if the length of the first flow route and the second flow route is relatively short, the delay means can be provided to make it relatively long for the game ball to reach a predetermined position. As a result, the game space can be used more effectively. Examples of delay means include a stage or a crane, which causes the game ball to go back and forth or make a circuit of the same location several times before moving forward, or a rib or the like is used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow it to move forward over time.

Means G4. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the detection of the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means,
The predetermined operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (a winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process,
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G3, characterized in that in the specific state, the probability of obtaining the specified lottery result differs when a gaming ball is detected by the first trigger ball entry detection means and when it is detected by the second trigger ball entry detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means G4, the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process) is configured to perform software-based decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state.

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time a specific trigger occurs, which prevents the presentation related to the moving object from becoming monotonous and increases the player's anticipation of the moving object's action. As a result, the player's interest in the action can be dramatically increased.

Furthermore, this means is configured so that the rate at which a predetermined lottery result is obtained differs between when the gaming ball is detected by the first trigger ball entry detection means and when it is detected by the second trigger ball entry detection means, which encourages the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the gaming ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the interest.

Means G5. The route allocation means
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first flow-down route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second flow-down route,
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G4, characterized in that in the specific state, the route allocation means is configured to have a different ratio of being in the first state and being in the second state.

The above-mentioned means G5 can diversify the behavior of the game ball, and the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the interest. In addition, the route allocation means may be configured so that the proportion of the first state and the proportion of the second state can be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. A predetermined route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
In the specific state, a route allocation means (upstream route allocation means) capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of means G1 to G5, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the specified route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means G6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

Means G7. A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G6, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means and/or the second trigger ball entry means) is configured so that it cannot flow down (cannot enter) into the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means G7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means G8. A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball enters the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means G8, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route is entered by the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second In the case where a game ball enters the special ball entry means (a game ball that enters the special ball entry means) and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down the specified route passes the movable body, the movable body has not yet been activated, and even if the game ball that has flowed down the specified route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball to subsequently enter the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area after the next time) to flow down the specified route, and the action of the movable body will provide a chance for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above means G8 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G7, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in the open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means G8 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means G9. A gaming machine described in any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means G9, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be created that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means G10. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player;
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means G11. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G10, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means G12. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means G1 to G11, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to create a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means G12, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issue H. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (for example, see JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body was configured to operate at a fixed timing each time, for example, when a gaming ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

As a result, in the past, players could figure out the timing of the movement of the moving object, and could potentially commit fraud, such as vibrating the gaming machine to match that timing.

In addition, the effects related to moving objects can easily become monotonous, and in this respect, there was a need for further improvements in interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent behavior and increase entertainment value.

Means H1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through) the ball;
a movable body that is capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to a player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that has passed through the specific area (can act on the game ball);
A movable body control means capable of executing control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means;
and an opening/closing pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of opening/closing patterns is to be executed when controlling the opening/closing of the opening/closing member.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is met based on a gaming ball entering the trigger ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means," "when a gaming ball is detected by the trigger ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined operating lottery is conducted based on the detection of a ball by the trigger ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means H1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in this method, by providing a trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so that the player will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

In particular, in this method, multiple opening and closing patterns are provided for the variable ball entry means (opening and closing member), which changes the timing at which the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means. Therefore, even if the movable body is configured to operate at a fixed timing each time from a predetermined trigger, the timing at which the movable body acts on the gaming ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means will be different. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent activities such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movable body's operation.

When changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means, it is possible to consider a method of changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means by, for example, providing multiple operating patterns for the movable body and changing the probability of selecting the pattern to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means; however, changing the operating mode of the movable body, which changes the behavior of the game ball by performing a specified operation, to adjust the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means to the desired rate is extremely difficult and requires repeated trial and error. In this regard, the present method makes it easier to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means.

Means H2. The gaming machine described in means H1, characterized in that when a predetermined opening/closing pattern is performed among the plurality of opening/closing patterns, the movable body is more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed.

According to the above-mentioned means H2, for example, when a predetermined opening and closing pattern is performed in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently, it becomes possible to cause more game balls to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time, and therefore, due to a synergistic effect with the configuration in which the movable body is likely to enter a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc., by increasing the expectation of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Means H3. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on a ball entering the trigger ball entry means;
A display means for starting a variable display based on the ball entering the trigger ball entering means and for performing a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activation lottery process;
A holding means is provided for holding the variable display on the display means a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine described in means H1 or H2 is characterized in that the operation condition is established at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

By using the above-mentioned means H3, the movable body does not have to move every time a predetermined trigger occurs, which enhances the effect of the above-mentioned means H1, etc., while preventing the presentation related to the movable body from becoming monotonous and increasing the player's anticipation of the movable body moving.

In addition, by providing a holding means, this method can increase the frequency with which the movable body operates. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Means H4. A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H3, characterized in that it is provided with an actuation pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of actuation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is brought into the advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means H4, by providing multiple operating patterns for the movable body, the effect of the above-mentioned means H1 and the like can be further enhanced. Although it is very difficult to adjust the rate at which the balls enter the special ball entry means to a desired rate, the behavior of the game balls is diversified, which increases the interest and prevents the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior.

Means H5. A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, characterized in that at least one of the multiple opening and closing patterns includes multiple opening and closing actions.

According to the above-mentioned means H5, the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently, so that more game balls can be allowed to enter the variable ball entry means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means.

Means H6. The gaming machine described in means H5, characterized in that at least one of the multiple opening and closing operations has an opening time longer than the interval (e.g., 0.6 seconds) between launches of gaming balls by the launching means.

By using the above-mentioned means H6, the effect of the above-mentioned means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. A first route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
A gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H6, characterized in that the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down the first route.

With the configuration of each of the above means, even if a situation favorable to the player occurs, such as when multiple (e.g., two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a consecutive ball state in which two game balls flow down in succession with almost no gap between them; the same applies below), if all of these multiple game balls head toward the trigger ball entry means, there is a risk of a malfunction such as none of the game balls entering the special ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means H7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means successively at the same time, the first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball flows down the other route, making it possible to direct the game balls towards both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, respectively, thereby making the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body more effective.

Furthermore, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the outcome will differ depending on which route the first game ball and the second game ball follow, so players will be more likely to pay close attention with anticipation to the behavior of the game balls that are assigned by the route assignment means. As a result, it is possible to further increase interest.

Means H8. A gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H7, characterized in that a gaming ball that enters (or passes through) the trigger ball entry means cannot flow down (enter) the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that passes through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable body will become easier to commit. There is also a risk that the game ball will interfere with other game balls that are flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the trigger ball entry means.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means H8, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so the occurrence of the various malfunctions mentioned above can be suppressed.

Means H9. A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area from the time after the gaming ball that entered the trigger ball entry means.

In addition, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which gaming balls are intermittently released at predetermined intervals, situations advantageous to the player, such as multiple gaming balls successively entering the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, do not occur frequently. In particular, in situations in which the nails on the game board are adjusted in game halls, making it difficult for gaming balls to enter the variable ball entry means, such situations advantageous to the player may not occur at all.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to increase the probability of a gaming ball not entering the special ball entry means by receiving the action (assistance) of a movable body unless multiple gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the player's expectations may fade and interest may decrease when multiple gaming balls fail to enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means H9, game balls other than the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means at the same time (in a consecutive ball state) as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball, or if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the gaming ball has entered the trigger ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

For example, according to the above-mentioned means H9, when two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, the first game ball (the game ball that first passes through the specific area) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the second game ball (the game ball that next passes through the specific area) flows down the other route, and then the game ball that flows down the second route enters the trigger ball entry means and activates the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet been activated at the time when the game ball that flows down the first route passes the movable body and the game ball that flows down the first route does not enter the special ball entry means, it is possible to configure the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes the specific area next after the next) to flow down the first route, and the action of the movable body gives the game ball a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means H9 may be rephrased as "a gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that when a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in an open state period following the open state period through which the gaming ball passed."

The configuration related to the above-mentioned means H9 can be easily realized without having multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time by adjusting the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to when the movable body starts to operate, and the operating period of the movable body after operation starts, under the configurations related to each of the above-mentioned means.

Means H10. A gaming machine described in any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means H10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means H11. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means H1 to H10, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the special game state of a predetermined type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be produced that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

Means H12. A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
A gaming machine described in any of means H1 to H11, characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing control means that can perform the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is met based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined start condition (opening trigger) is met based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a game ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

Means H13. A starting ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
and an opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry means,
The movable body control means
A gaming machine described in any of means H1 to H12, characterized in that it is configured to execute control to create a predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body performs the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means and predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned means H13, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open) where an opening opportunity is not available in the past, a state advantageous to the player can be created in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Conventional Issues I. Conventionally, pachinko machines are known as a type of gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known that has a variable ball entry means that opens when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry means, and when a gaming ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning port) provided within the internal area, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated (see, for example, JP Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

However, in such pachinko machines, in order to make the game ball enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to continue firing the game ball into the game area even after the game ball has entered the start ball entry means. In such cases, conventionally, since the variable ball entry means has already been opened, even if a new game ball enters the start ball entry means at this timing, no opening opportunity is obtained and only a prize ball is awarded. This can decrease the interest of players, and there has been a demand for further improvement in interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the interest of players.

Means I1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
a variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, and only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entry means,
A starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game;
An opening/closing control means for executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
A movable body that is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means so as to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state by making the movable body perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be awarded when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means and satisfies predetermined conditions during a predetermined open gaming state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on at least the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry means.

In addition, "when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on a gaming ball entering the start ball entry means" includes, for example, in a configuration equipped with "start ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the start ball entry means," "when a gaming ball is detected by the start ball entry detection means," and "when a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the detection of a ball by the start ball entry detection means, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery."

According to the above-mentioned means I1, by providing a movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game presentation that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the likelihood of a ball entering the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, this means is configured to be capable of executing control to create a predetermined advantageous state in which a movable body performs a predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a new game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entry means executes a predetermined opening based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, even during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), where there was no opportunity for opening in the past, a favorable state can be created for the player in which the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means.

Conventionally, when some players realize that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the time the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry is opened at the time the game ball enters the start ball entry means, they will temporarily stop shooting the game ball at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the start ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (the period during which the variable ball entry means is open).

In response to this, with this method, even in such a situation, after a gaming ball has entered the starting ball entry means, the player will continue to shoot gaming balls in order to receive assistance from the movable body and to have a new gaming ball enter the starting ball entry means, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing of the game ball entering the starting ball entry means is during an open game state (when the variable ball entry means is open), which allows for diversification of the game.

As a result, players' interest will be dramatically increased.

Means I2. The gaming machine described in means I1, characterized in that the movable body control means is configured to execute control to make the movable body perform the predetermined action and bring about the predetermined advantageous state when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open gaming state and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in pachinko machines, a predetermined time from the time when the variable ball entry means is opened (or when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means that has been opened) is set as a waiting time (remaining ball monitoring period) during which a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means but has not yet been discharged (remaining ball) is detected by a specified detection switch.

However, conventionally, if a new game ball enters the starting ball entry means during this remaining ball monitoring period, the prize ball is paid out, but a lottery based on the ball entry is not held, and the variable ball entry means is not set to the open state.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means I2, even during a predetermined period (remaining ball monitoring period) after the end of a predetermined open game state, a state advantageous to the player in which the movable body performs a predetermined action can be generated based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means. As a result, the action and effect of the above-mentioned means I1 can be further enhanced.

Means I3. A gaming machine as described in means I1 or I2, characterized in that the time from when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means until the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) starts to open can be changed in multiple ways.

If the time between when the game ball enters the start entry means and when the variable entry means starts to open is always constant, when the game ball enters the start entry means, the player will easily realize that the opening timing of the variable entry means related to the start entry means means that the game ball will not be able to enter the special entry means, and there is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game ball at that point.

In addition, if the time between when the game ball enters the start ball entry means and when the variable ball entry means starts to open is always constant, the player can easily grasp the timing of the opening of the variable ball entry means, and there is a risk that the player may easily perform actions such as firing the game ball to coincide with that timing.

In response to this, with the above-mentioned means I3, the opening timing of the variable ball entry means changes, and the variable ball entry means does not always open at a fixed timing, so that the monotony of the game presentation related to the variable ball entry means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the opening of the variable ball entry means. This reduces the risk of players firing game balls in time with the opening of the variable ball entry means. Also, because players will continue to fire game balls, it is possible to prevent a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I4. A first display means for starting a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means and performing a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of a predetermined opening lottery process;
A first variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different variation display times related to the first display means;
A first fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the first fluctuation pattern storage means based on the game ball entering the start ball entry means;
A first display control means for controlling the first display means based on the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern selection means,
The opening/closing control means is
The gaming machine described in means I3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening and closing member) is opened after a stop display is made on the first display means.

According to the above-mentioned means I4, the time from when the variable display starts on the first display means until when the stopped display is made can be made variable. By using this, the time from when the game ball enters the start ball entry means until when the variable ball entry means starts to open can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the above-mentioned means I3 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I5. A lottery process execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined operation lottery process based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the game state),
A gaming machine described in any one of means I1 to I4, characterized in that the specified condition can be satisfied at least when a specified lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operational lottery process.

If the movable body were configured to operate every time a game ball entered the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or a specified period of time after the end of that state), the player would easily understand at the time the game ball entered the start ball entry means that the timing of the operation of the movable body related to the start ball entry would prevent the game ball from entering the special ball entry means, and there is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game ball at that point.

According to the above-mentioned means I5, the movable body does not operate every time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state), so the monotony of the presentation related to the movable body is suppressed and the player's anticipation for the movable body to operate can be increased. As a result, a dramatic increase in the interest of the player can be achieved.

Means I6. A gaming machine as described in any one of means I1 to I3, characterized in that the time from when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open gaming state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the state) until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started (the time until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state) can be changed in a plurality of ways.

If the time between when the game ball enters the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) and when the specified operation of the movable body is started is always constant, when the game ball enters the start ball entry means, the player will easily realize that the timing of the operation of the movable body related to the start ball entry will not allow the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, and there is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game ball at that point.

In addition, if the time between when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) and when the specified operation of the movable body is started is always constant, the player may easily grasp the timing of the operation of the movable body, and may easily perform actions such as firing the game ball to match that timing.

In response to this, according to the above-mentioned means I6, the timing of the movement of the movable body changes, and the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, so that the monotony of the game presentation using the movable body can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

In addition, this method makes it difficult for players to grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body. This reduces the risk of players firing game balls in time with the movement of the movable body. Furthermore, because players will continue to fire game balls, it is possible to prevent a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I7. The gaming machine described in Means I6, characterized in that it is provided with a set time selection means capable of selecting one of a plurality of preset set times based on the game ball entering the start ball entry means during the specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) to the start of the specified operation of the movable body after the game ball enters the start ball entry means during the specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state).

By using the above-mentioned means I7, the configuration related to the above-mentioned means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I8. A second display means for starting a variable display based on a game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or a predetermined period after the end of the game state) and performing a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of a predetermined operation lottery process;
A second variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different variation display times related to the second display means;
A second fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns stored in the second fluctuation pattern storage means based on a game ball entering the start ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or a predetermined period after the end of the game state);
A second display control means for controlling the second display means based on the variation pattern selected by the second variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means
The gaming machine described in means I6 is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the specified advantageous state after a stopped display is made on the second display means.

According to the above-mentioned means I8, by providing a second display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player feels a sense of excitement as they do not know whether the moving object will reach the desired advantageous state, and they will pay close attention to the moving display along with the behavior of the game ball, hoping that it will achieve an advantageous state, further increasing the player's interest.

As a result, the game presentation related to the moving object can attract more attention, further increasing the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned means I8, the time from when the variable display starts on the second display means until when the stopped display is made can be made variable. By utilizing this, the time from when the game ball enters the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state) until when a specified operation of the movable body is started can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the above-mentioned means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I9. A gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area after the end of the predetermined open gaming state (and/or a predetermined period of time after the end of the predetermined open gaming state).

In gaming machines that are configured to have a higher probability of a gaming ball entering the special ball entry means with the aid of a movable body, when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry means (at the time of the operation assist lottery) during a specified open gaming state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state), there is a risk that the player's expectations will fade and interest will decrease if there is no gaming ball in the internal area.

In contrast, according to the above-mentioned means I9, even if there is no game ball present in the internal area when a game ball enters the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or during a specified period after the end of the state), a game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means that is opened at a specified timing is given a higher chance of entering the special ball entry means.

This allows the player to actively play the game in an attempt to get the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the start ball entry means during a specified open game state (and/or for a specified period of time after the end of the state). As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

Means I10. A gaming machine as described in any one of means I1 to I9, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the special ball entry means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means I10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of a ball scoring into the special scoring means increases, so that a game presentation can be performed that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

Means I11. The special game state granting means is configured to grant a plurality of types of the special game state having different game values to be granted to the player,
a type determination means for determining one game value to be awarded when a game ball enters the special ball entry means;
A gaming machine described in any of means I1 to I10, characterized in that when the movable body is controlled to the specified advantageous state, the special game state of a specified type among the multiple types of special game states (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the multiple types of special game states) is more likely to be determined by the type determination means than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the specified advantageous state.

According to the above-mentioned means I11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state is likely to be determined among multiple types of special game states, so a game presentation can be created that heightens the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state (granting a type of special game state with higher game value), etc.

As a result, players will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball within the internal area of the variable ball entry means, further increasing the game's interest.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) that occur during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is granted after the special game state.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, any combination of at least one of the following may be implemented: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following configurations: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means B1 to B13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means C1 to C12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means D1 to D15, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means E1 to E12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means F1 to F11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means G1 to G12, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means H1 to H13, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means I1 to I11.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. A more detailed example of the form is "a pinball gaming machine equipped with an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a gaming area to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (a general winning port, a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) arranged within the gaming area."

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. A more detailed example of the embodiment is "a pinball gaming machine that includes an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a predetermined gaming area (for example, the gaming area is composed of a gaming board surface, etc.) that extends in a substantially vertical direction and to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (a general winning port, a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) that are arranged within the gaming area, and that is configured so that the behavior of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can be visually observed."

(c) The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the pinball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

Second Embodiment
A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with the above-mentioned first embodiment (such as the same components and the same processing contents) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals. The gaming machine according to the present invention (the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment) is equipped with a "rotating body" as the "rotating means" of the present invention.

Figure 50 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 51 is an oblique view, and Figure 52 is an oblique view showing the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 in the open state. Figure 53 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30, etc. Figure 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 55 is an oblique view showing the inner frame 12 and the back pack unit 203, etc. in the open state. However, for convenience, nails and various gimmicks arranged on the game board 30 surface as path changing means, glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted in Figure 52.

As shown in FIG. 52, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so that it can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 55, the outer frame 11 is made up of an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy extrusion material, and these frame components 11a to 11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape by removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 50). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right frame component 11d also has an extending wall 83 formed near its rear end in the width direction, which protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 54) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, the front side of the extending wall 83 is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is engaged. The lower receiving portion 85 also has a pressing portion 86 protruding toward the inside of the outer frame 11, which abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later.

In addition, a resin valance panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the upper surface of the valance panel 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to form between the valance panel 87 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 52, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as its axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 is designed to be able to be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 when closed. A roughly elliptical window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed structure of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 50, a lower tray 15 is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame set 14 as a ball receiving tray, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 is provided at the front side of the lower tray 15 for discharging game balls from within the lower tray 15.

In addition, a performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The performance button 125 is configured so that the player can press it (by pressing it downward). An operation detection switch (not shown) is provided inside the lower tray 15 as an operation detection means for detecting the pressing of the performance button 125. When the performance button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to the sub-control device 262, which will be described later. As a result, when the player presses the performance button 125, a specified performance is performed or the performance content is changed on the performance display device 42, etc., as will be described later.

A game ball launch handle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "handle") 18 is provided to the right of the lower tray 15, protruding toward the front. The handle 18, which serves as an operating means that can be operated by the player, includes, for example, a base fixed to the front frame set 14, a rotation operating part as a first operating part rotatably attached to the base, a variable resistor as an operating amount detection means that detects the operating amount of the rotation operating part, and a launch stop switch as a second operating part that can select whether or not to launch the game ball into the play area.

An upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls, aligns them in a row, and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as the "launching device") 60, which serves as a launching means described below. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray connecting passage 71 and a discharge port 16, described below.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 as operation means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10, loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. In addition, to clarify the ownership of the game balls used in the game hall, predetermined information that can identify the game hall is written by engraving, etc., and fraudulent acts using game balls brought from other game halls are prevented. In addition, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. However, in pachinko machines in which game balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device, etc. to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, so-called cash machines, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary.

Furthermore, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123 as an operating means that can be operated by the player. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) that is provided downstream of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicates with the lower tray 15 opens, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. In other words, the player can move the game balls in the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, various light-emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light-emitting means are controlled to change their light emission state, such as turning on or blinking, depending on changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play. For example, a frame lamp 102 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window portion 101. Also, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the frame lamp 102, which turn on when a specified error occurs. Incidentally, a number of fine through holes are formed in the upper portion of each error display lamp 104 of the frame lamp 102, corresponding to the speaker SP (see Figure 52) provided on the back of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately as in the conventional method, but is round overall and is assembled and then attached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 52, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 (described later) to the discharge outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of this full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71).

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figure 53. A launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched from the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39 (game board 30). In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device having a plunger as a movable member is used as the launching device 60.

In this embodiment, when game balls are continuously detected by the full detection switch for a predetermined period of time, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from firing. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer continuously detected for a predetermined period of time), the launching device 60 is permitted to fire.

A ball feed device 63 is provided above the launch device 60. The ball feed device 63 uses a driving means such as a solenoid to guide the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the launch position of the launch device 60.

In addition, the symbol 67 in Figures 52 and 53 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray connecting passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray connecting passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Furthermore, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, so as to almost completely close the exit of the dispensing passage 67.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portions on the entrance side of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the entrances of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to the payout passage 67 with a predetermined distance between them, allowing game balls to pass through the gap between them.

In addition, because the entrance of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the entrance of the upper tray communication passage 73 are located adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 become full of game balls, the game balls being paid out flow to the lower tray communication passage 71 (overflowing into the entrance of the lower tray communication passage 71) and are paid out through the lower tray communication passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) behind the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion abutting the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, approximately the center of the front part of the game board 30, which becomes the play area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

The structure of the game board 30 will now be described with reference to FIG. 53. In this embodiment, the game board 30 is constructed with a transparent plate as the base (game board body), which is a light-transmitting member formed into a flat plate shape from a resin material having optical transparency (translucency), such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, ABS resin, etc. Here, "transparent" does not only mean that objects in the rear area of the game board 30 can be seen in a completely transparent state, but may also include a so-called translucent state in which at least some light is transmitted to the extent that the presence of an object can be detected.

This configuration allows the player to see various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear area of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C equipped with multiple LEDs as light-emitting means are arranged at the rear position of a specific area of the game area, and the player can see the light emitted from the LEDs through the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30. The LED boards 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a specific light-emitting mode corresponding to various game presentations, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effects during play.

The game board 30 is also fitted with a rail 50, which is made of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate, and serves as a guide means for guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, the game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left of FIG. 53) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50. In addition, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right of FIG. 53) of the outer rail component 52. This means that a game ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined value will hit the return rubber 54, which acts as a movement restriction means, and be returned to approximately the center of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the game board 30. Therefore, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53 serving as a return restriction means, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the play area.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball launched from the launch device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns back up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening (general winning section) 31, a variable winning device (large winning opening) 32, an upper start winning opening 33YA, a lower start winning opening 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, a first special display device 43L, and a second special display device 43R, etc., which are fitted into mounting holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, i.e., in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, a large number of nails 49, windmills 57, etc. are arranged to distribute the falling direction of the game balls in a predetermined area or to guide the game balls to a predetermined position. The windmill 57 is a rotating body that rotates when a game ball moving relative to itself comes into contact with it and acts on the flow of the game ball, and changes its state between a rotating state and a stopped state. For example, the windmill 57 has an axis member whose rear end side is fixed directly or indirectly to the game board 30, a central cylindrical portion into which the front end side of the axis member is inserted, multiple contact pieces formed as acted upon parts extending radially outward from the central cylindrical portion, and a decorative disk portion that is circular when viewed from the front and is provided at the front end of the central cylindrical portion, and when a game ball comes into contact with the contact pieces and receives an external force, the external force causes the windmill 57 to rotate with the front-to-rear direction as the axial direction. Of course, the configuration of the windmill 57 is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

The game balls guided to the play area flow down various routes while their flow direction and rotation direction are changed by nails 49 and the like. Some of the game balls guided to the play area are guided to the windmill 57 while moving relatively along various routes, and the falling route is divided to the left and right by the windmill 57. Here, when the game ball passes the left side of the windmill 57 in the first mode and acts on the contact piece in the first proximity state, the windmill 57 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, which is the first operating mode. On the other hand, when the game ball passes the right side of the windmill 57 in the second mode and acts on the contact piece in the second proximity state, the windmill 57 rotates in the clockwise direction, which is the second operating mode.

With this configuration, for example, a game ball diverted to the right by a windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the left windmill 57) provided in the left side area of the variable display unit 35 is more likely to be guided by nails 49, etc., toward the upper start winning opening 33YA, compared to a game ball diverted to the left by the left windmill 57. On the other hand, a game ball diverted to the right by a windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the right windmill 57) provided in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 is more likely to be guided toward the variable winning device 32, compared to a game ball diverted to the left by the right windmill 57.

In addition, in this embodiment, a greater proportion of game balls are guided to the upper start winning opening 33YA when the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes by the right side of the left windmill 57 than when the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game ball passes by the left side of the left windmill 57, while a greater proportion of game balls are guided to the general winning opening 31 when the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game ball passes by the left side of the left windmill 57 than when the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes by the right side of the left windmill 57.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the game area is widely expanded in the left-right direction, the windmill 57 and the like are provided to facilitate guiding the game ball toward the upper start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, and the like. In addition, the nails 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that winning at the upper start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, and the like occurs with a moderate probability.

In this embodiment, the windmills 57 are provided in the left and right regions of the variable display unit 35, respectively, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may include only one of the left windmill 57 or the right windmill 57. In addition, when the game board 30 is based on a transparent plate as in this embodiment, at least a part of the windmill 57, such as the decorative disk part, may be configured as a translucent part using a translucent resin material or the like. The relative positional relationship between the windmill 57 and the game ball changes between a first positional relationship in which at least a part of the windmill 57 and at least a part of the game ball do not overlap, and a second positional relationship in which at least a part of the windmill 57 and at least a part of the game ball overlap. Therefore, when a translucent part is provided, in the first positional relationship in which the game ball does not pass through the windmill 57, the light transmitted through the game board 30 is visible to the player through the translucent part of the windmill 57. On the other hand, in the second positional relationship in which the game ball passes through the windmill 57, a portion of the light that passes through the game board 30 is blocked by a portion of the game ball that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the windmill 57, and light such as external light is irradiated from the front onto a portion of the game ball through the light-transmitting portion.

The game board 30 is also provided with winning detection switches as detection means for detecting game balls that have entered various winning ports (ball entry means) such as the general winning port 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning port 31, and a count switch 223 is provided at the variable winning device 32. A first start winning switch 224A is provided at the upper start winning port 33YA, and a second start winning switch 224B is provided at the lower start winning port 33YB. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball enters various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper start winning port 33YA, and the lower start winning port 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (or the lower tray 15). For example, when there is a winning entry to the upper start winning port 33YA, three game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15) if there is a winning entry to the lower start winning port 33YB, ten game balls are paid out to the general winning port 31, and fifteen game balls are paid out to the variable winning device 32. Here, the upper start winning port 33YA may constitute the first starting ball entry means, the lower start winning port 33YB may constitute the second starting ball entry means, and the variable winning device 32 may constitute the specific ball entry means. In addition, a state in which a game ball enters a predetermined winning port such as the upper start winning port 33YA may be considered to be an advantageous state. For example, a state in which a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and three prize balls are paid out may be defined as a first advantageous state, and a state in which a game ball enters the general winning hole 31 and ten prize balls are paid out may be defined as a second advantageous state. In addition, an outlet 36 is provided on the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31 are discharged outside the game area through this outlet 36.

The variable prize-winning device 32 is equipped with a large prize winning opening (symbol omitted) through which the game ball can win, a rectangular flat opening/closing plate (large prize winning opening opening member) 32a as an opening/closing member for opening and closing the large prize winning opening, and a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening/closing plate 32a to open and close.

When the variable winning device 32 is in a normal state where the specified conditions are not met, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. However, when the specified conditions are met, such as when a big win or small win occurs (described below), the large winning opening solenoid is excited, causing the opening/closing plate 32a to tilt forward around its bottom edge as a pivot, opening the large winning opening so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening.

The upper start winning opening 33YA is always capable of receiving a winning ball. In contrast, the lower start winning opening 33YB is equipped with an opening/closing device 37Y as an opening/closing type winning assistance device.

The opening/closing device 37Y is equipped with a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya as opening/closing members that rotate left and right around the lower end side as an axis, and a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. The movable blades 37Ya open and close depending on the establishment of predetermined conditions, so that the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the play area can enter the lower start winning opening 33YB, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

As described above, the upper start winning opening 33YA and the lower start winning opening 33YB are provided with the first start winning switch 224A and the second start winning switch 224B, respectively, as detection means for detecting a winning game ball. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state or the like will be generated, and a variable display or a specified effect is performed on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42, which will be described later. If the lottery is won, the jackpot state or the like is granted.

The types of jackpots in this embodiment will be described in detail below. As shown in FIG. 86, in this embodiment, the types of jackpots include "16R special jackpot A", "16R special jackpot B", "4R special jackpot A", "4R special jackpot B", "16R regular jackpot A", "16R regular jackpot B", "4R regular jackpot A", "4R regular jackpot B" and "JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot".

In the "16R Special Jackpot A" jackpot state, a "long open" is counted as one special prize state, and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

In this embodiment, "long opening" refers to one opening/closing operation from when the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state until it is closed, provided that the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of 10 game balls have won in the variable winning device 32.

In the "16R Special Jackpot B" jackpot state, a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds), after which a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated 12 times (twelve rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" refers to one opening/closing operation from when the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state until the closed state is reached after the specified time of 0.4 seconds has elapsed or when the specified number of three game balls have been won in the variable winning device 32.

In this embodiment, the launching device 60 launches game balls into the game area at a rate of one every 0.6 seconds based on the operation of the handle 18 by the player. In contrast, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the opening time of the opening and closing plate 32a is set to 0.4 seconds. In other words, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of one opening and closing plate 32a is shorter than the launch cycle of the game balls. Therefore, there are cases where not even one game ball wins with only one "short opening". For this reason, the opening and closing plate 32a is rarely closed based on the condition related to the number of winning balls (three winning balls) out of the two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", and once opened, the opening and closing plate 32a is usually closed based on the passage of the specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period of "short opening" from changing each time.

In the "4R Special Jackpot A" and "4R Special Jackpot B" jackpot states, a "long opening" is counted as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds).

In the "16R Normal Jackpot A" jackpot state, a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated eight times (eight rounds), after which a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated eight times (eight rounds).

In the "16R Normal Jackpot B" jackpot state, a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds), after which a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated 12 times (twelve rounds).

In the "4R Regular Jackpot A" and "4R Regular Jackpot B" jackpot states, a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds).

In the "JUB jackpot" jackpot state, a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times, after which a "long opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated fifteen times. In other words, five "short openings" are performed in the first round, and a "long opening" is performed in each of the second to sixteenth rounds.

In addition, when any of the above-mentioned "special jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, the "high probability mode (high probability state)" is granted as the lottery mode after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when any of the "normal jackpots" occur, the "low probability mode (low probability state)" is granted after the jackpot state ends.

"High Probability Mode" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased compared to the "Low Probability Mode" that is normally set. The "High Probability Mode" that is set after a jackpot ends will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

After the various jackpots mentioned above have ended, the "high support mode (high ball entry state)" is granted as a winning support mode for the opening and closing device 37Y while the special display devices 43L and 43R display a predetermined number of changes, or until the next jackpot occurs.

"High support mode" refers to a state in which the ratio of open to closed states per unit time in the opening/closing device 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is higher than in the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" that is normally set.

For example, the "high support mode" may be (1) a state in which the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 described later is shorter than in the "low support mode", (2) a state in which the opening time (prescribed time) of the movable blade 37Ya of the opening/closing device 37Y is longer than in the "low support mode", (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can win a prize per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode", (4) a state in which the number of times the opening/closing process of the movable blade 37Ya is performed each time a winning result is obtained by the opening lottery of the opening/closing device 37Y caused by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 34 is greater than in the "low support mode", and (5) a state in which the winning probability in the opening lottery of the opening/closing device 37Y is higher than in the "low support mode". In the high support mode in this embodiment, the above configurations (1), (2), and (5) are adopted. Of course, the "high support mode" is not limited to this, and may be any one of configurations (1) to (5), or any combination of configurations (1) to (5). This makes it easier for game balls to enter the lower start winning slot 33YB more frequently, increasing the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed and resulting in good ball holding.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "high support mode" is applied, the variation pattern table is changed to a table for the "high support mode" as described below, so that the variation display time on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (performance display device 42) becomes shorter than in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of the "16R Probable Big Win A" and "4R Probable Big Win A", a "high support mode" is granted until the next big win occurs. This "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as the "Until Next Time High Support Mode".

After the "16R High Success Big Win B" and "4R High Success Big Win B" end, a "high support mode" is granted while the special display devices 43L and 43R display the variable "20 times", "30 times", "40 times", or "50 times". Hereinafter, this "high support mode" is referred to as the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", or "50 times high support mode", respectively.

After the "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A" end, the "high support mode" is granted while the special display devices 43L and 43R display the "30 times" variable display. This "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as the "30 times high support mode S."

After the end of the "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" will be awarded.

After the "JUB jackpot" ends, the "Until next time - high support mode" will be granted.

In this embodiment, various game states are generated by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if "high probability mode" and "high support mode" are applied, it will be in a so-called "high probability state (probability fluctuating state)."

When "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are applied, it becomes what is known as the "normal state."

When "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are applied, it will be in what is known as a "time-saving state."

When the "high probability mode" and "low support mode" are both applied, it becomes a so-called "latent probability state (latent probability change state)." In other words, when it becomes a "latent probability state," the probability of a jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is no different from the "normal state," so it becomes difficult for players to recognize that the "high probability mode" has been applied.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the various "big wins" mentioned above, a "small win" occurs when a predetermined result is obtained in the win/lose lottery. In the small win state, a "short opening" is considered as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times (five rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode granted after the small win state ends are the original modes before the small win state occurred. For example, if the lottery mode before the small win state occurred was the "high probability mode," the "high probability mode" will be maintained even after the small win state ends.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot type awarded in the case of winning the winning/losing lottery is different depending on whether the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB. If the winning/losing lottery triggered by the game ball entering the upper start winning hole 33YA is won, it is assigned to one of "16R sure-win A", "16R sure-win B", "4R sure-win A", "4R sure-win B", "16R normal jackpot A", "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", and if the winning/losing lottery triggered by the game ball entering the lower start winning hole 33YB is won, it is assigned to one of "16R sure-win A", "4R sure-win A", "4R normal jackpot A" and "JUB jackpot". In addition, the "small win" will only occur if the player wins the lottery triggered by the game ball entering the lower start winning hole 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L, 43R are each composed of two segment display devices and are installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or to light up any combination of display segments. This allows each segment display device to individually display a predetermined symbol (including letters and numbers).

When a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, a variable display is displayed on the first special display device 43L, and when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB, a variable display is displayed on the second special display device 43R. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

After the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R display a varying value, the display mode when the varying value stops will definitively display whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. For example, when a game ball enters the upper start winning slot 33YA, the corresponding first special display device 43L displays a varying value at high speed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes stops displaying (for example, for a few seconds). If the jackpot lottery is won, various numerical values corresponding to the jackpot (see FIG. 86) are displayed when the varying value stops, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86, for example, when the "16R certain jackpot A" is won, "9-" is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when the "16R certain jackpot B" with the "50 times high support mode" is won, "84" is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. Also, when the "JUB jackpot" is won, "1.-" is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when the "small jackpot" is won, "1-" is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. Here, in order to enhance the performance effect of the "JUB jackpot", it is preferable that the stop modes of both are confusingly configured, such as the stop mode "1.-" for the "JUB jackpot" and the stop mode "1-" for the "small jackpot".

Of course, the stop modes of the special display devices 43L, 43R corresponding to various winning types are not limited to the above modes. For example, there may be multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, rather than just one. For example, when a "16R special jackpot A" is won, one of "91", "92", "93", ... may be selected and stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R.

Even if there are multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, it is preferable that the multiple stop modes related to the "JUB jackpot" and the multiple stop modes related to the "small win" are configured to be confusingly configured. For example, any of "-1.", "-2," "-3.", "-4," ... may be displayed as multiple stop modes related to the "JUB jackpot," and any of "-1," "-2," "-3," "-4," ... may be displayed as multiple stop modes related to the "small win." In such a configuration, one of a pair of a specific symbol (here, "1," "2," "3," ...) with a predetermined display segment (here, ".") lit and a specific symbol that is not lit is included in the multiple stop modes related to the "JUB jackpot," and the other is included in the multiple stop modes related to the "small win," and they are configured to be alternately switched.

The color displayed in any or all of the display segments may also be configured to be changeable as appropriate.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the start winning hole 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display for that part is configured to be displayed after the variable display currently being performed ends. In other words, the variable display is put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of variable displays that can be held is determined for each type of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are held for each game ball that entered the upper start winning hole 33YA and the game ball that entered the lower start winning hole 33YB. In addition, the number of reserved displays is displayed by lighting the first reserved lamp 46a and the second reserved lamp 46b. In addition, if a new game ball enters the start winning hole 33YA, 33YB during a jackpot state, the variable display for that part is also held on hold.

In addition, basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the upper start winning opening 33YA and is consumed in the order in which they entered, and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls entered the lower start winning opening 33YB and is consumed in the order in which they entered. However, if both the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB are reserved (if one or more of the first reserved lamp 46a and the second reserved lamp 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is consumed preferentially. In other words, unless all the variable displays triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB are consumed, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA will not be displayed. For example, when one first reserved lamp 46a is lit, if a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB and one second reserved lamp 46b is lit, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is postponed, and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed first. For ease of explanation, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is also referred to as the "first variable display," and the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is also referred to as the "second variable display."

The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through it one by one. As will be described in more detail later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a lottery is held to determine whether the opening and closing device 37Y (lower start winning hole 33YB) should be opened, and a variable display is performed on the normal pattern display device 41. If the opening lottery is won, the opening and closing device 37Y is opened for a specified period of time.

The variable display unit 35 is provided with a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display in response to passing through the through gate 34, and a performance display device 42 that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R.

Furthermore, the variable display unit 35 is provided with a variable identification lamp 40 that indicates which winning event the variable display being performed on the performance display device 42 corresponds to, either the upper start winning port 33YA or the lower start winning port 33YB.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light and display "O" or "X" as a normal symbol, and each time the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing manner, for example, from "O" → "X" → "O" → ... Then, when the changing display stops at the "O" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the opening and closing device 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened for a predetermined period of time. The display content of this normal symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 while the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variation, the variation display for that part will be displayed after the current variation display has finished. In other words, the variation display will be put on hold (on hold). The maximum number of times that the variation display can be held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times can be held, and the number of times that the display is held is displayed by lighting up the hold lamp 44.

The performance display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 described below. That is, in the performance display device 42, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and is displayed by the display control device 45 described below.

As shown in FIG. 92, the performance display device 42 is provided with three pattern display areas, for example, upper, middle, and lower, and multiple types of patterns (numbers) are displayed (variably displayed) in each pattern display area in sequence, and then the patterns are displayed in order for each pattern display area (for example, in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area). For example, when the main control device 261 determines the above-mentioned various "certain jackpot" or various "normal jackpot", the first or second special display device 43L, 43R displays a display corresponding to the jackpot, and the performance display device 42 displays the patterns in a combination corresponding to the jackpot (for example, the patterns displayed in the upper pattern display area, middle pattern display area, and lower pattern display area are the same), and the jackpot state is started. In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or a "small jackpot", the combination of patterns displayed in the performance display device 42 does not correspond to a jackpot, as described later.

Also, when the symbols are displayed in a combination that corresponds to a big win, the first step is to display the same symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas. This state in which the same symbols are displayed in the upper and lower symbol display areas while the middle symbol display area is still displaying a changing pattern is called a reach state.

In addition, if a reach state occurs but a jackpot state does not occur, a pattern different from the pattern displayed in the upper pattern display area and the lower pattern display area is displayed in the middle pattern display area. Also, in the case of various "probable jackpots" or various "normal jackpots", a repeated number is displayed in the performance display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, depending on the type of pattern displayed, it is impossible to determine the game state (such as "high probability mode" or not) that will be awarded after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when a "JUB jackpot" or "small jackpot" occurs, a predetermined combination of specific numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is displayed instead of a repeating number. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. This means that when a chance symbol is displayed, the player cannot distinguish between a "JUB jackpot", which is more advantageous to the player, and a "small jackpot", which is not so advantageous, and can have hope that a "JUB jackpot" will occur, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Of course, the specific number combinations displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas may be different for a "JUB jackpot" and a "small jackpot". Also, when a "JUB jackpot" or a "small jackpot" is obtained, instead of a specific predetermined number combination, a random miss combination may be displayed, as in the case of a miss.

In addition, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the number of pending balls displayed on the variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R in response to the pending lamps 46a and 46b (see FIG. 92, etc.).

In this embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. Therefore, the player will be able to understand the game status and lottery results, etc. solely through the display contents (pattern display, hold display, etc.) of the performance display device 42.

Of course, the configuration of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46L, 46R is not limited to this configuration, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R, etc. may be configured to be visible. However, as described above, the special display devices 43L, 43R are provided in inconspicuous locations such as the lower corners of the play area where they are unlikely to be seen by players, and the size of their display units is small and the time for which the distinguishing characters are displayed is relatively short. Therefore, unless one keeps an eye on the special display devices 43L, 43R and observes them carefully, it is virtually impossible to grasp the given play state.

The change specification lamp 40 is equipped with a blue LED and a red LED, and emits blue light when the performance display device 42 is displaying a change triggered by a win at the upper start winning port 33YA, and emits red light when the performance display device 42 is displaying a change triggered by a win at the lower start winning port 33YB.

Next, the configuration of the variable display unit 35 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 56 and 57, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, so that they are integrated into the variable display unit 35.

A rectangular opening 213a (see Figure 55) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is removably attached to the back side. The liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 is a well-known type in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent materials is arranged on the front side of a backlight as a light-emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a roughly circular opening 751 in the center, through which the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 can be seen.

The center frame 47 is not constructed from a single member, but is made up of, for example, a base member to which various decorative members that have been plated or the like, and a lens member made of transparent resin that transmits light such as an LED, are attached.

A stage portion 770 is provided along the left-right direction on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. The stage portion 770 has gentle undulations along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the center of the rear wall 772 of the stage 770, which opens forward and through which game balls can fall. A communication passage 775 that leads to the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the center of the stage 770. The other side of the communication passage 775 opens to the front side of the lower edge 47b of the center frame 47, and serves as an outlet 776 for discharging game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the surface of the game board 30. When the center frame 47 is placed on the game board 30, the outlet 776 is located above the upper start winning opening 33YA, as shown in FIG. 53.

In the center of the stage 770, in front of the drop hole 774, a guide groove 778 is formed that slopes gently downward toward the back. This allows game balls to fall from the stage 770 into the drop hole 774.

A ball passage (warp flow path) 764 is formed inside the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47 to allow game balls to pass through. The inlet portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens to approximately the center in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while the outlet portion 764b opens toward the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. This ball passage 764 can guide game balls flowing down the surface of the game board 30 onto the stage portion 770 inside the center frame 47.

The game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 rolls on the stage portion 770, then falls from the front onto the surface of the game board 30, or falls into the drop hole 774 described above. Of these, the game ball that falls into the drop hole 774 is guided onto the surface of the game board 30 via the connecting passage 775. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 has a relatively high probability of entering the upper start winning port 33YA.

In addition, an upper prop unit 761 and a lower prop unit 762 are arranged between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213 in the variable display unit 35.

Specifically, the upper performance device unit 761 is disposed on the back side of the upper edge portion 47a of the center frame 47, and under normal circumstances (see FIG. 56), it is almost entirely covered by the upper edge portion 47a, etc., and only a portion of it is visible to the player.

The lower performance device unit 762 is disposed on the reverse side of the lower edge portion 47b of the center frame 47, and under normal circumstances (see FIG. 56), it is almost entirely covered by the lower edge portion 47b, etc., and only a portion of it is visible to the player.

Here, we will explain in detail the configuration of the upper prop unit 761 and the lower prop unit 762. First, we will explain the upper prop unit 761 in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in Figures 56 to 58, the upper prop unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper edge 47a of the center frame 47.

The upper prop unit 761 includes a unit base 810 disposed at the upper front surface of the frame cover 213, an upper movable prop 811 that is swingably mounted relative to the unit base 810, and a swing drive mechanism 812 for swinging the upper movable prop 811.

The swing drive mechanism 812 includes a support arm 814 that supports the upper movable part 811, and a swing motor 815 that serves as the drive source for driving the support arm 814.

Then, as the support arm 814 is rotated and displaced based on the drive of the swing motor 815, the upper movable part 811 can be swung between a standby state (see FIG. 56) in which most of it is located behind the upper edge 47a of the center frame 47 and difficult for the player to see, and an exposed state (see FIG. 58) in which most of it is located in front of the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 and easy for the player to see. The area in front of the liquid crystal display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 constitutes the performance area (predetermined area) in this embodiment.

The swing motor 815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable part 811 (support arm 814) can be controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signal. At the same time, the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable part 811 (support arm 814) from the reference position can be grasped by monitoring the number of drive pulse signals input. Although not shown in the figure, the swing drive mechanism 812 is provided with a position detection sensor for detecting the rotational position of the support arm 814.

Here, the upper movable part 811 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 101 to 105. The upper movable part 811 comprises a base part 817 fixed to the tip of the support arm 814, and an upper rotating body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base part 817. The upper rotating body 820 is a rotating body for performance purposes, and constitutes the first rotating body as the first rotating means.

The base portion 817 has a generally circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support shaft portion 818 is formed at the center thereof so as to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed in a generally cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open rear side.

The upper rotor drive motor 821 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base portion 817. A pinion gear 821b is attached and fixed to the front end of the rotation shaft 821a of the upper rotor drive motor 821. The driving force of the upper rotor drive motor 821 is transmitted to the upper rotor 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

A circular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front surface of the base portion 817. A circular opening 822a is formed in the center of the cover body 822.

The upper rotating body 820 mainly consists of a rotating base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 arranged in a ring shape on the front side of the rotating base plate 823.

The rotating base plate 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction, and six extension pieces 827 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical portion 826. The six extension pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (60° intervals) around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 826.

The cylindrical portion 826 is fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817. This allows the rotating base plate 823 to be rotatably supported on the base portion 817. Although not shown, the cylindrical portion 826 or the support shaft portion 818 is provided with a restricting means for preventing the rotating base plate 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off the base portion 817 (support shaft portion 818).

Each extension piece 827 has a slit 829 formed therein that penetrates in the front-rear direction and runs along the radial direction of the rotating base plate 823. A cylindrical pinion shaft 830 is formed on the back surface near the tip of each extension piece 827 and protrudes rearward.

A circular central gear member 831 is fitted from the rear onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large diameter gear portion 831a at its front side and a small diameter gear portion 831b at its rear side, forming a step from front to rear.

In addition, pinion gears 832 are fitted onto the pinion shafts 830 and mesh with the large diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831.

In addition, an annular pressing plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotating base plate 823 (see FIG. 105). The circular opening 835a of the pressing plate 835 has a diameter slightly larger than the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 so that the small diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted therethrough, and has a smaller diameter than the large diameter gear portion 831a.

As a result, the pressing plate 835 is fixed to the tip of the pinion shaft 830 while covering the six pinion gears 832 and the large diameter gear portion 831a from the rear and passing through the small diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is held rotatably around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823.

The pinion gear 821b of the upper rotor drive motor 821 meshes with the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831. This transmits the rotation of the upper rotor drive motor 821 to the central gear member 831.

In other words, the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. constitute a main power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the upper rotor drive motor 821 to the upper rotor 820 to slide the movable piece 825 and drive the rotating base plate 823 to rotate.

Furthermore, a second drive gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823. As shown in FIG. 105, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with a second transmission gear 842. The second transmission gear 842 is connected to an oil damper 843. A support member 844 is fitted into the oil damper 843 from the rear, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817.

This brakes the rotating base plate 823 so that it does not rotate at torques below a predetermined level. Here, the second drive gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, etc. form a restrictive power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the upper rotating body 820 and restricts the operation of the upper rotating body 820.

The restrictive power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and is configured so that power is not transmitted directly between the upper rotor drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without passing through the rotating base plate 823.

As can be seen from Figure 101, the upper rotating body 820 is formed based on the motif of a single flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to resemble a single petal.

Each movable piece 825 is formed from a transparent resin material that has translucency. However, the surface of the general part of each movable piece 825 (excluding the magnifying lens part 828 described later) has fine uneven parts (not shown). As a result, the general part of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the performance display device 42 located at the rear, resulting in a uniform surface emission state as a whole, but it is difficult to identify the display object (object) displayed on the display part 42a through the general part of the movable piece 825.

In contrast, one of the six movable pieces 825 has a magnifying lens portion 828 formed thereon. Hereinafter, when the movable piece 825 having the magnifying lens portion 828 is to be distinguished from the other movable pieces 825, it may be referred to as a "specific movable piece 825A." The movable piece 825 and the magnifying lens portion 828 constitute the light-transmitting portion in this embodiment.

The magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can enlarge and display objects located behind it, allowing the player to view them. For example, the player can enlarge and view display objects such as letters and characters displayed on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 through the magnifying lens section 828.

A rack portion 838 extending linearly is integrally formed on the rear surface of the movable piece 825. The rack portion 838 is inserted into a slit 829 of the extension piece 827 of the rotating base plate 823. This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotating base plate 823 (the extension direction of the extension piece 827). Although not shown, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with a restricting means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off the rotating base plate 823.

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 is engaged with the pinion gear 832 on the back surface of the extension piece 827. This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the slit 829 of the extension piece 827, i.e., along the radial direction of the rotating base plate 823, by transmitting the power of the upper rotor drive motor 821 via the main power transmission mechanism.

When the upper rotor 820 is in this configuration and in a normal standby state, the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extension pieces 827 are each slid to the innermost position in the radial direction and are in a reduced diameter state (see Figures 101 and 102).

When the upper rotor 820 is in a contracted state, the base ends of the six movable pieces 825 are in approximate contact with the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823, and both side edges on the base end side of each movable piece 825 are in approximate contact with the base end side edges of the adjacent movable pieces 825.

On the other hand, when a specific performance is being performed, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter as the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extension pieces 827 simultaneously slide radially outward (see Figures 103 and 104).

In addition, a motor control board (motor driver) 845 is attached to the rear side of the base portion 817, which receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and controls the upper rotor drive motor 821.

The upper rotor drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via the motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes according to the number of input pulses. In other words, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement and rotation speed of the upper rotor 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, the amount of rotational displacement of the upper rotor 820 from the reference position can be grasped.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a position detection sensor 846 for detecting the rotational position of the upper rotating body 820 (rotating base plate 823) is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817. In this embodiment, a known photosensor having a light emitting element and a light receiving element arranged facing each other with a space between them is used as the position detection sensor 846.

Correspondingly, a light blocking piece 847 is formed to protrude from the rear side of the rotating base plate 823 (the second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). When the light blocking piece 847 is detected by the position detection sensor 846, it is determined that the upper rotating body 820 is in the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, when viewed from the front of the upper rotating body 820, the position where the specific movable piece 825A is located on the horizontal right side is the reference position.

Although not shown in the figure, the base unit 817 is provided with an upper role control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and monitors and controls the position detection sensor 846.

Assuming that the upper rotor drive motor 821 rotates once with a 360-pulse excitation signal (drive pulse signal) under this configuration, the angle change (angle change per step) based on one excitation signal pulse is 1°. In other words, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec in this embodiment, it takes a minimum of 720 msec (= 2 msec x 360 pulses) for the upper rotor drive motor 821 to rotate once.

Furthermore, assuming that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the upper rotor drive motor 821 and the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, in the above-described configuration in which the upper rotor drive motor 821 rotates once with an excitation signal of 360 pulses, the upper rotor 820 will rotate once in a minimum of 2880 msec (= 2 msec x 360 pulses x 4).

However, the amount of angle change based on a one-pulse excitation signal and the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small diameter gear portion 831b are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 103 etc., when the upper rotating body 820 stops rotating, the six movable pieces 825 are configured to stop at one of the six predetermined stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, the first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the upper rotating body 820, the second stop position EA2 located diagonally downward to the right, the third stop position EA3 located diagonally downward to the left, the fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, the fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally upward to the left, or the sixth stop position EA6 located diagonally upward to the right) set at six locations in the rotation direction of the upper rotating body 820 (clockwise direction in this embodiment).

Here, we will explain the operation of the upper rotating body 820 configured as described above. As shown in Figures 101 and 102, during normal times when no special effects are being performed, the six movable pieces 825 are each positioned at the radially inner sliding limit position of the upper rotating body 820. In other words, the upper rotating body 820 is in its most contracted state.

In this state, when the upper rotor drive motor 821 is rotated in the forward direction, the central gear member 831 first begins to rotate in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front via the pinion gear 821b.

When rotation first begins, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotating base 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotating base 823 remains stationary and does not move.

Meanwhile, as the central gear member 831 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, each of the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large diameter gear portion 831a rotates. Power is then transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portions 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and each of the six movable pieces 825 slides radially outward in the radial direction of the upper rotor 820 along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. In other words, the upper rotor 820 expands in diameter.

As shown in Figures 103 and 104, when each of the six movable pieces 825 reaches the radially outer sliding limit position of the upper rotor 820 and the upper rotor 820 reaches its maximum diameter, rotational power is transmitted to the rotating base 823. When the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotating base 823 begins to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

After that, when the upper rotor drive motor 821 stops, the upper rotor 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 each stop at one of the stop positions EA1 to EA6.

When the reel performance ends and normal operation resumes, the upper rotor drive motor 821 is rotated in reverse, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front via the pinion gear 821b.

Even in this case, when the central gear member 831 first starts to rotate, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotating base plate 823 via the above-mentioned regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotating base plate 823 remains stationary and does not move, and only the movable piece 825 moves.

As a result, each of the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotates. Then, power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 slide and displace radially inward of the upper rotor 820 along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827, causing the upper rotor 820 to reduce in diameter.

Then, when each of the six movable pieces 825 slides to the radially inner sliding limit position of the upper rotor 820, the upper rotor drive motor 821 is stopped. This causes the upper rotor 820 to return to its normal contracted state.

Next, the lower prop unit 762 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in Figures 56 to 58, the lower prop unit 762 is provided on the back side of the lower edge portion 47b of the center frame 47.

The lower prop unit 762 includes a unit base 850 arranged to cover the lower front surface of the frame cover 213, a lower movable prop 851 arranged to be movable up and down on the back surface of the unit base 850, and a vertical drive mechanism 852 for moving the lower movable prop 851 up and down.

The lower movable prop 851 includes a slide base 853 that is movable in the vertical direction, a pair of left and right support parts 854A, 854B that protrude upward from the slide base 853, drive motors 855A, 855B for the lower rotors that are provided at the upper ends of the support parts 854A, 854B (see FIG. 107), lower rotors 856A, 856B that are generally rectangular in front view and are attached and fixed to the front ends of the rotation shafts of the drive motors 855A, 855B, and motor control boards (motor drivers) 857A, 857B (see FIG. 107) that are provided on the back side of the drive motors 855A, 855B. The lower rotors 856A, 856B are rotors for performance, and constitute the second rotors as the second rotation means.

As shown in FIG. 106, the lower rotor 856A on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the "lower left rotor 856A") has a first information portion 856Aa that is circular in a front view at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a second information portion 856Ab that is circular in a front view at the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information portions 856Aa and 856Ab constitute the acted upon portion in this embodiment.

Both information sections 856Aa, 856Ab are made of a translucent material and are configured to transmit light emitted from the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the performance display device 42 located at the rear at a predetermined transmittance.

In this embodiment, the first information section 856Aa has "SMALL" written in clear letters against a colorful, transparent (e.g., rainbow-patterned) background component with a relatively high light transmittance (hereinafter, such writing may be referred to as "strong SMALL"). The second information section 856Ab has "SMALL" written in dull letters against a dark, semi-transparent background component with a relatively low light transmittance (hereinafter, such writing may be referred to as "weak SMALL").

On the other hand, the general part of the lower left rotating body 856A, excluding the two information writing sections 856Aa and 856Ab, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and serves as a light-shielding section that does not transmit the light emitted from the display section 42a of the performance display device 42.

Similarly to the lower-left rotating body 856A, the lower right rotating body 856B (hereinafter referred to as the "lower-right rotating body 856B") has a first information portion 856Ba that is circular in front view at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a second information portion 856Bb that is circular in front view at the other end in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. 106. The information portions 856Ba and 856Bb constitute the acted upon portion in this embodiment.

Similar to the two information display sections 856Aa, 856Ab of the lower-left rotating body 856A, the two information display sections 856Ba, 856Bb of the lower-right rotating body 856B are made of a translucent material and are configured to transmit light emitted from the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the performance display device 42 located at the rear with a predetermined transmittance.

In this embodiment, the first information section 856Ba has "BIG" written in clear letters against a colorful, transparent (e.g., rainbow-patterned) background component with a relatively high light transmittance (hereinafter, such writing may be referred to as "Strong BIG"). The second information section 856Bb has "BIG" written in dull letters against a dark, semi-transparent background component with a relatively low light transmittance (hereinafter, such writing may be referred to as "Weak BIG").

On the other hand, the general part of the lower right rotating body 856B, excluding the two information writing sections 856Ba, 856Bb, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and serves as a light-shielding section that does not transmit light emitted from the display section 42a of the performance display device 42.

The lower rotor drive motors 855A and 855B are stepping motors whose rotation is controlled by the drive pulse signals applied to them, and the amount of rotation of the lower rotors 856A and 856B can be controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signals. At the same time, the amount of rotational displacement of the lower rotors 856A and 856B from the reference position can be grasped by monitoring the number of drive pulse signals input.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, position detection sensors 858A and 858B for detecting the rotational positions of the lower rotors 856A and 856B are attached to the undersides of the lower rotor drive motors 855A and 855B. In this embodiment, the position detection sensors 858A and 858B are publicly known photosensors in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are arranged facing each other with a space between them.

Correspondingly, light blocking pieces 859A, 859B are formed to protrude from the rear side (near the side edge) of the lower rotors 856A, 856B. Then, the light blocking pieces 859A, 859B are detected by the position detection sensors 858A, 858B, thereby determining that the lower rotors 856A, 856B are in the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the reference position is where the longitudinal direction of the lower rotors 856A, 856B is aligned with the vertical direction and the first information sections 856Aa, 856Ba are higher than the second information sections 856Ab, 856Bb.

The vertical drive mechanism 852 is composed of a vertical drive motor 860 disposed on the unit base portion 850 and a rack portion 861 provided on the right edge of the slide base portion 853. A pinion gear 860a fixed to the rotating shaft of the vertical drive motor 860 is engaged with the rack portion 861 of the slide base portion 853.

Although not shown in the figure, the unit base part 850 has a guide groove part extending in the vertical direction, and the slide base part 853 has a protrusion part that is assembled to the guide groove part. This prevents the slide base part 853 from shifting left and right when it moves up and down. In other words, the guide groove part and the protrusion part form a guide means that guides the lower movable part 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B).

With this configuration, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates, allowing the lower movable part 851 to slide vertically.

Normally, the lower movable role 851 is in a standby state (see FIG. 56) where most of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are located in a standby position behind the lower edge portion 47b of the center frame 47 and are difficult for the player to see. Then, when the up/down drive motor 860 rotates forward and the slide base portion 853 slides upward, the lower movable role 851 is exposed (see FIG. 58) where the entire lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are located on the front side of the display portion 42a of the performance display device 42 and are easily visible to the player.

Also, from this state, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates in the reverse direction, causing the slide base portion 853 to slide downward, and the lower movable part 851 returns to its normal standby state.

The vertical drive motor 860 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by the applied drive pulse signal, and the vertical movement amount of the lower movable part 851 (lower rotors 856A, 856B) can be controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signal. At the same time, the vertical displacement amount of the lower movable part 851 from the reference position can be grasped by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 863 is attached to the unit base 850 to detect the vertical position of the lower movable part 851. In this embodiment, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are arranged facing each other at a distance is used as the position detection sensor 863.

Correspondingly, a light blocking piece 864 is formed protruding from the lower end of the rack section 861 of the slide base section 853. Then, when the light blocking piece 864 is detected by the position detection sensor 863, it is determined that the lower movable part 851 (slide base section 853) is in the reference position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the position where the lower movable part 851 is in the above-mentioned standby state becomes the reference position (standby position).

Here, although not shown in the figure, the lower movable part 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) may be configured with a movement restriction means such as a stopper that can restrict movement beyond a predetermined amount.

Although not shown in the figure, the unit base section 850 is provided with a lower role control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and performs drive control of the up/down drive motor 860 and monitors and controls the position detection sensor 863.

In this embodiment, while the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B are rotating or stopped, the positional relationship between the upper rotor 820 and the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B changes between a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the upper rotor 820 does not overlap with at least a part of the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the upper rotor 820 overlaps with at least a part of the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B. As described below, when a predetermined condition is met (when the high support mode continues), the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B are configured to be in the second positional relationship (proximate state) more frequently than when the predetermined condition is not met.

Specifically, when the lower-left rotating body 856A stops rotating, the first information description section 856Aa (strong, SMALL) and the second information description section 856Ab (weak, SMALL) are configured to stop at one of four predetermined stop positions EB1 to EB4 set in the rotation direction (clockwise in this embodiment) of the lower-left rotating body 856A (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EB1 located on the upper side of the lower-left rotating body 856A, the second stop position EB2 located on the right side, the third stop position EB3 located on the lower side, or the fourth stop position EB4 located on the left side).

When the first information section 856Aa (strong, small size) or the second information section 856Ab (weak, small size) stops at the first stop position EB1 and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, the first information section 856Aa (strong, small size) or the second information section 856Ab (weak, small size) that has stopped at the first stop position EB1 is enlarged and displayed via the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, and can be viewed by the player (see Figures 110 and 111).

This relative positional relationship between the upper rotor 820 and the lower left rotor 856A corresponds to the first and second positional relationships in this embodiment. In addition, the mode in which the magnifying lens unit 828 enlarges and displays the first information section 856Aa (strong, small size) or the second information section 856Ab (weak, small size) corresponds to the first mode in this embodiment, and the operating mode of the upper rotor 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotor 820 at the fourth stop position EA4 corresponds to the first operating mode in this embodiment.

When the lower right rotating body 856B stops rotating, the first information section 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information section 856Bb (weak/BIG) are each configured to stop at one of four predetermined stop positions EC1 to EC4 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EC1 located on the upper side of the lower right rotating body 856B, the second stop position EC2 located on the left side, the third stop position EC3 located on the lower side, or the fourth stop position EC4 located on the right side) set in the rotation direction (counterclockwise in this embodiment) of the lower right rotating body 856B.

When the first information section 856Ba (Strong/BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (Weak/BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1 and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop position EA1, the first information section 856Ba (Strong/BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (Weak/BIG) that has stopped at the first stop position EC1 is enlarged and displayed via the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, and can be viewed by the player (see Figures 112 and 113).

This relative positional relationship between the upper rotor 820 and the right-lower rotor 856B corresponds to the second second positional relationship in this embodiment. In addition, the mode in which the magnifying lens unit 828 enlarges and displays the first information section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (weak/BIG) corresponds to the second mode in this embodiment, and the operating mode of the upper rotor 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotor 820 at the first stop position EA1 corresponds to the second operating mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, due to the various table configurations, when the first information portion 856Aa (strong, SMALL) or the second information portion 856Ab (weak, SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1 and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, that is, when the first information portion 856Aa (strong, SMALL) or the second information portion 856Ab (weak, SMALL) stopped at the first stop position EB1 is enlarged and displayed via the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, the first information portion 856Ba (strong When the first information section 856Ba (strong, BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (weak, BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1 and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop position EA1, that is, when the first information section 856Ba (strong, BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (weak, BIG) stopped at the first stop position EC1 is enlarged and displayed through the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player, such as the continuation of the high support mode, is increased, as described below. Furthermore, the rate of a second advantageous state (high support mode "continued until next time") that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (high support mode "continued +10 times").

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 54 and 55. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that supplies game balls, a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into one unit, and since the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203".

First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 etc. As described above, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided protruding rearward on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 53) that is arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45 and the sub-control device 262 are removably attached in a stacked state from front to back.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a storage box (numeral omitted) with an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and is fixed to the rear side of the performance display device 42 (storage box). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and is fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the insides can be seen. An LED control board or the like that drives the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning openings 33YA, 33YB, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different paths such as the various winning openings and the outlet 36 mentioned above. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217 described below, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although not shown in the figure, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221, etc., and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

In contrast, the start winning switches 224A and 224B, which detect winnings at the start winning ports 33YA and 33YB, are connected directly to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are input to the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In this embodiment, the back frame set 215 also functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, a board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened toward the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a specified trace is left behind. This makes it easy to discover whether the board box 263 has been tampered with.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis extending vertically. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left side (upper right side in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is provided with multiple external connection terminals for relaying various information transmissions to the hall computer of the gaming hall, etc., and is not labeled for convenience. For example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), terminals for outputting information regarding the opening of the front frame set 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91, 92 described below, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as winning error, lower tray full error, no ball in the tank error, and payout error, and terminals for outputting information regarding the number of winning balls paid out from the payout control device 311 are provided.

However, in this embodiment, there is no terminal for outputting information about a "small win", and the configuration is such that information about the occurrence of a "small win" is not output. In this embodiment, since "small wins" tend to occur relatively frequently during "high support mode", constantly outputting occurrence information every time a "small win" occurs may result in a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such problems are relatively unlikely to occur, such as during "low support mode", the configuration may be such that information about the occurrence of a "small win" is output.

In addition, it is preferable to output the occurrence information of a "JUB jackpot" when the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" is confirmed, for example, after the five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" have ended, that is, after the situation in which it is impossible to distinguish it from a "small jackpot" has been overcome, at the timing of outputting an opening command (jackpot notification performance) described later. If only the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is output in advance when it is still impossible to distinguish it from a "small jackpot," the player may see the information display device installed in the island equipment of the hall corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 and know in advance that a "JUB jackpot" has occurred, which may weaken the performance effect of the "JUB jackpot."

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right portions (the left portion in FIG. 54) of the board box 263. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 with an opening on the top side is provided, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has two rows of ball passages that allow the game balls to flow horizontally, and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and further, a case rail 357 that allows the game balls to flow vertically is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls are paid out as appropriate by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is also provided with a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24 V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, which is supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened to the rear. As shown in FIG. 55, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 as a rear guide means into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow, and at the most downstream part of the discharge passage section 217, a discharge chute (not shown) is formed for discharging the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The game balls are rotating bodies that flow down the game area. The game balls rotate and flow down while coming into contact with the nails 49, the windmills 57, etc. in the game area. The game balls that have won at each winning port, such as the general winning port 31, are collected through the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. The outlet 36 also leads to the discharge passage 217, and game balls that do not enter any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed integrally.

Also, as shown in FIG. 54, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314, which serve as a payout control means, are removably attached in a front-to-back stacked state to the rear side of the lower frame set 251.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a circuit board box 313a and fixed to the rear side of the lower frame set 251. For convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but in reality they are composed of a single board (printed circuit board).

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and is fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened remains.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside can be seen.

The payout control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returning to the normal state).

The power supply 313 is further provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, since the state before the power outage is stored and retained when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall closes), if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323.

As shown in Figure 55, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see Figure 50, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. The inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed thereon that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or the like from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defensive performance. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the rear side, and when the inner frame 12 is in a closed state, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, in this embodiment, various conductive members formed of conductive metal materials, such as the reinforcing frame of the front frame set 14, the locking device 600, the rail components 51, 52, the left and right frame components 11c, 11d, etc., as well as various conductive members formed of conductive resin materials, such as the tank 355, the tank rail 356, and the case rail 357, are electrically connected to a predetermined earth terminal (not shown). In addition, game balls are generally made of metal materials, and their surfaces are polished or plated to give them a glossy, light-reflecting luster and to make them conductive. Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the various conductive members, the static electricity charged to the game ball can be released.

As shown in FIG. 53, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launching device 60), and as shown in FIG. 54, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 54). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be inserted and removed from the switch main body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward, and the inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces backward. When the detection unit is in a state where it protrudes from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is retracted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control device 261. In other words, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 502 are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of CPU 501 and the return addresses of control programs executed by CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all data stored in the stack area, working area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

The backup area 503a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off (including the time of power off; the same applies below) so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was off when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on (including the power is turned on when the power is cleared; the same applies below). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described later) when the power is turned off due to a power outage or the like, and power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed when a power outage occurs.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the working area is not backed up.

The CPU 501, which incorporates the ROM 502 and RAM 503, is connected to an input/output port 505 via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and a normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the performance display device 42, which serves as a display means, is controlled via the sub-control device 262. The sub-control device 262 constitutes the light emission control means in this embodiment.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221, count switch 223, start winning unit switches 224A and 224B, and through gate switch 225, as well as various electrical components such as various boards, are connected to the input/output port 505. In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, a RAM 553 which is a memory which temporarily stores various data etc. when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed, an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and also various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory which temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555, and is also connected to the display control device 45. In addition, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the performance button 125, the performance role units 761 and 762, various illumination units, and the lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 causes the display controller 45 to execute display control based on a command (e.g., a variation pattern command) sent from the main controller 261, and causes the display controller 45 to display on the performance display device 42. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not there is a jackpot, and the performance display device 42 controlled by the sub-controller 262 displays information in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. The sub-controller 262 also controls the drive of the upper performance device unit 761 and the lower performance device unit 762.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512 that stores the control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a may be backed up, and data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off, so that when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, like the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SK1 is input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a process to be performed during a power outage.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer in which commands sent from the main control device 261 are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls; a specific command to permit the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and the flag is turned on when the specific command is received, and turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before the power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout return command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state is restored to before the power was cut off, and is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a launch control device 312, a payout device 358, etc.

The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation section (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and to a card unit (ball lending unit) placed to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall or the like, and receives ball lending operation commands from the player and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent from a ball lending device or the like to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit, it is possible to omit the card unit connection board 314.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the launch device 60 is operated and launches game balls with a strength according to the amount of operation of the handle 18 under the conditions that a launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the launch stop switch that stops the launch has not been operated. This allows the player to change the amount of movement and operation mode of the game balls guided into the play area.

The display control device 45 executes the display of the decorative patterns on the performance display device 42 according to instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input port 527 is connected to an input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. The input port 527 is also connected to the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 via the bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via the bus line 531, and the performance display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and performs control of the VDP 526 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) by analyzing the received command or performing a predetermined calculation process based on the received command. This performs display control in the performance display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the performance display device 42, and the display content of the performance display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524. Character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as designs to be displayed on the performance display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the performance display device 42. The VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of the CPU 521, video RAM 524, etc., and mediates the reading and writing of data, and reads out display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a specified timing and displays it on the performance display device 42.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24V AC power supplied from an external source, generates a +12V power supply to drive various switches and motors, a +5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supplies to the main control unit 261, the payout control unit 311, etc. Note that the launch control unit 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V power supply, +5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control unit 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the power outage processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM clear switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clear switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clear switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clear signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

Next, we will explain the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control unit 261 conducts a lottery using various counter information during play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, a jackpot random number counter CB1 is used for the jackpot lottery (win/lose lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot state is generated, a jackpot type determination counter CB2 is used to determine the type of jackpot, a reach selection counter CB3 is used to determine whether or not a reach state is generated when the performance display device 42 is changed due to a miss and to determine the type of reach to be generated, an initial value random number counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, a change type counter CS1, CS2 is used to determine the change display time of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (performance display device 42) and to determine the change pattern (performance pattern) in the performance display device 42, and a normal pattern random number counter CB4 is used for the lottery of the normal pattern display device 41 (opening lottery to determine whether or not the opening and closing role 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened).

Counters CB1, CB2, CB3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CB4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM503 has a special variable reserve area in which the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area in which the value of the normal pattern random number counter CB4 is stored. The normal variable reserve area has one execution area and four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4).

The special variable reserved area also includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable reserved area, each of which has four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls into the upper start winning slot 33YA.

In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls into the lower start winning slot 33YB.

In each holding area of the normal variable holding area, the value of the normal pattern random number counter CB4 is stored in chronological order according to the passage history of the game ball through the through gate 34.

By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times each, as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (i.e., 599), it returns to the lower limit value of 0 as the opening value. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CB1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter CB1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is stored in the first special variable reserve area or the second special variable reserve area. Therefore, this process forms part of the various lotteries.

Two types of random number values that result in a jackpot are set: "low probability mode" and "high probability mode". In this embodiment, in "low probability mode", there are two random number values that result in a jackpot, with the values being "7, 307", and in "high probability mode", there are 20 random number values that result in a jackpot, with the values being "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In other words, in "low probability mode", there is a 1/300 chance of winning the lottery (a jackpot state occurs), and in "high probability mode", there is a 1/30 chance of winning the lottery.

In this embodiment, a win/lose determination table is provided in ROM 502 that is referenced when determining whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two win/lose determination tables: a first win/lose determination table that stores "7, 307" and a second win/lose determination table that stores "7-16, 307-316."

In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is also used to determine a "small jackpot." The number of random numbers that result in a "small jackpot" is 50, and the values are "101 to 125, 401 to 425." In other words, there is a 1/12 probability of winning the lottery (a small jackpot occurs).

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19), it returns to the lower limit, 0. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 determines the jackpot type to be awarded, i.e., "16R special jackpot A", "16R special jackpot B", "4R special jackpot A", "4R special jackpot B", "16R regular jackpot A", "16R regular jackpot B", "4R regular jackpot A", "4R regular jackpot B" or "JUB jackpot".

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 corresponds to. As described above, in this embodiment, the allocation of jackpot types differs between when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and when it enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. In other words, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, a first jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 87) is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0,1", it is determined that a "16R special jackpot A" will be awarded.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "2", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "3", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "4", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded, and if it is "5", it is determined that a "16R sure-change jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "6", it is determined that a "4R special jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "7", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "8", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "9", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded, and if it is "10", it is determined that a "4R certain variable jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "11", it is determined that a "16R normal jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "12", it is determined that a "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "13", it is determined that a "16R normal jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "14", it is determined that a "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "15", it is determined that a "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "16", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "17", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "18", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded; if it is "19", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded.

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning the upper start winning slot 33YA, there is a 10% chance of a "16R special jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "16R special jackpot B", a 5% chance of a "4R special jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "4R special jackpot B", a 5% chance of a "16R regular jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "16R regular jackpot B", a 20% chance of a "4R regular jackpot B", a 5% chance of a "16R regular jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "16R regular jackpot B", and a 20% chance of a "4R regular jackpot B".

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB, the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 88) is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0-9", it is determined that a "16R sure-win A" will be awarded, if it is "10, 11", it is determined that a "4R sure-win A" will be awarded, if it is "12, 13", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot A" will be awarded, if it is "14", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "15", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "16", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times, high support mode" will be awarded, if it is "17", it is determined that a "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" will be awarded, and if it is "18, 19", it is determined that a "JUB jackpot" will be awarded.

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning the lower start winning slot 33YB, there is a 50% chance of a "16R special jackpot A", a 10% chance of a "4R special jackpot A", a 10% chance of a "4R regular jackpot A", a 20% chance of a "4R regular jackpot B", and a 10% chance of a "JUB jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

The reach selection counter CB3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the reach selection counter CB3 is used to select one of the following: a "reach before or after miss" in which the final stopping symbol stops one space before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs for the decorative symbol; a "reach other than a reach before or after miss" in which the final stopping symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs; and a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs. In this embodiment, a reach determination table is provided in ROM 502 to be referenced when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and which reach it corresponds to. The reach determination table stores values from 0 to 238, with CB3 = 0, 1 corresponding to a reach that misses either forward or backward, CB3 = 2 to 21 corresponding to a reach that does not miss either forward or backward, and CB3 = 22 to 238 corresponding to a complete miss.

The reach selection counter CB3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area (first special variable reserve area or second special variable reserve area) of RAM 503.

Of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters CS1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 198), while the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as the "first fluctuation type counter" and CS2 as the "second fluctuation type counter." This is also shown in Figure 60.

For example, in the normal state probability jackpot fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 90), the first fluctuation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of the decorative pattern, such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and other general fluctuation modes, while the second fluctuation type counter CS2 determines more detailed fluctuation modes, such as fluctuation time. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is easy to diversify the fluctuation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the fluctuation mode using only the first fluctuation type counter CS1.

The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the changing decorative symbols. The super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols while the changing decorative symbols are being displayed (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. The premium reach is a presentation mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and is performed in a mode in which characters and the like in a different pattern from the super reach are displayed in addition to the decorative symbols while the changing decorative symbols are being displayed (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. The buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the decorative pattern variation by the performance display device 42.

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to use different prime numbers for the jackpot random number counter CB1, reach selection counter CB3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and to use numbers that are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter CB4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The normal symbol random number counter CB4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is obtained when the game ball passes through the through gate 34.

When a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable pattern for a predetermined period of time, after which the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (in this example, a circle) is displayed stationary, and the opening/closing device 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened for a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, in "low support mode", the winning random number value is two, "0, 1". On the other hand, in "high support mode", the winning random number value is eight, "0 to 7". In other words, in "low support mode", there is a 1/5 probability that the opening and closing device 37Y will be in the open state, and in "high support mode", there is a 4/5 probability that the opening and closing device 37Y will be in the open state.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, followed by the main processing.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control device 261 at the time of the power outage to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. The CPU 501 then suspends the ongoing control and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power outage occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as explained above.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 63, first, in step SB301, the process of reading the various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the state of the various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switches 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information is saved.

In step SB302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step SB303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, the reach selection counter CB3, and the normal pattern random number counter CB4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their upper limit values, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter CB1, CB2, CB3, and CB4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

After that, in step SB304, the start winning process is executed in response to the winning of the start winning openings 33YA, 33YB, and in step SB305, the through gate passing process is executed in response to the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34. Then, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process of step SB304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 64. The execution area of the special variable reserve area and each reserve area are provided with a jackpot random number memory area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, a jackpot type random number memory area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and a reach random number memory area that stores the value of the reach selection counter CB3.

First, in step SB501, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the lower start winning hole 33YB based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224B. If the determination in step SB501 is positive, it is determined in step SB502 whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb, which counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by the ball entering the lower start winning hole 33YB, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If the determination in step SB502 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB509. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB502 is positive, the process proceeds to step SB503, where the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step SB504, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 updated in the random number update process in step SB303 are stored in the first empty reserved area in the second special variable reserved area. After step SB504, the process proceeds to step SB505.

In step SB505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step SB506, if it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a second jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area.

Here, first, in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set, and if the result is negative, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the result is positive, the second jackpot type determination table is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area is any of the values "0 to 9" corresponding to "16R variable jackpot A", the "16R variable jackpot A flag" is turned on, if the value is any of the values "10, 11" corresponding to "4R variable jackpot A", the "4R variable jackpot A flag" is turned on, if the value is any of the values "12, 13" corresponding to "4R normal jackpot A", the "4R normal jackpot A flag" is turned on, if the value is any of the values "14 to 17" corresponding to "4R normal jackpot B", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on, and if the value is any of the values "18, 19" corresponding to "JUB jackpot", the "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on.

Here, if a "16R High-Speed Jackpot A", "4R High-Speed Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" is won, i.e. if a "High Support Mode Until Next Time" is granted after the jackpot ends, a lottery is held with a probability of, for example, about 1/100 to determine whether or not a non-notification effect will be performed that does not notify the player that the granted "High Support Mode" is the "High Support Mode Until Next Time". If the lottery result indicates that a non-notification effect will be performed, the non-notification effect execution flag is turned on.

In the next step SB507, if it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area. The reach determination process will be described in detail later.

Then, in the next step SB508, a process for setting a hold control command is performed. A hold control command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the variable display) that is held and stored in the second special variable hold area. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SB201). The hold control command includes, for example, hold information such as information indicating the results of the jackpot determination process and the jackpot type determination process, and information indicating whether the variable display was triggered by a win in the start winning slot 33YA or 33YB.

Here, the details of the jackpot determination process in step SB505 are explained with reference to FIG. 65.

First, in step SB5101, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches either of the values "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first hit/miss judgment table. Note that for convenience in FIG. 65, the processing of step SB5101 is described in a simplified manner, but in reality, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "7", and if the judgment is negative, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "307", and if either of these judgments is positive, a positive judgment is made in step SB5101, and if both judgments are negative, a negative judgment is made in step SB5101.

If a positive judgment is made in step SB5101, i.e., if it is judged that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and then the process proceeds to step SB5105. The first game value imparting means (first special game state generating means) in this embodiment is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to a first game value (first special game state) in step SB5102.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB5101 is negative, then in step SB5103, it is determined whether or not the game is in "high probability mode" based on the value of the lottery mode flag described below.

If step SB5103 returns a positive result, i.e., if the game is in "high probability mode," step SB5104 determines whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area is one of the values corresponding to the jackpot stored in the second win/loss determination table, excluding the above-mentioned "7" and "307," namely, "8 to 16, 308 to 316." Note that, even during this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot, as described above.

If the result of step SB5104 is positive, i.e., if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode," the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and then the process ends.

The judgment process of steps SB5101 and SB5104 constitutes the first lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes this constitutes the first lottery means.

If the result of step SB5103 or step SB5104 is negative, i.e., if it is not a "jackpot," proceed to step SB5105.

In addition, in step SB5105, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special variable reserve area matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to the small jackpot.

If the result of step SB5105 is positive, i.e., if it is determined that a small win state will occur, the small win flag is turned on in step SB5106, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB5105 is negative, this process ends as is.

The judgment process in step SB5105 constitutes the second lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main control unit 261 that executes this constitutes the second lottery means. Also, the function of the main control unit 261 that generates a small win state equivalent to a second game value (second special game state) in step SB5106 constitutes the second game value granting means (second special game state generating means) in this embodiment.

Next, the reach determination process of step SB507 will be explained with reference to FIG. 66.

First, in step SB5301, it is determined whether or not a win flag (a big win win flag or a small win win flag) was set in the big win determination process performed immediately before. If the determination is positive in step SB5301, that is, if a big win state or a small win state occurs, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SB5301 is positive, i.e., if a winning state does not occur, then in step SB5302, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special variable pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach." If the determination in step SB5302 is positive, then in step SB5303, the front or rear miss flag indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB5302 is negative, then in step SB5304, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special variable pending area matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to a "reach other than a front or rear miss." If the result of step SB5304 is positive, then in step SB5305, the non-front or rear miss flag is turned on, and this process is terminated.

Also, if the result of step SB5304 is negative, i.e., if the result is a "complete miss," the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, after the processing of step SB508, or if a negative judgment is made in step SB501, in step SB509, it is judged whether or not the game ball has entered the upper start winning hole 33YA based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224A. If a negative judgment is made in step SB509, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made, in step SB510, it is judged whether or not the value of the upper reserved counter Na, which counts the number of reserved variable displays triggered by the entry into the upper start winning hole 33YA, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative judgment is made in step SB510, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SB510, the processing proceeds to step SB511, and the upper reserved counter Na is incremented by 1.

In the following step SB512, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored in the first empty reserved area of the first special variable reserved area. After step SB512, the process proceeds to step SB513.

In step SB513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot. The jackpot determination process in step SB513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step SB505, except for the small jackpot determination, and the only difference is that the information on the variable display that is the subject of the processing is based on winning at the upper start winning port 33YA. For the sake of simplicity, a detailed description will be omitted.

In the following step SB514, if it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, the above-mentioned first jackpot type determination table is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area is either the value "0, 1" corresponding to "16R certain variable jackpot A", the "16R certain variable jackpot A flag" is turned on, if it is either the value "2-5" corresponding to "16R certain variable jackpot B", the "16R certain variable jackpot B flag" is turned on, and if it is the value "6" corresponding to "4R certain variable jackpot A", the "4R certain variable jackpot A flag" is turned on. is turned on, and if the value is any of "7-10" corresponding to the "4R special jackpot B", the "4R special jackpot B flag" is turned on, if the value is "11" corresponding to the "16R normal jackpot A", the "16R normal jackpot A flag" is turned on, if the value is any of "12-15" corresponding to the "16R normal jackpot B", the "16R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on, and if the value is any of "16-19" corresponding to the "4R normal jackpot B", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on.

If the "16R High-Speed Jackpot A" or "4R High-Speed Jackpot A" is won, that is, if the "Until Next Time High Support Mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the non-notification effect will be performed, as in step SB506. If the lottery result indicates that a non-notification effect will be performed, the non-notification effect execution flag is turned on.

In the next step SB515, if it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the first special variable reserve area. Note that the reach determination process in step SB515 is the same as the reach determination process in step SB507 above, and the only difference is that the information on the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning hole 33YA, so for convenience, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Then, in step SB516, the pending control command setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. Note that the pending control command setting process in step SB516 is similar to the pending control command setting process in step SB508 above, and the only difference is that the information on the variable display that is the subject of the process is based on the ball into the upper start winning hole 33YA. For the sake of simplicity, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SB305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 67.

In step SB601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If the result of step SB601 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB601 is positive, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step SB602, it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the result of this determination is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB602 is positive, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, then the process proceeds to step SB603, where the normal hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Then, in the following step SB604, a random number related to the win/lose is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 updated in the random number update process in step SB303 above is stored in the first free memory area of the normal variable reserve area of RAM503. After that, the through gate passing process ends. Therefore, the process of step SB604 forms part of the third win/lose lottery.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. In the following step SB102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step SB103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON) or not, and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step SB112 to clear (delete) the backup data. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SB104 to determine whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case, the process proceeds to step SB112 as well. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB105, and in the next step SB106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. If the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process proceeds to step SB112 as well.

In the processing of step SB112, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-control device 262, which is the sub-side control device, and the payout control device 311, etc. In addition, upon receiving the initialization command, the sub-control device 262 executes its own initialization process as described below, and stores the value "0" of the game state determination value Xj, which corresponds to the initial setting of "normal state", in the game state storage area.

Then, the process proceeds to RAM initialization (step SB113, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return to the initial state when you turn on the power, for example when the hall opens for business, you turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process moves to RAM 503 initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). That is, in step SB113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step SB114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set, and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step SB103: NO), the process at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed on the condition that the power outage occurrence information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step SB107, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored, and in step SB108, the power outage occurrence information is cleared.

In step SB109, a game status check process is executed to ascertain the game status at the time of power outage that is stored in RAM 503.

In the next step SB110, a recovery command is sent to the sub-control device 262, which is the sub-side control device, and the payout control device 311, etc., to restore the gaming state at the time of power failure. The recovery command sent to the sub-control device 262 includes information related to the gaming state at the time of power failure identified in the gaming state check process (the gaming state determination value Xj, described later).

In step SB111, the registers in use are restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Then, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game status check process of step SB109 will be described with reference to Figures 68 and 69. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the game status check process, and Figure 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the lottery mode flag, support mode flag, game status identification counter Kj, and game status judgment value Xj, which will be described later. Note that the game status check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step SB807) and the winning end setting process (step SB1216), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 68, in step SB1901, a process is executed to read various information related to the game state at the time of power failure that is backed up and stored in RAM 503. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the game state identification counter Kj are each read from RAM 503.

The lottery mode flag is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode". The flag value is set to "50 (H)" when the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and "53 (H)" when the lottery mode is "high probability mode". Note that the value "5" of the upper 4 bits of the lottery mode flag is added uniformly as a noise countermeasure and is not intended to determine the game state in particular.

The support mode flag is state determination information used to determine the state of the winning support mode, and if the winning support mode is a "low support mode", the flag value is set to "A0 (H)". Note that the value "A" of the upper 4 bits of the support mode flag is added uniformly for noise prevention purposes and is not intended to determine the game state in particular.

In addition, if the winning support mode is "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode", the flag value is set to "A1 (H)".

In addition, if the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", the flag value is set to "A2 (H)", and if it is "Until next time/high support mode", the flag value is set to "A3 (H)".

The game state identification counter Kj is state determination information that counts the number of times a variable display is executed after the end of a jackpot and identifies the timing of switching of the game state. A predetermined initial value is set when the jackpot ends, and one is subtracted each time a variable display is executed. For example, as described below, if the initial value of the game state identification counter Kj is set to "50", and the value of the counter Kj then becomes "31", the variable display at that time can be identified as the 20th variable display after the end of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, if a "16R sure-change jackpot B", "4R sure-change jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" is won, i.e., if a "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is awarded after the jackpot ends, the initial value is set to "50".

In addition, if you win a "16R normal jackpot A" or a "4R normal jackpot A", that is, if you are awarded the "30 times high support mode S" after the jackpot ends, the initial value will be set to "30".

In addition, if a "16R High-Speed Jackpot A", "4R High-Speed Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" is won, i.e., if the "Until Next Time High Support Mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the initial value is set to "0". However, if the non-notification performance execution flag is turned on and a non-notification performance is executed, the initial value is set to "30". The non-notification performance execution flag is turned off after the initial value is set.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, in step SB1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read in step SB1901 is added to the value of the support mode flag.

In the following step SB1903, the sum calculated in step SB1902 is ANDed with a predetermined mask value (in this embodiment, "07(H)") to extract the lowest 3 bits of data, which are then set in a predetermined working area as the game status determination value Xj.

In step SB1904, it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "1". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", or "50 times high support mode".

If the result here is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1905, where it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "4". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", or "50 times high support mode".

If the determination in step SB1904 or step SB1905 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1909. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1905 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1906.

In step SB1906, it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "2". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times/high support mode S" state.

If the result here is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1907, where it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "5". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times high support mode S" state.

If the determination in step SB1906 or step SB1907 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1912. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1907 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1908.

In step SB1908, it is determined whether the value of the game state determination value Xj is "6". In other words, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time, high support mode".

If the result here is positive, the process proceeds to step SB1914. On the other hand, if the result here is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value "6" of the game state determination value Xj is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, in step SB1909, which is reached when a positive judgment is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, it is determined whether the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "31". In other words, it is determined whether the variable display after the end of the jackpot has been performed for the 20th time. If the judgment is positive here, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the judgment is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1910.

In step SB1910, it is determined whether the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "21". In other words, it is determined whether the variable display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1911.

In step SB1911, it is determined whether the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "11". In other words, it is determined whether the variable display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1912.

In step SB1912, it is determined whether the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "1". In other words, it is determined whether it is the "50th time (if the initial value is "50")" or the "30th time (if the initial value is "30")".

If the result here is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value of the game state determination value Xj ("1", "4", "2", or "5") is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB1912 is positive, i.e., if the value of the game state determination counter Kj is "1", the process proceeds to step SB1913, where the value of the game state determination value Xj is changed to "7". After that, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, if a positive judgment is made in step SB1908, the process proceeds to step SB1914, where it is determined whether the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the winning support mode is the "Until next time, high support mode" in which the non-notification performance is not performed. If a positive judgment is made here, the value of the game state judgment value Xj, "6", is stored in a specified area of RAM 503, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB1914 is negative, i.e., if the mode is "Until next time, high support mode" in which a non-notification effect is performed, the process proceeds to step SB1915, where the value of the game state determination value Xj is changed to "5". After that, the process proceeds to step SB1916, where the value of this game state determination value Xj, "5", is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 503, and the process ends. As a result, even if the mode is in "Until next time, high support mode", for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment), the lottery mode will be in "high probability mode" and the same effect as when the winning support mode is in "30 times, high support mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 62. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps SB201 to SB210 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SB211 and SB212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SB201, external output processing is executed to transmit control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the opening/closing device 37Y, etc., updated in the previous processing, to each device, and to transmit output data such as commands to each control device on the sub side. Some more detailed examples are given below.

For example, based on the detection information from the various detection switches described above, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various winning ports, such as the general winning port 31, and if a prize has been entered, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of prizes entered is sent to the payout control device 311.

In addition, if a command is set to blink the error indicator lamp 104, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

In addition, in the external output process, information for understanding the game status is output to the hall computer of the gaming hall, taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot flag described below. Furthermore, the output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also performed in this output process.

For example, if a winning error is detected, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the gaming hall via a specified terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no winning error, an OFF signal is output.

When the decorative pattern is changed and displayed by the performance display device 42, a change pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are sent to the sub-control device 262. In response, the sub-control device 262, which has received the change pattern command, pattern command, etc., determines the change mode of the performance display device 42 based on the various commands, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display (change display) the change mode on the performance display device 42.

In step SB202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the next step SB203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SB204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step SB205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R are set to determine what control is to be performed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, and the big win determination and the change pattern of the decorative symbols on the performance display device 42 are set. The details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step SB206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32 are set to determine what kind of control is to be performed on the variable winning device 32. As a result, when a big win or small win occurs, the opening and closing process of the opening and closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step SB207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal pattern display device 41 are set to determine what control is to be performed on the normal pattern display device 41. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step SB208, the opening and closing device control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening and closing device 37Y are set to determine what control is to be performed on the opening and closing device 37Y. The details of this opening and closing device control process will be described later.

Then, in step SB209, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information has been set in the backup area 503a of RAM 503. If power failure occurrence information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step SB210 whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the previous normal process. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SB201, and the processes from step SB201 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (step SB211, step SB212).

That is, in step SB211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step SB212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SB202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198 and 240 in this example), they are cleared to 0. The changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps SB201 to SB209 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SB209: YES), the power is cut off, and the processing from step SB213 onwards is performed as power failure processing when the power is cut off. In the power failure processing, first, in step SB213, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited, in step SB214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area, and in step SB215, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. Then, in step SB216, a power failure notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step SB217, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 503. Then, in step SB218, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

The processing of step SB209 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to changes in the game state performed in steps SB201 to SB208, or at the end of one cycle of processing in steps SB211 and SB212 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle, and it can be stored easily. In addition, when returning to the state before the power interruption, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing burden of the main control device 261 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step SB213), it is possible to prevent the data at the time of the power interruption from being changed, and the state before the power interruption can be reliably stored.

Next, the first display control process of step SB205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 70.

In FIG. 70, in step SB801, the various winning flags (big win flag and small win flag) described in detail later are referenced to determine whether or not the current state is a winning state (big win state or small win state). The winning state (big win state and small win state) includes a predetermined time during the winning state and after the winning state ends. The predetermined time after the winning state ends here is the time from the winning state ends to the start of normal play (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R), and generally during this time period, the performance display device 42 displays the end of the winning state and various game states and modes that are granted after the winning state. In addition, the period from when the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the performance display device 42 stops in a manner corresponding to a winning state until the variable winning device 32 is opened (generally during this time period, the performance display device 42 displays the start of the winning state) is also included in the winning state.

If the result of the judgment in step SB801 is positive, that is, if the winning state is reached, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in step SB801 is negative, in step SB802, the setting status of the first display flag, which will be described in detail later, is checked to determine whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (performance display device 42) is displaying a change. In detail, if the first display flag is set (if it is in the ON state), it is considered that the change is being displayed, and if the first display flag is released (if it is in the OFF state), it is considered that the change is being displayed in a stopped state, which corresponds to a stopped state. In addition, as will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the change display of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R starts (see step SB920, see step SB807), and is turned off when the change display of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R is displayed in a stopped state (see step SB814).

If the result of step SB802 is negative, i.e., if the winning state is not occurring and the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SB803, where it is determined whether the value of the lower pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending variable displays (second variable display) triggered by winning at the lower start winning port 33YB, is greater than 0.

If the answer is yes in step SB803, that is, if at least one second change display is stored as pending, then in step SB804, 1 is subtracted from the lower pending counter Nb. Note that in this embodiment, if the second change display is stored as pending due to the determination process in step SB803, the second change display is executed without executing the first change display. In other words, even if the first change display is stored as pending earlier than the second change display, the second change display is consumed first (the first change display is postponed).

In the next step SB805, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second special variable pending area. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special variable pending area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3. After step SB805, in step SB806, a process is executed to turn on and off the second pending lamp 46b and a process is executed to cause the variable specific lamp 40 to emit a red light, and then the process proceeds to step SB807.

If the result of step SB803 is negative, i.e., if no second variable display is stored as pending, then in step SB808, it is determined whether the upper pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending variable displays (first variable displays) triggered by winning at the upper start winning port 33YA, is greater than 0. If the result of step SB808 is negative, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB808 is affirmative, in step SB809, 1 is subtracted from the upper reserved counter Na. In the following step SB810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special variable reserved area is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special variable reserved area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After step SB810, in step SB811, a process of turning on and off the first reserved lamp 46a and a process of making the variable specific lamp 40 emit blue light are executed, and then the process proceeds to step SB807. In this embodiment, the special variable reserved area has one execution area, and the data stored in the first special variable reserved area and the second special variable reserved area are shifted to a common execution area when a variable display based on the data is performed.

In step SB807, the variable display setting process is performed. Details of the variable display setting process are explained below with reference to FIG. 72.

First, in step SB900, a game status check process is executed. Note that this game status check process is the same as the game status check process in step SB109 (see FIG. 68) described above, so a detailed description is omitted.

Next, in step SB901, it is determined whether the small win flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to a small win.

If it is determined that the winning combination corresponds to a small win, the process proceeds to step SB910. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning combination does not correspond to a small win, the process proceeds to step SB902.

In step SB902, it is determined whether the jackpot winning flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot.

If it is determined that the winning combination corresponds to a big win, the process proceeds to step SB903. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning combination is neither a big win nor a small win, i.e., if the winning combination is a miss, the process proceeds to step SB912.

In step SB903, it is determined whether any of the various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variable jackpot A flag", "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", "4R probability variable jackpot B flag") are on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to a "probability variable jackpot".

If the result of step SB903 is positive, i.e., if it is a "high probability jackpot", then in step SB904, the system refers to the variation pattern table corresponding to the "high probability jackpot" to determine the variation pattern and sets it in the variation pattern command. Next, in step SB905, the system refers to the symbol table corresponding to the "high probability jackpot" to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, an odd number symbol or an even number symbol), and sets the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ1" or "BZ2" described later). Then, the system proceeds to step SB920.

If the result of the negative judgment in step SB903 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB906, where it is judged whether any of the above-mentioned various normal jackpot flags ("16R normal jackpot A flag", "16R normal jackpot B flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot B flag") is on, thereby judging whether the variable display corresponds to a "normal jackpot". If the result of the positive judgment in step SB906 is positive, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", the variable pattern is determined in step SB907 by referring to the variable pattern table corresponding to the "normal jackpot" and set in the variable pattern command. Next, in step SB908, the jackpot pattern (whether it is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern in this embodiment) is determined by referring to the pattern table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and the corresponding pattern command (in this embodiment, "BZ1" or "BZ2" described later) is set. Then, the process proceeds to step SB920.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, depending on the type of symbol displayed on the performance display device 42, the game state such as the lottery mode that is given after the end of the jackpot cannot be determined. In other words, there is no clear relationship between the variable pattern or the stopped symbol and the jackpot type, such as "odd symbols" being displayed as stopped for a "high probability jackpot" and "even symbols" being displayed as stopped for a "normal jackpot". In this embodiment, the tables are simply divided so that the appearance rate of the predetermined variable pattern or symbol differs depending on the type of jackpot, for example, "odd symbols" are more likely to be displayed as stopped for a "high probability jackpot". Therefore, for example, when a jackpot occurs, the variable pattern or the stopped symbol may be selected based on one jackpot table, regardless of the jackpot type, such as "high probability jackpot" or "normal jackpot".

If the result of step SB906 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB909, where the process determines whether the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to a "JUB jackpot." If the result of step SB909 is positive, i.e., if the display is a "JUB jackpot," the process proceeds to step SB910.

In step SB910, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "JUB big win" and "small win", and is set in the fluctuation pattern command. After that, in step SB911, a symbol command corresponding to the chance symbol (in this embodiment, "BZ6" described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step SB920.

If the result of step SB902 is negative, i.e., if the result is a miss, then step SB912 determines whether the front/rear miss flag is on.

If the determination in step SB912 is positive, i.e., if it is a "front or rear miss reach", then in step SB913, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "front or rear miss reach", and is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the front or rear miss flag is turned off. Then, in step SB914, it is set in the pattern command corresponding to the front or rear miss pattern (in this embodiment, "BZ3" described later). Then, the process proceeds to step SB920.

On the other hand, if the result of step 912 is negative, then in step SB915 it is determined whether the non-front/rear miss flag is on. If the result of step SB915 is positive, i.e., if the result is a "non-front/rear miss reach", then in step SB916 the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "non-front/rear miss reach", and the fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the non-front/rear miss flag is turned off. Then, in step SB917 it is set to the pattern command corresponding to the non-front/rear miss pattern (in this embodiment, "BZ4" described later). Then, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Also, if the result of step SB915 is negative, i.e., if it is a "complete miss", then in step SB918, the miss variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to a "complete miss" and set in the variation pattern command. Then, in step SB919, it is set in the pattern command corresponding to the complete miss pattern (in this embodiment, "BZ5" described later). Then, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and the variation pattern command will be explained. In this embodiment, a variation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "probable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as the "probable jackpot variation pattern table"), a variation pattern table corresponding to a "normal jackpot", a variation pattern table corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small jackpot", a variation pattern table corresponding to a "reach for a miss before or after", a variation pattern table corresponding to a "reach for a non-reach for a miss before or after", and a variation pattern table corresponding to a "complete miss" (hereinafter referred to as the "complete miss variation pattern table") are provided in multiple locations according to the game state (the game state determination value Xj has a value of "0" to "7").

For example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), in the reference address "100", the probability variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state" where the game state determination value Xj is "0" is stored.

Similarly, at address 101, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, at address 102, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj of "2" is stored, at address 103, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj of "3" is stored, at address 104, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj of "4" is stored, at address 105, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj of "5" is stored, at address 106, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj of "6" is stored, and at address 107, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj of "7" is stored.

As for the fluctuation pattern table for complete misses, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the reference address "700" stores the fluctuation pattern table for complete misses that corresponds to the "normal state" where the game state determination value Xj is "0."

Similarly, at address 701, a complete miss pattern table corresponding to a game state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, at address 702, a complete miss pattern table corresponding to a game state determination value Xj of "2", at address 703, a complete miss pattern table corresponding to a game state determination value Xj of "3", at address 704, a complete miss pattern table corresponding to a game state determination value Xj of "4", at address 705, a complete miss pattern table corresponding to a game state determination value Xj of "5", at address 706, a complete miss pattern table corresponding to a game state determination value Xj of "6", and at address 707, a complete miss pattern table corresponding to a game state determination value Xj of "7".

Although not shown in the figures, for the other fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the "JUB jackpot" and "small jackpot", the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "reach before or after miss", and the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "reach other than the front or rear miss", similarly to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table for the special jackpot and the fluctuation pattern table for the complete miss, multiple table groups corresponding to the game state determination value Xj values "0" to "7" are stored in consecutive numbers from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the fluctuation pattern in the above steps SB904, SB907, SB910, SB913, SB916, and SB918, a process is first performed to select a table corresponding to a predetermined gaming state (the gaming state judgment value Xj has a value of "0" to "7") from among a group of multiple tables based on the gaming state judgment value Xj identified in the above gaming state check process (step SB900). At this time, the address in which the table to be selected is stored can be identified by adding the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj to a reference address (for example, "100" in the case of a table for a sure-variable jackpot/fluctuation pattern). In other words, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj itself plays the role of an offset value.

Then, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table for the guaranteed jackpot corresponding to the "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "Address 100": see Figure 90), and a corresponding fluctuation pattern command is set.

The fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment is composed of two bytes, and the upper four bits of the upper byte are composed of information that specifies the game state. In this embodiment, the value of the game state determination value Xj is set as is. In addition, the lower four bits of the upper byte are composed of information that specifies the jackpot type, etc., and the lower eight bits of the lower byte are composed of information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the probability jackpot fluctuation pattern table for the normal state (Xj = 0) [see Figure 89 (a)], in the probability jackpot fluctuation pattern command for the normal state, the upper four bits of the upper byte are set to "0", which is the value of the game state determination value Xj, and the following lower four bits are set to "F", which indicates a "probability jackpot". Then, the remaining eight bits of the lower byte are set to a value that specifies the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 503. The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these fluctuation pattern commands and the fluctuation mode (presentation pattern) of the decorative pattern in a table, and when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation pattern (presentation pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command can be executed.

Next, the symbol command will be described in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-controller 262 to determine the stop symbol. In this embodiment, six categories are specified: a combination of odd jackpot symbols, a combination of even jackpot symbols, a combination of miss symbols at the beginning and end, a combination of symbols other than miss symbols at the beginning and end, a combination of complete miss symbols, and a combination of chance symbols. These categories are indicated, for example, by "BZ1", "BZ2", "BZ3", "BZ4", "BZ5", and "BZ6", and any one of these is set as the symbol command. Meanwhile, the sub-controller 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. The sub-controller 262 then displays the stop symbols corresponding to the symbol commands.

The odd jackpot symbol combination is a symbol combination consisting of the repeated numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and the symbol command corresponding to the odd jackpot symbol combination is set to "BZ1." When "BZ1," which indicates an odd jackpot symbol, is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of the repeated numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 as the stopping symbol.

The even jackpot symbol combination is a symbol combination consisting of the repeated numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and the symbol command corresponding to the even jackpot symbol combination is set to "BZ2." When "BZ2," which indicates an even jackpot symbol, is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of the repeated numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 as the stopping symbol.

The combination of front and rear miss patterns corresponds to a "reach with a miss" in which the final stopping pattern stops one pattern before or after the reach pattern after the reach occurs, and the pattern command corresponding to the combination of front and rear miss patterns is set to "BZ3".

A combination of symbols other than front and rear misses corresponds to a "reach other than front and rear miss" in which the final stopping symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the symbol command corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and rear misses is set to "BZ4".

A complete miss symbol combination corresponds to a "complete miss" that does not result in a reach, and the symbol command corresponding to a complete miss symbol combination is set to "BZ5."

The symbol command corresponding to the chance symbol combination is set to "BZ6". Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top, as described above.

...

Also, if the symbol command is set to "BZ6", the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols.

The variation pattern command and design command set as described above are output in the external output process (step SB201) described below. The sub-control device 262 that receives these commands then determines the variation mode of the performance display device 42 based on the commands, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display (variable display) the variation mode on the performance display device 42.

Now, in step SB920, a start setting process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R have been met. In this start setting process, a first display in progress flag, which indicates whether or not a variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R, is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the change time (remaining time of the change display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change display.

In this embodiment, the variable display time of the special display devices 43L, 43R is set to a value corresponding to the variable pattern of the decorative pattern selected by the above-mentioned variable type counters CS1, CS2. Based on this setting of the first display timer, when a control signal to start a variable display is output to the special display devices 43L, 43R in the external output process of the next normal process, the variable display is started on the special display devices 43L, 43R. Then, after step SB920 is completed, the variable display setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 70, if the judgment in step SB802 is affirmative, i.e., if the display is changing, the process proceeds to step SB812, where a first display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, if the change time is 10 seconds (10,000 msec), the first display timer is set to "2500", and is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec.

Then, the process proceeds to step SB813, where the value of the first display timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not a predetermined variation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", step SB813 is judged to be positive.

If the result of step SB813 is negative, then in step SB817, a display switching setting is made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and this process ends. Based on the contents of the display switching setting, a control signal is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R to switch the display during the external output process in the next normal process. This allows the display switching (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R to be performed at the timing of the first display control process, i.e., every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SB813 is affirmative, the first display flag is cleared (turned off) in step SB814, and the stop display setting is performed in step SB815 to display a stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R.

In addition, based on the settings of the stop display settings, a control signal to display a stop is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process of the next normal process. For example, in the case of a "16R special jackpot A", a "9-" is displayed as a stop (e.g., lit for a few seconds).

Next, in step SB816, the process for setting the end of the fluctuation is performed, and then this process is terminated. The process for setting the end of the fluctuation is now explained with reference to FIG. 71.

First, in step SB1001, the jackpot winning flag and the small jackpot winning flag are taken into consideration to determine whether the stopped display corresponds to a jackpot or a small jackpot. If it corresponds to a jackpot or a small jackpot, the process proceeds to step SB1002, where a win is set. Specifically, the process performs setting processes for the jackpot mid-flag, the small jackpot mid-flag, the first variable flag, the first variable timer, the opening count counter, and the winning counter Vx. After step SB1002 is completed, the process for setting the end of the fluctuation is completed.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not a jackpot state is occurring, and in this case, the flag value is set to "1" (turned on), indicating the occurrence of a jackpot state.

The small win flag is state determination information for determining whether or not a small win state is occurring, and here, like the big win flag, the flag value is set to "1" (turned on), indicating the occurrence of a small win state.

The first variable flag is state determination information for determining whether the variable winning device 32 is in an open state.

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 (the time when the special prize state occurs) and the interval between each special prize state, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has passed since the opening start or end of the opening plate 32a. In the winning setting process of step SB1002, a predetermined value corresponding to each type of winning is set by taking into consideration the opening and closing pattern control table (see FIG. 91). For example, if the first time is the above-mentioned "long opening" such as "16R sure-variable big win A", the first variable timer is set to "7500", and if the first time is the above-mentioned "short opening" such as "JUB big win", the first variable timer is set to "100". As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 32a is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

In addition, as shown in Figure 91, the opening and closing pattern control table pre-sets the number of times the special prize state occurs in each winning state (number of rounds), the opening time of the opening and closing plate 32a in each special prize state (each round), the interval time between each special prize state, etc.

The opening number counter is state determination information for determining the number of times the special prize state occurs during a big win state or a small win state, that is, the number of times the opening and closing process ("long opening" or "short opening") of the variable winning device 32 is executed. In the winning setting process of step SB1002, an initial value corresponding to each type of winning is set with reference to the opening and closing pattern control table. For example, in the case of a "16R special big win A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of a "JUB big win", "20" indicating 20 times, which is the sum of 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings", is set as the initial value.

The winning counter Vx is a winning counting means that counts the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the variable winning device 32, the value of the winning counter Vx is incremented by one.

In addition, in the winning setting process of step SB1002, the opening and closing pattern control table is consulted to set the specified number K1, which is the maximum number of expected winnings in the variable winning device 32 per opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 32a (one special prize state). As described above, the specified number K1 is pre-determined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening and closing member related to one opening and closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, for a "long opening", the specified number K1 is set to "10", and for a "short opening", the specified number K1 is set to "3".

In the hit setting process of step SB1002, the opening command that announces the start of a big hit or small hit is also set. However, in the case of a "JUB big hit", the opening command is set after five "short openings" have ended (such as the special prize state start process of step SB1217 described later). As a result, in the case of a "JUB big hit", the big hit notification performance is performed after five "short openings" have ended, and up to this point, it is indistinguishable from the case of a small hit.

Now, in step SB1001, if it is determined that the result does not correspond to a big win or a small win, i.e., the big win winning flag and the small win winning flag are off, the process proceeds to step SB1003.

In step SB1003, it is determined whether the counter value of the support count counter is "0". The support count counter is a means for measuring the duration of the "high support mode" (the number of variable displays), and as described below, after the end of a jackpot, a value corresponding to each type of jackpot is set as the counter value.

If the counter value of the support count counter is "0", this process ends. On the other hand, if the support count counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that high support mode is set, and in step SB1004, the process of subtracting 1 from the support count counter is performed. In step SB1004, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the game state specification counter Kj is also performed. Then, the process proceeds to step SB1005.

In step SB1005, it is determined whether the counter value of the support count counter is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the current variable display is the specified number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the high support mode is granted). If the value of the support count counter is "0", then in step SB1006, the value of the support mode flag is switched to "A0 (H)" which indicates "low support mode", and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB1005 that the counter value of the support count counter is not "0", this process ends.

Next, the variable prize-winning device control process in step SB206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73.

First, in step SB1201, it is determined whether the big win flag or the small win flag is on. If the determination is negative, the process ends.

If the answer is yes in step SB1202, the count value of the first variable timer is decremented by 1 in the following step SB1202.

In the following step SB1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on. If the determination is affirmative, i.e., if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step SB1204, where it is determined whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0", i.e., whether the opening time (the specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") remains per opening/closing operation ("long opening" or "short opening") of the opening/closing plate 32a.

If the result of step SB1204 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1205, where it is determined whether the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the specified number K1, i.e., whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state has reached the maximum number of expected winning balls (the specified number "10 balls" or "3 balls"). If the result of step SB1205 is negative, i.e., if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (the timing for the special prize state to end) has not yet arrived, the process ends.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SB1204 or step SB1205, the process proceeds to step SB1206, where the first variable timer is set.

Here, the first variable timer is set to a predetermined value (for example, a value of "750" equivalent to "3 seconds", or "250" equivalent to "1 second") with reference to the opening and closing pattern control table to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of a big win or small win, or whether an interval has elapsed between the end of a predetermined special prize state and the start of the next special prize state, etc.).

Then, proceed to step SB1207 and determine whether the counter value of the opening count counter is "0", i.e., whether the number of times the special prize state ("long opening" or "short opening") has been executed has reached a specified number of times.

If the result of step SB1207 is positive, the release end setting process is performed in step SB1210, and this process ends. In the end setting process of step SB1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the winning end flag is turned on.

If the result of step SB1207 is negative, i.e., if the number of times the special prize state ('long opening' or 'short opening') has been executed has not reached the specified number of times, the special prize transfer process is performed in step SB1211, and this process is terminated.

In the special prize sending process of step SB1211, the value of the opening count counter is decremented by 1 and the first variable flag is turned off. This causes the above opening and closing process to be repeated until the number of times the special prize state has been executed reaches the specified number of times.

Now, if the above step SB1203 returns a negative judgment, i.e., if it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of a win or during an interval between special prize states), proceed to step SB1212 and judge whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If step SB1212 returns a positive result, i.e., a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state and it is time to move on to the next process (the start of the next special prize state or the start of normal play), the process proceeds to step SB1215. On the other hand, if step SB1212 returns a negative result, the process ends.

In step SB1215, the above-mentioned winning end flag is taken into consideration to determine whether or not to end the big win state or the small win state.

If the result of step SB1215 is positive, the process ends after performing the winning end setting process in step SB1216.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SB1215, the special prize state start process is performed in step SB1217, and then this process is terminated.

In the win end setting process of step SB1216, the big win flag or small win flag is turned off, and the lottery mode flag is switched, the support mode flag is switched, the support count counter is set, the game status notification command is set, and an ending command that notifies the end of the big win or small win is set.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (when the various "variable jackpot flags" or "JUB jackpot flags" are on), the flag value is set to "53 (H)," which indicates the occurrence of the "high probability mode." On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (when the various "normal jackpot flags" are on), the flag value is set to "50 (H)," which indicates the occurrence of the "low probability mode."

However, if the small win flag is on, the lottery mode flag is not switched and the flag value for the original mode remains set. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the small win occurs (the lottery mode flag's flag value is "53 (H)"), the "high probability mode" (the lottery mode flag's flag value is "53 (H)") remains set even after the small win ends.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the flag value is set to "A1 (H)", if "30 times high support mode S" is granted, the flag value is set to "A2 (H)", and if "until next time high support mode" is granted, the flag value is set to "A3 (H)".

In the setting process of the support count counter, the support count counter is switched based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot, the value of the support count counter is set to "20", which corresponds to 20 times of fluctuation display, "30", which corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display, "40", which corresponds to 40 times of fluctuation display, or "50", which corresponds to 50 times of fluctuation display. When the "30 times high support mode S" is granted, the value of the support count counter is set to "30", which corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display. When the "Until next time high support mode" is granted, the value of the support count counter is set to a value that cannot be reached practically (for example, "99999", which corresponds to 99999 times of fluctuation display).

The game status notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the game status that will be set after the big win ends. When setting this command, a game status check process is first performed. This game status check process is similar to the game status check process in step SB109 above (see FIG. 68), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The game status notification command includes a game status judgment value Xj relating to the new game status identified by the game status check process. As described below, the sub-control device 262 that receives this command switches the game status (game status judgment value Xj) that it has identified to the new game status (game status judgment value Xj). Note that the game status notification command may be omitted, and instead, for example, the game status judgment value Xj may be included in an ending command that notifies the end of the jackpot state.

The big win flag, small win flag, and various "big win flags" are turned off after various processes such as the lottery mode flag switching process are completed. Also, when a win is set (step SB1002) in the end-of-variation setting process in FIG. 71, the lottery mode flag may be reset once (set to "50 (H)"), and the "high probability mode" may be interrupted during a big win or small win.

In the special prize state start process of step SB1217, the first variable flag is turned on, and the opening time for the next special prize state ("7500" or "100") is set in the first variable timer with reference to the opening and closing pattern control table, and the specified number K1 for the next special prize state is set. In addition, the value of the prize counter Vx is reset to "0".

In addition, based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output processing of the next normal processing. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the large winning opening is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, the second display control process of step SB207 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 74.

In FIG. 74, in step SB2101, the setting status of the second display flag, which indicates whether or not a variable display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, is checked to determine whether or not a variable display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41. In more detail, if the second display flag is on, it is considered that a variable display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, and if the second display flag is off, it is considered that a stopped display is being performed, which corresponds to a state in which the variable display is stopped on the normal pattern display device 41.

If the result of step SB2101 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process ends.

Also, if the change is not being displayed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is > 0, proceed to step SB2103. In step SB2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step SB2104, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the normal change hold area. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the normal change hold area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

After that, in step SB2105, a start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 have been met. In detail, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time) of the variable display performed on the normal pattern display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the change time of the variable display performed by the normal pattern display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, so the second display timer is set to "500". Also, in the "high support mode", the change time of the variable display performed by the normal pattern display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, so the second display timer is set to "100".

Based on the settings in the start setting process, when a control signal to start a variable display is output to the normal pattern display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the variable display will start in the normal pattern display device 41. As described above, the normal pattern display device 41 is configured to light and display an "O" or "X" as a normal pattern, and if an "O" is displayed, it will be switched to an "X", and if an "X" is displayed, it will be switched to an "O". Then, after step SB2105 is completed, the second display control process is completed.

Now, if the judgment in step SB2101 is positive, i.e., if the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a variable number, the process proceeds to step SB2106, where the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is subtracted by 1.

Then, the process proceeds to step SB2107, where it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0", i.e., whether the variable time has elapsed. If the determination is affirmative in step SB2107, the second display flag is turned off in step SB2108, and a normal pattern stop display setting is performed in step SB2109 to perform a stop display on the normal pattern display device 41. Then, based on the contents of this normal pattern stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal pattern display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. In other words, if there is a win, the "○" pattern (winning pattern) is displayed as a stop (for example, lit for a few seconds), and if there is a loss, the "X" pattern is displayed as a stop.

As mentioned above, whether or not a win has been made is determined based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 stored in the execution area of the normal variable pending area.

Specifically, of the numbers 0 to 9 on the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the winning values are two (0 and 1) in "low support mode" and eight (0 to 7) in "high support mode."

Then, the process proceeds to step SB2110, where a setting process is performed at the end of the variation, and the process ends. In this process, if the stopped display corresponds to a win, a setting process is performed to open and close the opening/closing device 37Y. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on, and the opening time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is state determination information for determining whether the opening/closing device 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing device 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a specified time has elapsed since the opening started. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing device 37Y differs between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", the second variable timer is set to "1000", and in the "low support mode", the second variable timer is set to "100".

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step SB2107, a switch display setting is made in step SB2111 to continue the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41, and this process is terminated. Then, based on the contents of this switch display setting, a control signal is output to the normal pattern display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process to cause the normal pattern display device 41 to switch display. Specifically, if the currently lit up symbol is "○", it is switched to "×", and if it is "×", it is switched to "○". This realizes the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 at the timing of the second display control process, i.e., every 4 ms.

Next, the opening and closing feature control process of step SB208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 75.

First, in step SB2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag, which indicates whether the opening/closing device 37Y is in the open state, is on. If it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the opening/closing device 37Y is in the closed state), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the above step SB2201 is judged to be positive, i.e., if the second variable flag is on, the opening/closing device 37Y is deemed to be in the open state, and the second variable timer decrement process is performed in step SB2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Then, the process proceeds to step SB2203, where the value of the second variable timer after the above subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the specified open time has elapsed. Here, when the specified open time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0", step SB2203 is judged as positive. If the judgment here is negative, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step SB2203, the process proceeds to step SB2204, where the end setting process is performed, and then the process ends. In the end setting process in step SB2204, the second variable flag is turned off.

In addition, based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing device 37Y in the external output process of the next normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal to open the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing device 37Y, and the opening/closing device 37Y is in an open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal to close the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing device 37Y, and the opening/closing device 37Y is in a closed state. This makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the lower start winning hole 33YB.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to FIG. 76, and then explain the main processing with reference to FIG. 77.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processes executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311 are put on hold for a while, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step SB3001, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step SB3002, the command reception flag is turned on to store that the command has been transmitted from the main control device 261, and this reception interrupt process is terminated. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated to store the next command received in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process of the command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 78, before the command determination process (step SB3201) is performed, it may be confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command may be stored in the command buffer of RAM 513 and the command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started when the power is turned on and reset.

First, in step SB3101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SB3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SB3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step SB3106, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information has been set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power failure occurrence information has been set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB3107, and in the following step SB3108, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 513 has been saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step SB3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SB3108, the process proceeds to initialization of RAM 513 from step SB3115 onwards.

In step SB3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SB3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. Then, in step SB3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SB3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, if the power failure information has been set in step SB3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SB3108, processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored in step SB3109, the power failure information is cleared in step SB3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step SB3111. Also, in step SB3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SB3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SB3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SB3114, in the process of step SB3122, it is determined whether or not power interruption information is set in the backup area 513a. If the power interruption information is set here, it means that the power has been cut off, so the process from step SB3123 onwards is carried out as power outage processing when the power is cut off. In the power outage processing, first, in step SB3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step SB3124, a command judgment process to be described later is executed. Then, in step SB3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step SB3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, in step SB3127, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 513a, and in step SB3128, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step SB3122 checks for information on the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage can be made easier. Also, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command is obtained from the main control unit 261, and a judgment process for that command is performed (step SB3201). This command judgment process is described below with reference to FIG. 79.

Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the command determination process performed by the dispensing control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SB3124, SB3201), it is first determined in step SB3301 whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 76).

If it is determined in step SB3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step SB3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SB3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SB3303, the processing of steps SB3302 to SB3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps SB3304 to SB3306. In step SB3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SB3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SB3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step SB3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed RAM 513 to be initialized when the power was turned on, so in step SB3308 the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SB3309 the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step SB3311 the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 performs initialization processing of RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command, so the timing at which RAM 503 and the timing at which RAM 513 are initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as the RAM 513 being initialized and being unable to perform control corresponding to the received command. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step SB3307, the command judgment process is terminated without clearing the working area of RAM 513 and initializing RAM 513. That is, the process of step SB3307 prohibits the initialization of RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received with the payout permission flag on. In such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the payout permission flag is on and the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step SB3308) and the initial value setting of RAM 513 (step SB3309) is executed, a disadvantage such as not being paid out when there are remaining winning balls occurs, causing a loss to the player, but since the initialization of RAM 513 is prevented with the payout permission flag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Also, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout return command (step SB3304: NO, step SB3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step SB3311 to permit the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information of a power outage and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SB3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step SB3305: NO, step SB3306: YES), in step SB3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step SB3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a specified buffer area, and stores it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command sent from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. In addition, when a prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the payout of prize balls can be performed early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step SB3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SB3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SB3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SB3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Now, let us return to the flowchart in Figure 78 for further explanation. When the command determination process is completed, in step SB3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. If the payout permission flag has not been turned on, this process is terminated. In other words, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being paid out before a command is sent from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB3202 is positive, step SB3203 sets the launch control device 312 to allow launch, and step SB3204 checks the state return switch 321. If it is determined that the state return operation should be started, the state return operation is executed. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball jam (return to normal state).

After that, in step SB3205, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full/unfull state according to the change in state. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full/unfull state is set. Also, in step SB3206, the tank ball no state (bulb out state) or the tank ball no state (bulb present state) is set according to the change in state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball no state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when the tank ball is no longer empty, the tank ball no state is set.

Then, in step SB3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, the condition is notified.

Next, the payout control process for the prize balls and loan balls is executed. In detail, the payout number setting process is executed in step SB3208, the motor control status acquisition process is executed in step SB3209, and the motor drive process is executed in step SB3210.

In step SB3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step SB3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is jammed. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

In this normal process, first in step SB3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the I/O port 554 is checked to determine whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step SB3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is configured as a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261.

The ring buffer has a specified storage area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands have been stored in all of the storage area, the storage area returns to the beginning and the commands are updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on these pointers.

Then, in step SB3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, the command determination processing is explained with reference to FIG. 83.

First, in step SB4101, the received command is read from the command buffer in RAM 553. Then, in step SB4102, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, in step SB4103, it is determined whether the command is a return command, in step SB4104, it is determined whether the command is a pending control command, in step SB4110, it is determined whether the command is a game status notification command, in step SB4111, it is determined whether the command is a variation pattern command, and in step SB4112, it is determined whether the command is a symbol command.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is an initialization command, this means that the main control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 553 when the power was turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step SB4105, and the initial value of the RAM 553 is set in step SB4106. As a result, the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value "0" of the game state determination value Xj, which corresponds to the initial setting of "normal state". After that, this process ends.

Also, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a return command (step SB4102: NO, step SB4103: YES), the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power was cut off, and the sub-control device 262, which does not have a backup function, reads out the value of the game status determination value Xj (any of "0" to "7") included in the return command in step SB4107 and stores it in the game status information storage area of RAM 553. Then, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a pending control command (step SB4103: NO, step SB4104: YES), in step SB4108, a storage process is performed to store various information included in the pending control command (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, information indicating which of the start winning slots 33YA and 33YB the variable display was triggered by, etc.) in the sub-variable pending area, and this process is terminated.

The sub-variable reserve areas are provided in correspondence with the special variable reserve areas of the main control device 261. In other words, the sub-variable reserve areas include a first sub-variable reserve area corresponding to the upper start winning slot 33YA and a second sub-variable reserve area corresponding to the lower start winning slot 33YB, as well as one sub-execution area, and the two sub-variable reserve areas each include four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4).

In each pending area, information related to the variable display executed by the performance display device 42 (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) is stored in chronological order according to the reception history (reception order) of the pending control commands and the winning history of the game balls included in the pending control commands (such as whether the winning was based on entering the starting winning slot 33YA or 33YB). This allows the sub-control device 262 to grasp the number of pending variable displays and their contents.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a game status notification command (step SB4104: NO, step SB4110: YES), in step SB4107, the value of the game status determination value Xj (any of "0" to "7") included in the game status notification command is read and stored in the game status information storage area of RAM 553. Then, this process is terminated.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a change pattern command (step SB4110: NO, step SB4111: YES), it is time to start displaying the changes on the performance display device 42, so start setting processing is performed in step SB4113 and the process proceeds to step SB4114.

In the start setting process of step SB4113, various settings related to the variable display performed by the performance display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special variation pending area of the main control device 261, a process is executed to sequentially shift the data stored in the sub variation pending area to the sub execution area. Next, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set in the variation display timer. The variation display timer is a means for measuring the variation time (remaining time of the variation display) in the performance display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display.

In addition, during the start setting process, the variable display in progress flag, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a variable display is in progress on the performance display device 42, is turned on.

In this embodiment, a presentation pattern for the display of decorative symbols is selected based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, and the stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) to be displayed after the variation time has elapsed is determined based on the hit type information (including "miss"). Information on the presentation pattern and stop patterns determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation pending area. The correspondence between the variation time information and the presentation pattern, and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop patterns are stored in a table in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262.

In the sub-controller 262, similar to the main controller 261, a number of table groups corresponding to the game state determination value Xj values "0" to "7" are stored in consecutive order from a predetermined reference address for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "guaranteed jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small jackpot", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "reach for a miss before or after", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "reach for a non-miss before or after", and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "complete miss".

In other words, when the sub-control device 262 determines the display mode on the performance display device 42, it selects a table corresponding to a predetermined game state (game state determination value Xj of value "0" to "7") from among a group of multiple tables based on the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command. At this time, the address where the table to be selected is stored is identified by adding the value of the game state determination value Xj to the reference address, in the same way as when selecting the variation pattern table.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a pattern command (step SB4111: NO, step SB4112: YES), pattern setting processing is performed in step SB4116, and this processing is terminated.

In the pattern setting process of step SB4116, the pattern stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 81) of RAM 553 described later is set in the above-mentioned sub-execution area as the stopping pattern to be displayed in a stopped state on the performance display device 42, based on the winning type information stored in the holding area of the sub-variable holding area.

More specifically, when the symbol command is set to "BZ1", any of the combinations of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 are determined as the stopping symbol. On the other hand, when the symbol command is set to "BZ2", any of the combinations of 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 are determined as the stopping symbol. Also, when the symbol command is set to "BZ3", the combination of the symbols stored in the front and rear miss reach symbol buffer is determined as the stopping symbol. When the symbol command is set to "BZ4", the combination of the symbols stored in the front and rear non-miss reach symbol buffer is determined as the stopping symbol. When the symbol command is set to "BZ5", the combination of the symbols stored in the complete miss symbol buffer is determined as the stopping symbol. When the symbol command is set to "BZ6", the combination of the symbols "3", "4", and "1" is determined as the stopping symbol corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the performance display device 42.

Now, in step SB4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command matches the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of RAM 553. If the two values match, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the status error flag is turned on in step SB4115, and the value of the game status determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is deemed to be the correct value in step SB4117, and the value of the game status determination value Xj is stored in the game status information storage area. Then, this process ends. When the status error flag is turned on and the two values are different, this fact is notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and an error notification may be made by the performance display device 42, speaker SP, or the like.

In addition, recent gaming machines are equipped with backup functions for the main control device, etc., so even if the power is cut off due to a power outage, various data including the game mode (game state) at that time can be stored and retained. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during high probability mode, the player can resume playing in high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function, it becomes possible for amusement halls to set gaming machines to high probability mode from the start of business, commonly known as "morning". This is done to attract more customers at the start of business, but it may mischievously appeal to players' gambling greed. There are various methods for setting the above-mentioned behavior, and one example is a method in which a gaming machine whose gaming mode was in high probability mode at the end of business on the previous day is not reset to its initial state. In addition, in a configuration in which, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, etc., information on the gaming mode (gaming state determination value Xj) is sent from the main control device to the sub-control device by a return command, etc., as in this embodiment, if the cable connector connecting the main control device and the sub-control device is removed when the power is turned on, etc., the sub-control device will not be able to grasp the actual gaming mode set by the main control device, and will control the initial setting gaming mode, i.e., "normal mode".

In typical gaming machines, when a display or presentation device such as a liquid crystal display device presents a presentation, the display format (e.g., background color) is made different between normal mode and high probability mode, making it easier for players to understand the current game mode.

In addition, sub-control devices that control liquid crystal displays and the like generally do not have a backup function, so when the power is turned off, control related to the initial setting game mode ("normal mode") is performed.

Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to make the display state of the LCD display device appear as if it is in normal mode, even if the actual game mode set by the main control device is a high probability mode. If this happens, the current game mode cannot be easily determined at a glance by the LCD display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this behavior through prescribed investigations, etc.

In particular, in gaming machines that have a high probability mode that is difficult to distinguish from the "normal mode" on the surface, such as the "latent probability change state" of this embodiment, if the high probability mode is set from the time the gaming hall opens for business due to the above-mentioned actions, the actual gaming mode cannot be determined from the display state of the liquid crystal display device, etc.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, if the value of the game state judgment value Xj included in the variation pattern command is different from the value of the game state judgment value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553, an error is notified to that effect, and the value of the game state judgment value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the game state information storage area. In other words, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate game mode at that time. As a result, even if an action such as the above-mentioned "morning" is performed and the actual game mode set by the main control device 261 is the high probability mode, and the presentation mode in the sub-control device 262 is in the normal mode, when a variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the presentation mode corresponds to the game state judgment value Xj included in the variation pattern command. As a result, the above-mentioned "morning" and other actions by game halls can be suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, after step SB3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step SB3901, the process proceeds to step SB3904, where it is judged whether or not it is time to execute the next normal processing, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SB3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step SB3912.

In step SB3905, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5, the role performance counter CB8, and the upper, middle, and lower losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR used to set the losing symbols in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area are used.

The losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured so that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, resulting in randomly changing numerical values. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is used to determine the pattern (jackpot pattern) that is stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42 when a jackpot occurs (either a "high probability jackpot" or a "normal jackpot"). In this embodiment, five odd-numbered patterns and five even-numbered patterns are set as the jackpot patterns. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared for the jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5. In other words, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 4, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (i.e., 4). Then, when the symbol command sent from the main control device 261 is "BZ1", which indicates a combination of odd jackpot symbols, the odd jackpot symbol combination is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols) such that, for example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" (double number), if it is 1, it is "3" (double number), if it is 2, it is "5" (double number), if it is 3, it is "7" (double number), and if it is 4, it is "9" (double number).

In addition, if the symbol command is "BZ2", which indicates a combination of even jackpot symbols, the combination of even jackpot symbols is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols) in the following way: if the counter value is 0, it is "0" (double number of 1); if it is 1, it is "2" (double number of 1); if it is 2, it is "4" (double number of 1); if it is 3, it is "6" (double number of 1); if it is 4, it is "8" (double number of 1);

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SB3905, and is read from the counter buffer of RAM553 when the sub-control device 262 receives a pattern command as described above. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is stored in the jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer of RAM553, but it is also possible to refer to the counter value when a pattern command is received, without storing it in the buffer.

The special feature counter CB8 is used to determine whether or not a special feature (additional feature) will be executed and what type it will be. The special feature counter CB8 has 400 counter values (0 to 399). In other words, the special feature counter CB8 is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 399, and to return to 0 after it reaches the upper limit (i.e. 399).

The reel effect counter CB8 is periodically updated by the counter update process of step SB3905 and stored in the reel effect counter buffer of RAM553. It is then taken into consideration in the reel effect setting process of step SB3910, which will be described later.

The top, middle and bottom losing symbol counters CL, CM and CR determine the stopping symbols (combinations of losing symbols) in the top, middle and bottom symbol display areas if the jackpot lottery results in a "miss". Since one of ten decorative symbols is displayed in each column, ten counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each. The top/losing symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbol in the top symbol display area, the middle/losing symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the bottom/losing symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbol in the bottom symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated using the value of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. Each losing symbol counter CL, CM, and CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in either the front and rear losing reach symbol buffer, the front and rear non-miss reach symbol buffer, or the complete losing symbol buffer of the RAM 553.

Here, the update process of each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 82, in step SB4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the top/losing symbol counter CL, and in step SB4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the middle/losing symbol counter CM. The top, middle, and bottom losing symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the bottom/losing symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step SB4001. Also, if the top/losing symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step SB4002. Then, if it is time to update the top/losing symbol counter CL (step SB4001 is YES), proceed to step SB4003 and update the top/losing symbol counter CL. Also, if it is time to update the center/miss pattern counter CM (step SB4002 is YES), proceed to step SB4004 and update the center/miss pattern counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the bottom/miss pattern counter CR (steps SB4001 and SB4002 are both NO), proceed to step SB4005 and update the bottom/miss pattern counter CR. When updating the miss pattern counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SB4003 to SB4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 10 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the miss pattern counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update process, the top, middle, and bottom losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of each counter value do not overlap. This allows one set of losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR to be updated every time the update process is performed three times.

Then, in step SB4006, it is determined whether the combination of the updated losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the center symbol display area are different), and if it is a reach symbol combination (step SB4006 is YES), it is further determined in step SB4007 whether it is a front and rear missing reach. If the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear missing reach (front and rear missing symbols) (step SB4007 is YES), it proceeds to step SB4008, and the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear missing reach symbol buffer of RAM553. If the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of a reach other than a front or rear miss (a pattern other than a front or rear miss) (step SB4007 is NO), proceed to step SB4009 and store the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time in the reach pattern buffer other than a front or rear miss in RAM 553.

If the combination is other than the reach pattern (step SB4006 is NO), proceed to step SB4010 to determine whether the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a losing pattern combination. If the combination is a losing pattern (completely losing pattern) (step SB4010 is YES), proceed to step SB4011 to store the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time in the complete losing pattern buffer of RAM 553. Note that if both steps SB4006 and SB4010 are NO, the patterns are aligned on the top, middle, and bottom, which corresponds to a combination of jackpot patterns, but in this case, this process ends without storing the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR in the buffer.

In this embodiment, the chance symbol that stops when a "JUB jackpot" occurs has one combination of decorative symbols ("3", "4", and "1"), so there is no need to use counter information when displaying the decorative symbols.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in step SB3907, a display setting process is performed to perform various displays on the performance display device 42. This display setting process mainly involves variable display setting process for performing variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 42, and hold display setting process for performing hold display.

First, the change display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. As shown in FIG. 84, in step SB4301, the setting status of the change display flag is checked to determine whether or not a change display is in progress on the performance display device 42. In more detail, if the change display flag is set (if it is in the on state), it is deemed that a change display is in progress, and if the change display flag is released (if it is in the off state), it is deemed that the change display is in a stopped state, which corresponds to a stopped state. As described above, the change display flag is turned on when the change display of the performance display device 42 is started (start setting process of step SB4113), and is turned off when the change display of the performance display device 42 is stopped (see step SB4305).

If the answer here is positive, i.e. if the fluctuation has started or is still occurring, proceed to step SB4302; if the answer is negative, terminate this process.

In step SB4302, a variable display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10,000 msec), the variable display timer is set to "2500" and is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec.

Then, the process proceeds to step SB4303, where the value of the fluctuation display timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0", step SB4303 is judged to be positive.

If a negative judgment is made in step SB4303, in step SB4304, a change execution process is performed to execute a change display on the performance display device 42, and this process is terminated.

In this change execution process, various calculation processes and command output settings are performed, such as generating display commands to be output to the display control device 45, based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-change pending area of RAM 553.

As a result, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262, and starts displaying the changing patterns on the performance display device 42. Then, once a changing pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the changing pattern display continues in cooperation with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the changing time for the changing display corresponding to the changing pattern command has elapsed (until the value of the changing display timer set in the start setting process of step SB4113 reaches "0").

On the other hand, if the result of step SB4303 is affirmative, i.e., if the value of the variable display timer is determined to be "0", then in step SB4305, a stop display setting is made to perform a stop display on the performance display device 42, and this process ends. In this stop display setting, the variable display in progress flag is released (turned off), and a stop command is set to instruct the display control device 45 to stop the variable display on the performance display device 42.

The variable execution process in step SB4304 also includes a presentation mode switching setting process for changing the display mode on the presentation display device 42 to a mode (presentation mode) that corresponds to the type of game status.

In this embodiment, the presentation mode is switched between "normal mode" where "high support mode" is not applied, "high support mode" where "chance mode" is applied and the duration is unknown, and "gold mode" where "until next time high support mode" is applied and the player is explicitly notified of this, depending on the game state (the value of game state determination value Xj).

More specifically, when the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of RAM 553 is "0", that is, when the "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are assigned, the presentation mode in the presentation display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 92).

In addition, when the value of the game state judgment value Xj is "3", that is, after the end of the "high support mode" for a specified period, the state in which the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are applied becomes a so-called "latent state", so that even in such a case, the state appears to be no different from the "normal state", so the presentation mode in the presentation display device 42 is set to "normal mode".

When the value of the game status judgment value Xj stored in the game status information storage area of RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5" or "7", that is, during the non-alert presentation of "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode", "50 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode S", "Until next time high support mode", or during the "support continuation presentation" described below, the presentation mode in the presentation display device 42 is set to "chance mode" (see FIG. 94).

When the value of the game status judgment value Xj stored in the game status information storage area of RAM 553 is "6", that is, when the "Until next time high support mode" is applied (excluding the non-notification presentation period), the presentation mode in the presentation display device 42 is set to "Gold mode" (see Figure 95).

Next, the hold display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 85. First, in step SB4501, it is determined whether the winning type information stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the second sub-variable reserve area corresponding to the lower start winning slot 33YB among the sub-variable reserve areas is information corresponding to a small win (small win information).

If a negative judgment is made here, that is, if small win information is not included, normal hold display update processing is performed in step SB4502. As shown in FIG. 92, in the normal hold display, hold images TA1-TA4, TB1-TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (hold areas 1-4) are displayed in the first hold display area W3a and the second hold display area W3b, respectively. Normally, a "hold lamp image" that resembles a circular hold lamp is displayed as each of the hold images TA1-TA4, TB1-TB4.

Then, in the normal hold display update process of step SB4502, a display update process is performed to increase or decrease the number of hold images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in a lit or unlit state depending on the increase or decrease in the number of holds in the sub-variable hold area.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step SB4501, i.e., if small win information is contained in any of the first to fourth reserved areas of the second sub-variable reserved area, a reserved display change process is performed in step SB4503, and then this process is terminated.

By performing the hold display change process of step SB4503, one of the four hold images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second hold display area W3b that corresponds to the hold area containing the small win information is replaced with a "star-shaped image" from the "hold lamp image" displayed during normal hold display. For example, in the example shown in Figure 97, the third hold image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image."

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in the lamp setting process of step SB3908, the lighting pattern of the lamps and decorative lights is set to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SB3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. In addition, when audio-related commands, such as an error notification, are sent from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SB3909.

In step SB3910, a reel performance setting process is executed. In the reel performance setting process, various settings are made regarding the reel performance using the upper performance reel unit 761 and the lower performance reel unit 762. Note that the reel performance setting process is a process that is executed as an additional performance when the support continuation performance (roulette performance) described below is performed, and is a process that is executed only when the support continuation performance (roulette performance) is executed. The reel performance setting process in step SB3910 will be described in detail later.

In step SB3911, control settings for customer waiting performance (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed while no variable display is being performed on the performance display device 42) and other processing are performed.

In step 3912, external output processing is performed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings in steps SB3905 to SB3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern is changed and displayed by the performance display device 42. In addition, when a special feature performance is executed, various control signals such as motor control signals (drive pulse signals) are output to the special feature units 761, 762, etc.

After the processing of steps SB3905 to SB3912, which is performed every 1 msec, is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step SB3904, the process proceeds to step SB3913, where it is judged whether or not information on the occurrence of a power failure is stored in RAM 553. The information on the occurrence of a power failure is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control device 261.

If no information about the power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step SB3914, where it is determined whether or not RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step SB3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop in order to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3913 that the power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step SB3915. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring and each output port is turned off. The stored information on the power failure occurrence is also erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing is looped infinitely.

Next, the display mode on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 will be explained along with the flow of the game played by the player.

In the normal state (when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "0"), a variable display area W1 consisting of three pattern display areas, upper, middle, and lower, is set on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 (see FIG. 92). In addition, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 is set that instructs (recommends) the player on the mode of launching the game ball, and further below that, a pending display area W3 is set that shows the number of pending variable displays.

The pending display area W3 is set to correspond to the sub-variable pending area. In other words, the pending display area W3 is divided into a first pending display area W3a and a second pending display area W3b corresponding to the first sub-variable pending area and the second sub-variable pending area. Each pending display area W3a, W3b displays pending images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the four pending areas (pending areas 1 to 4) (see Figure 92).

The pending images TA1-TA4, TB1-TB4 are normally (non-pending) displayed in an off state (see shaded areas), and when a variable display is pending in a specific pending area, the pending images TA1-TA4, TB1-TB4 corresponding to that pending area are switched to a lit state (see white areas).

In the example shown in Figure 92, the first pending image TA1 and the second pending image TA2 in the first pending display area W3a are displayed in a lit state, and the remaining pending images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in an unlit state. In other words, it shows that a variable display is reserved in the first and second reserved areas of the first sub-variable pending area, and the current number of pending variable displays is "2" related to the upper start winning slot 33YA.

In the normal state, "←Hit to the left" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the left area of the variable display unit 35 (such an action will be referred to as "Hit to the left" below). In response to this, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left".

When "hitting from the left", most of the game balls are guided by the nails and the like toward the upper start winning opening 33YA located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35. Of these, some game balls will enter the upper start winning opening 33YA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34, which triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33YB (opening/closing device 37Y), is located in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, i.e., in a position that cannot be reached by the game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Therefore, if the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing device 37Y will not be opened and the game ball will not enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

In other words, under normal circumstances, the game is set up so that players who play by hitting with the left hand have a greater advantage in the game.

When a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, multiple types of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable display area W1 of the performance display device 42 for each of the above-mentioned pattern display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z numbered "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns Z are scrolled from right to left periodically in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of patterns.

In such a case, in the upper pattern display area, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display stops in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area, and the decorative patterns Z are displayed stationary in each pattern display area.

If the jackpot lottery is won based on the entry of a game ball into the upper start winning slot 33YA, the player will go through a reach state, and then a decorative pattern Z of the jackpot combination will be displayed stopped on a specified jackpot line. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, center, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (called five lines). Therefore, when three decorative patterns Z of the jackpot combination are displayed stopped in a row on any of the five lines in the top, middle, and bottom pattern display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening and closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the jackpot opening, and a specified jackpot presentation starts on the display unit 42a of the presentation display device 42. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 32 is located in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position that cannot be reached by the game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35), if the player continues to "hit from the left", the game ball cannot win the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, when the big win performance starts, the instruction display area W2 displays "right hit →" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (such an action will be referred to as "right hit" below). In response, the player switches from "left hit" to "right hit" to play the big win game so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35.

If the player hits the ball from the right, most of the balls will be guided by the nails and other elements toward the variable winning device 32, and will win in the variable winning device 32. This allows the player to win more balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the variable winning device 32 and pass through it will flow down toward the upper start winning opening 33YA or the lower start winning opening 33YB due to the nails and the like.

In addition, a through gate 34 is provided in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, which serves as the opening trigger for the lower start winning opening 33YB (opening/closing device 37Y) on the way down to the variable winning device 32, and some game balls pass through the through gate 34.

If the game ball wins the opening lottery that is held when it passes through the through gate 34, the opening and closing device 37Y opens, allowing the game ball to enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

After the big win ends, the "high support mode" is applied as a winning support mode for the opening/closing device 37Y while the special display devices 43L and 43R (performance display devices 42) display a predetermined number of changes, or until the next big win occurs.

In response to this, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 performs a predetermined support effect related to the "high support mode" (a "chance mode" effect or a "gold mode" effect), and the variable display area W1 is displayed in a reduced size. In the reduced variable display area W1, the top, middle, and bottom pattern display areas are switched to left, middle, and right pattern display areas, and the number of jackpot lines becomes one line.

During this support effect, a support count display area W4 is set on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 (see Figures 94 and 95). The support count display area W4 displays the number of support times that have apparently been confirmed to be granted. Therefore, for example, even if the internal lottery has confirmed that "50" support times will be granted, for the sake of effect, "20" will initially be displayed.

More specifically, when a "16R normal jackpot B" or a "4R normal jackpot B" is won and "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is awarded, that is, when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "1", the support count display area W4 initially displays "20 times". Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Similarly, when a "16R High-Speed Jackpot B" or a "4R High-Speed Jackpot B" is won and "20 Times High Support Mode", "30 Times High Support Mode", "40 Times High Support Mode" or "50 Times High Support Mode" is awarded, that is, when the game state determination value Xj has a value of "4", the support count display area W4 initially displays "20 times". Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

On the other hand, if a "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times high support mode S" is awarded, that is, if the game state determination value Xj is "2" or "5" (excluding Xj = "5" in the case of non-notification performance), the support count display area W4 initially displays "30 times." Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

In addition, if the "16R High-Speed Jackpot A", "4R High-Speed Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" is won and the "Until Next Time High Support Mode" is granted, that is, if the game state determination value Xj has a value of "6", the support count display area W4 will initially display "Until Next Time". However, if the non-notification performance is performed, the support count display area W4 will initially display "30 times". Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

As mentioned above, while the "high support mode" is in effect, the game ball is more likely to enter the lower start winning hole 33YB, so even if the jackpot game has ended, it is preferable for the player to continue "hitting to the right" in order to get an opportunity to open the opening and closing device 37Y. In other words, during the "high support mode," the game is set up so that players who play by "hitting to the right" can play more advantageously. Therefore, in the "high support mode," the instruction display area W2 of the performance display device 42 displays "Hit to the right" to recommend that the player "hit to the right."

In this embodiment, the change time during normal times fluctuation in "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support times display area W4 is not the final value of "1 time"), i.e., when the game state determination value Xj has a value of "1", "2", "4", or "5", is set to "1 second" by the change pattern table selected based on each game state determination value Xj (except for a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance that matches this is determined and executed by the sub-control device 262.

In addition, the change time during a specific number of times in the "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 reaches the final value of "1 time", i.e., when the number of times corresponds to the "20th", "30th", "40th" or "50th" time since the end of a jackpot), i.e., when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "7", is set to "25 seconds" by the change pattern table selected based on the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj (except during a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance that matches this is determined and executed by the sub-control device 262.

When the specific number of changes occurs (25-second change), the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 performs a support continuation effect that increases the player's interest, such as determining by lottery whether the "high support mode" will continue or not.

For example, in this embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) when the specific number of times changes. In this roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 96, a roulette pattern TR is displayed. The roulette pattern TR includes items such as "End", which indicates that the support number of times ends here, "+10 times", which indicates that the support number of times will be added by another 10 times, and "Until next time", which indicates that the support number of times will continue until the next big win.

In the roulette presentation, the roulette symbol TR spins, and the item that stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY determines the subsequent game state.

Which item the ball will land on is determined by the number of times the "high support mode" has been awarded ("20 times," "30 times," "40 times," "50 times," or "until next time") determined at the time of the big win lottery, and the number of times support has been awarded at that time (the value of the support count counter).The item that has been determined is then displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win a "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times, high support mode" and the support count display area W4 initially shows "20 times," and then the roulette performance begins, the upper limit is not "until next time," and there are "30 times" of support remaining, so the "+10 times" option is selected.

For example, if you win a "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times high support mode" and the support count display area W4 initially displays "30 times," and then the roulette presentation appears, the "End" option is selected because there are no support counts remaining and the upper limit is not "until next time."

For example, if a "16R guaranteed jackpot A" with "Until next time, high support mode" is won, a non-notification effect is performed (the value of the game state determination value Xj becomes "5"), and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support count display area W4, if the roulette effect is reached, the "Until next time" option is selected since the upper limit is "Until next time".

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode," the display state on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 92). Therefore, "← left hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 of the display unit 42a.

However, in this embodiment, when a small win is won during "high support mode" and small win information is stored in one of the reserve areas of the second sub-variable reserve area related to the lower start winning port 33YB, the display mode of the reserve image TB1-TB4 displayed in the second reserve display area W3b that corresponds to the reserve area storing the small win information is changed to an image with a different mode from the normal mode (see FIG. 97). In the example shown in FIG. 97, the third reserve image TB3 is changed to a "star-shaped image." In this embodiment, together with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even if the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode," if small win information is stored in the reserved area, the above display will be displayed, suggesting to the player that a small win will occur.

As mentioned above, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small win state is extremely short, so if you switch from "hitting left" to "hitting right" after the small win occurs, it will be too late, and in order to make the game ball win the variable winning device 32, you need to "hit right" in advance. In this regard, in this embodiment, the small win hint allows the player to know that a small win will occur, so they can prepare in advance and miss out on fewer small wins.

As mentioned above, when the support continuation effect (roulette effect) is performed, a special effect may be performed using the upper effect special effect unit 761 or the lower effect special effect unit 762 as an additional effect.

Here, the reel effect setting process of step SB3910 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 98 and 99.

First, in step SB6001, the game state determination value Xj is taken into consideration to determine whether the current change is the execution of a roulette effect (support continuation effect).

If the result is negative, i.e., if the roulette effect is not being executed, in step SB6002, the value of the effect status flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0," and the process ends.

The performance status flag JF is discrimination information for determining the performance status of additional performances (mainly role performances using performance role units 761 and 762).

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6001 is positive, i.e., if the current variation is a roulette effect execution time, the process proceeds to step SB6003.

In step SB6003, the value of the performance status flag JF is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the current stage is before the start of additional performance (JF = 0). If the determination is negative, i.e., if the current stage is after the start of additional performance (JF ≥ 1), the process proceeds to step SB6006.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step SB6003, i.e., if it is before the start of additional performance, the process proceeds to step SB6004.

In step SB6004, a performance determination process is performed to determine whether or not a special feature performance will be executed and the type of the special feature performance, based on the value of the special feature performance counter CB8 stored in the special feature performance counter buffer of RAM553.

The relationship between the value of the reel effect counter CB8 and whether or not a reel effect is being executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as a reel effect pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, in the roulette performance of the performance display device 42, multiple role performance pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the final display items of the roulette pattern TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Specifically, three tables are provided to correspond to three confirmed display items: "End", which indicates that the number of support times ends here; "+10 times", which indicates that the number of support times will be increased by another 10 times; and "Until next time", which indicates that the number of support times will continue until the next big win; a "End" reel performance pattern determination table; a "+10 times" reel performance pattern determination table; and a "Until next time" reel performance pattern determination table.

In addition, the rate at which various presentation patterns are selected in each table varies depending on whether it corresponds to the "end", "+10 times", or "until next time". If the number of support times continues, and if it corresponds to the "until next time", the various tables are configured so that the probability of a special feature presentation being performed, and the rate at which a development presentation pattern, which will be described later, is performed, are higher than in the "end" case.

For example, when the confirmed display item in the roulette effect is "End", the "End time feature effect pattern determination table" as shown in FIG. 100(a) is referenced. In this case, when the value of the feature effect counter CB8 is CB8=0 to 249, "no feature effect" is selected, and no feature effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the special feature counter CB8 is CB8 = 250 to 399, "Special feature with special feature" is selected, and special feature is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8 = 250 to 299, the special feature of "no development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 300 to 329, the special feature of "first development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 330 to 359, the special feature of "second development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 360 to 379, the special feature of "third development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 380 to 389, the special feature of "fourth development pattern" is executed, and when CB8 = 390 to 399, the special feature of "fifth development pattern" is executed. Details of the special feature of the first to fifth development patterns will be described later.

In addition, when the confirmed display item in the roulette effect is "Until next time", the "Until next time - feature effect pattern determination table" as shown in FIG. 100(b) is referenced. In this case, if the value of the feature effect counter CB8 is CB8 = 0 to 9, "no feature effect" is selected, and no feature effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the special feature counter CB8 is CB8 = 10 to 399, "Special feature with special feature" is selected, and special feature is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8 = 10 to 99, a special feature without development is executed, when CB8 = 100 to 199, a special feature with a "first development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 200 to 249, a special feature with a "second development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 250 to 299, a special feature with a "third development pattern" is executed, when CB8 = 300 to 349, a special feature with a "fourth development pattern" is executed, and when CB8 = 350 to 399, a special feature with a "fifth development pattern" is executed.

The specific contents of the "+10 Times Reel Performance Pattern Determination Table" that is referenced when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "+10 Times" are not shown in the figure, but a table with different contents is set up from the above-mentioned "End Time Reel Performance Pattern Determination Table" and "Until Next Time Reel Performance Pattern Determination Table."

If the "No reel effect" option is selected, the reel effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The reel effect pattern flag PF is discrimination information for discriminating the reel effect pattern.

Similarly, if a "no development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "1". If a "first development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "2". If a "second development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "3". If a "third development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "4". If a "fourth development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "5". If a "fifth development pattern" reel performance is selected, the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is set to "6".

Therefore, when the sub-control device 262 performs the effect determination process of step SB6004, it first selects a feature effect pattern determination table corresponding to a specified confirmed display item from the group of multiple feature effect pattern determination tables based on information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette effect, and determines the feature effect pattern based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a specified memory area in RAM 553.

Then, in the following step SB6005, the start request setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated.

In the start request setting process of step SB6005, the value of the performance status flag JF is set to "1", indicating that the start request period for the reel performance is in progress, and the value of the operation validity timer ST is set to a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment).

The operation validity timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation validity period of the effect button 125.

Furthermore, in this start request setting process, a display setting process is performed to perform a start request display performance on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42.

By carrying out this display setting process, in addition to the roulette effect, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays a display effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 125, such as displaying text such as "Press the button."

Now, in step SB6006, which is reached when a negative judgment is made in step SB6003, the value of the performance status flag JF is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the current period is one in which a request to start a reel performance is being made (JF = 1). If a negative judgment is made here, i.e., if the current period is not one in which a request to start a reel performance is being made (JF ≥ 2), the process moves to step SB6012.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6006 is a positive judgment, i.e., if the current period is one in which a request to start a special feature performance is being made, then in step SB6007, it is judged whether the value of the above-mentioned operation validity timer ST is "0".

If the answer is yes, i.e., if the value of the operation validity timer ST is "0", the player does not press the effect button 125 during the period in which the start of the role-playing effect is requested, and the operation validity period has elapsed, and the process proceeds to step SB6008.

In step SB6008, the value of the performance status flag JF is set to "9", which means that the reel performance will not progress any further, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6007 is negative, i.e., if the value of the operation validity timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SB6009.

In step SB6009, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into consideration to determine whether the player pressed the effect button 125 (BF=1) during the period when the start of the gimmick effect is requested (the operation valid period).

The button operation flag BF is discrimination information for determining whether the performance button 125 has been pressed during the valid operation period. If the performance button 125 has been pressed during the valid operation period, its value is set to "1", and if the performance button 125 has not been pressed, its value is maintained at "0".

If the result of step SB6009 is negative, i.e., if the effect button 125 has not been pressed, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB6009 is positive, i.e., if the effect button 125 has been pressed, the process of setting the effect pattern is performed in step SB6010.

In the presentation pattern setting process of step SB6010, the presentation status flag JF is set to a value corresponding to the presentation pattern selected in the presentation determination process of step SB6004.

Specifically, taking into consideration the value of the reel effect pattern flag PF, if "no reel effect" is selected, the value of the effect status flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, if "reel effect (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern, third development pattern, fourth development pattern, or fifth development pattern)" is selected, the value of the effect status flag JF is set to "3".

Then, in step SB6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0" and this process ends.

Now, in step SB6012, which is reached when a negative judgment is made in step SB6006, the value of the performance status flag JF is taken into consideration to judge whether the performance pattern of the additional performance is "no special effects (JF = 2)" or not.

If the result is positive, i.e., if the presentation pattern is "no special effects," notification setting processing is performed in step SB6013.

By carrying out this notification setting process, a notification effect is executed on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 to inform the player that the reel performance will not be performed, for example, by displaying text such as "Too bad it's not moving."

Then, in step SB6014, the value of the performance status flag JF is set to "9", which means that the reel performance will not progress any further, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the answer is NO in step SB6012, the process proceeds to step SB6015, where it is determined whether the value of the performance status flag JF is "3".

If the result here is positive, the presentation pattern is "with special feature presentation (JF = 3)", but it is considered that the current stage is before the start of the special feature drive presentation, and the upper special feature drive setting process is performed in step SB6016, and this process ends.

In the upper role drive setting process of step SB6016, the sub-control device 262 first reads from the ROM 552 the upper role performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper role performance, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data contained in the upper role performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

The multiple operation process data include, for example, data that specifies an operation process such as driving and controlling the swing drive mechanism 812 (swing motor 815) of the upper prop unit 761 to lower, raise, or stop the upper movable prop 811, and data that specifies an operation process such as driving and controlling the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate or stop the upper rotating body 820.

As a result, in this embodiment, when the presentation pattern is "with special feature presentation," the player presses the presentation button 125, which causes the upper movable feature 811 to first descend from the standby position (the back side of the upper edge 47a of the center frame 47) to the lower presentation position (see Figures 56 and 58).

Then, the upper movable part 811 descends to the performance position and stops so as to cover part of the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42, after which the upper rotating body 820 starts to rotate. In this embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is set to rotate at a constant speed in the clockwise direction.

At the same time, the roulette symbol TR (see Figure 96) is displayed in a reduced size on the display unit 42a and hidden behind the upper rotating body 820, making it difficult for the player to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 108, on the display unit 42a, various display objects are displayed around the roulette pattern TR along the rotation path EF of the magnifying lens unit 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 108, a plurality of star-shaped light-emitting points EG are displayed blinking along the rotation path EF of the magnifying lens unit 828. As a result, a display object (e.g., a star-shaped light-emitting point EG) located at a position through which the magnifying lens unit 828 passes is enlarged and displayed via the magnifying lens unit 828, and is visible to the player. Of course, the display object displayed here is not limited to the star-shaped light-emitting point EG exemplified in FIG. 108, and a configuration in which a different display object is displayed may also be used.

When the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, a predetermined value based on the various performance patterns (operation process data) is set for the value of a predetermined process timer. Once the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, it continues to rotate until the value of the process timer becomes "0". The process timer decrement process is performed separately in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal processing described above.

After a predetermined time has elapsed since the upper rotating body 820 entered a constant speed rotation state (after the series of rotation start operations are completed), the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "4", indicating that the role device performance has started to be executed, and sets the value of the operation validity timer ST to a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment).

At the same time, a display setting process is performed on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 to perform a development request display performance.

By carrying out this display setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned display objects, etc., the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays a display effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 125, such as by displaying text such as "Press the button."

Now, in step SB6017, which is reached when a negative judgment is made in step SB6015 above, the value of the performance state flag JF is taken into consideration to judge whether or not the current state is the initial performance state (JF = 4) after the start of the execution of the reel performance and before the performance development stage.

In this embodiment, the presentation mode in the initial presentation state after the start of the execution of the role device presentation and before the presentation development stage is the same regardless of whether the "first development pattern," "second development pattern," "third development pattern," "fourth development pattern," or "fifth development pattern" is set.

If the result is negative, i.e., if the reel effect is not in its initial state (JF≧5), the process moves to step SB6030.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6017 is positive, i.e., if the device is in the initial state of the reel performance (the upper rotating body 820 is rotating independently), then step SB6018 determines whether the value of the operation validity timer ST is "0".

If the answer is yes, i.e., if the value of the operation validity timer ST is "0", the player does not press the effect button 125 during the initial state of the role-play effect, and the operation validity period has elapsed, and the process proceeds to step SB6019.

In step SB6019, the value of the performance status flag JF is set to "9", which means that the reel performance will not progress any further, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6018 is negative, i.e., if the value of the operation validity timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SB6020.

In step SB6020, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into consideration to determine whether the player pressed the effect button 125 (BF=1) during the initial state of the gimmick effect (during the valid operation period).

If the result of step SB6020 is negative, i.e., if the performance button 125 has not been pressed, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step SB6020 is positive, i.e., if the performance button 125 has been pressed, step SB6021 determines whether the value of the role performance pattern flag PF is "1", which corresponds to a "no development pattern (no lower role performance pattern)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the presentation pattern is a "no development pattern," then no development presentation setting processing is performed in step SB6022.

When this no-development performance setting process is performed, a notification performance is executed on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 to inform the player that no development performance will be performed, for example by displaying text such as "Too bad there was no development."

Then, in step SB6023, the value of the performance status flag JF is set to "9", which means that the reel performance will not progress any further, and this process ends.

Now, if the answer is negative in step SB6021, the process proceeds to step SB6024, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "2", which corresponds to the "first development pattern (pattern without expansion stop)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "first development pattern," the first development performance setting process is performed in step SB6025, and this process is terminated.

In the first development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role object performance has been developed.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the first development performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper movable part 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable part 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) that correspond to the first development pattern, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data contained in the first advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

The same is true for the various development performance patterns described below, but the multiple operation process data include data that specifies an operation process such as driving and controlling the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate and stop the upper rotating body 820, data that specifies an operation process such as driving and controlling the up/down drive mechanism 852 (up/down drive motor 860) of the lower performance prop unit 762 to raise, lower and stop the lower movable prop 851, and data that specifies an operation process such as driving and controlling the lower rotating body drive motors 855A, 855B to rotate and stop the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 executes the operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the first development pattern based on the first development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

The same applies to the various development performance patterns described below, but the subtraction process of the process timer is performed separately in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal processing described above. Based on the contents of the various setting processes performed in this process, control signals are output sequentially to the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 in the next external output process (step 3912), and various controls related to the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 are performed. Then, when the operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the various development performance patterns is started, the operation control will continue until the value of the process timer becomes "0".

In this configuration, when the first development performance pattern is executed in this embodiment (the same applies when the various development performance patterns described below are executed), first, the rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 is controlled to be reduced to an extent that the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can be seen. At the same time, a setting process is performed to execute output processing of a predetermined sound (for example, a sound shouting "big or small") from the speaker SP as a development notification performance. Based on this setting process, the output control process of the speaker SP is performed by the sound setting process of the above step SB3909.

Next, the lower movable part 851 is raised from its standby position (see FIG. 56) on the back side of the lower edge 47b of the center frame 47 while the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are rotated.

The lower left rotating body 856A is configured to rotate at a constant speed in a clockwise direction, and the lower right rotating body 856B is configured to rotate at a constant speed in a counterclockwise direction. The rotation speeds of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are set to be relatively slow so that the player can see the characters "SMALL" and "BIG" written in each of the information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb.

After that, when the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B reach a predetermined performance position in front of the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42, only the upward movement of the lower movable part 851 is stopped while maintaining the rotation of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B. As a result, the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are each rotating at a position behind the rotation path of the movable piece 825 of the rotating upper rotating body 820 (see Figure 58, etc.).

In this state, while the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A, 856B each rotate, the positional relationship between the upper rotor 820 and the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B changes between a state in which at least a portion of the upper rotor 820 does not overlap with at least a portion of the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B, and a state in which at least a portion of the upper rotor 820 overlaps with at least a portion of the lower left rotor 856A or the lower right rotor 856B.

Then, in the first development performance pattern, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the stopping position of the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 does not match the stopping position of either the first information section 856Aa (strong, SMALL) or the second information section 856Ab (weak, SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A, and does not match the stopping position of either the first information section 856Ba (strong, BIG) or the second information section 856Bb (weak, BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as the "stopped state without magnification display"), and the performance ends.

However, the combination of stopping modes of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B that results in a "stopped state without enlarged display" is not limited to the combination exemplified in FIG. 109, and the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to stop in a different combination. In this case, the combination pattern of these stopping modes may be determined based on the value of the above-mentioned role performance counter CB8.

Now, if the answer is negative in step SB6024, the process proceeds to step SB6026, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "3", which corresponds to the "second development pattern (weak/small expansion stop pattern)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "second development pattern," the second development performance setting process is performed in step SB6027, and this process is terminated.

In the second development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role object performance has been developed.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the second development performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper movable part 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable part 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) that correspond to the second development pattern, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data contained in the second advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 executes the operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the second development pattern based on the second development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

In this configuration, when the second development operation pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same operation control as when the first development performance pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 110, the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the stopping position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stopping position of the second information description section 856Ab (weak, SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A finally coincide with each other, that is, the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stopping position EA4 and the second information description section 856Ab (weak, SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A stops at the first stopping position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as the "weak, SMALL expansion stopping state"). The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop, completing the performance.

However, the stopping mode of the right-lower rotating body 856B in the "weak/small expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 110, and the right-lower rotating body 856B may be configured to stop in a different mode. In this case, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the reel performance counter CB8.

Now, if the answer is negative in step SB6026, the process proceeds to step SB6028, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "4", which corresponds to the "third development pattern (strong/small expansion stop pattern)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "third development pattern," the third development performance setting process is performed in step SB6029, and this process is terminated.

In the third development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role object performance has been developed.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the third development performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper movable part 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable part 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) that correspond to the third development pattern, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data included in the third advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 will execute operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the third development pattern based on the third development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

In this configuration, when the third development operation pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same operation control as when the first development performance pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 111, the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the stopping position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stopping position of the first information description section 856Aa (strong, SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A finally coincide with each other, that is, the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stopping position EA4 and the first information description section 856Aa (strong, SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A stops at the first stopping position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as the "strong, SMALL expansion stopping state"). The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop, completing the performance.

However, the stopping manner of the right-bottom rotating body 856B in the "Strong/SMALL expansion stopped state" is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 111, and the right-bottom rotating body 856B may be configured to stop in a manner different from this. In this case, this stopping manner may be determined based on the value of the above-mentioned reel performance counter CB8.

Now, if the result of step SB6028 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB6030, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "5", which corresponds to the "fourth development pattern (weak/BIG expansion stop pattern)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "fourth development pattern," the fourth development performance setting process is performed in step SB6031, and this process is terminated.

In the fourth development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role device performance has been developed.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the fourth development performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper movable part 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable part 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) that correspond to the fourth development pattern, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data included in the fourth advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 will execute operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the fourth development pattern based on the fourth development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

In this configuration, when the fourth development operation pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same operation control as when the first development performance pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 112, the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the stopping position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stopping position of the second information description section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the right lower rotating body 856B finally coincide with each other, that is, the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stopping position EA1 and the second information description section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the right lower rotating body 856B stops at the first stopping position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as the "weak/BIG expansion stopping state"). The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop, completing the performance.

However, the stopping mode of the lower left rotating body 856A when the "Weak/BIG expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 112, and the lower left rotating body 856A may be configured to stop in a different mode. In this case, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the reel effect counter CB8.

Now, if the result of step SB6030 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB6032, where it is determined whether the value of the reel performance pattern flag PF is "6", which corresponds to the "5th development pattern (strong/BIG expansion stop pattern)".

If the result here is positive, i.e., if the development performance pattern is the "fifth development pattern," the fifth development performance setting process is performed in step SB6033, and this process is terminated.

In the fifth development performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "7", which indicates that the role object performance has been developed.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the fifth development performance control data that specifies the operation progress process of the upper movable part 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable part 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) that correspond to the fifth development pattern, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out multiple operation process data included in the fifth advanced performance control data in accordance with the time table, sets the operation time specified by the operation process data in a specified process timer, and executes the process corresponding to the operation process data while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 will execute operation control of the upper movable part 811 and the lower movable part 851 corresponding to the fifth development pattern based on the fifth development performance control data, while taking into consideration the rotational position information (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, as well as the value of the process timer.

In this configuration, when the fifth development operation pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same operation control as when the first development performance pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 113, the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the stopping position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stopping position of the first information description section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the right lower rotating body 856B finally coincide with each other, that is, the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stopping position EA1 and the first information description section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the right lower rotating body 856B stops at the first stopping position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as the "Strong/BIG expansion stopping state"). The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B stop, completing the performance.

However, the stopping mode of the lower left rotating body 856A when the "Strong/BIG expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 113, and the lower left rotating body 856A may be configured to stop in a different mode. In this case, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the reel effect counter CB8.

Now, in step SB6035, which is reached when a negative judgment is made in step SB6017, the value of the performance status flag JF is taken into consideration to judge whether or not the gimmick performance is currently in a developing state (JF = 5). If a negative judgment is made here, this process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6035 is positive, i.e., if the gimmick performance is in the development state (upper rotating body 820 and left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in operation), the process proceeds to step SB6036.

In step SB6036, it is determined whether the value of the process timer is "0". If the determination is negative, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step SB6036 is positive, i.e., if it is time for the reel performance to end, the end setting process is performed in step SB6037, and this process ends.

In the end setting process of step SB6037, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance status flag JF to "9", which means that the reel performance will not progress any further.

Next, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the reel performance end control data that specifies the end process of the reel performance, and stores this in a specified area of the RAM 553.

Based on this, the upper rotating body 820 (drive motor 821 for the upper rotating body) is stopped, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (drive motors 855A, 855B for the lower rotating bodies) are stopped, the operation setting process is performed to raise the upper movable role piece 811 to the standby position, and the operation setting process is performed to lower the lower movable role piece 851 to the standby position, and the role piece performance is completed.

As described above in detail, according to this embodiment, the second rotating body, which is movable in a predetermined region and rotatable in a predetermined manner, is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating body, and the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a front view of the predetermined region can be changed between a first positional relationship in which at least a part of the first rotating body does not overlap with at least a part of the second rotating body, and a second positional relationship in which at least a part of the first rotating body overlaps with at least a part of the second rotating body. In the first positional relationship, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating body, and in the second positional relationship, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating body that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating body.

In this way, by having the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body and the second rotating body) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap and move apart, it is possible to create a more dynamic game presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visibility of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be changed without controlling the light-emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating bodies. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to the above-described embodiments in any combination of all or part. It is also possible to combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments in any combination.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a first type of gaming machine in which, when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on whether a ball enters the starting winning holes 33YA and 33YB, a jackpot state occurs in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes.

It is not limited to this, and may be implemented as other types of pachinko machines in which a predetermined gaming value is awarded. The gaming value may include, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) awarded during a jackpot, and gaming modes such as a high probability mode awarded after the jackpot ends. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball machines.

For example, the second type of gaming machine may be provided with a variable winning device that opens when a small jackpot is won in a winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering a specified starting winning section, and the game ball that entered the variable winning device enters a specified special winning section (V winning port) to generate a jackpot state. Here, the game machine may be configured so that, when a game ball enters the starting winning section, no specified lottery process is performed (or lottery process with a 100% winning probability may be performed), and the variable winning device opens based on the ball entering the starting winning section, and the game ball that entered the variable winning device enters the V winning port or the like to generate a jackpot state.

It may also be implemented as a third type of gaming machine (for example, a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine) that combines the functions of the first type of gaming machine and the second type of gaming machine.

The probability of winning in various lotteries related to pachinko machines (such as software lottery processing or mechanical lotteries) is set appropriately for each model, and any value can be used. It goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate, as described below.

It may also be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which the gaming balls are circulated within the gaming machine and not directly paid out to the player, i.e. a so-called sealed-in type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and may have a different configuration.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) occur, or a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) occur, are set, but the present invention is not limited to these, and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may also be configured to occur.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that can only generate one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot), rather than a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states.

(c) The configuration of the game mode granted after the end of the jackpot state (such as the granting period and configuration content) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "high support mode" is always granted after the end of a jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "high support mode" may not be granted depending on the type of jackpot.

It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the lottery mode ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode") is not switched, and only the winning support mode ("high support mode" or "low support mode") is switched. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, points equivalent to the prize balls won by the player are granted to a storage medium such as a magnetic card. A specific game mode such as the high support mode or high probability mode may be a special game state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above embodiment is constructed based on a transparent plate, which is a translucent member, but is not limited thereto, and may be constructed from an opaque member such as wood that does not have translucency.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C equipped with multiple LEDs are arranged at the rear of a specific area of the play area, making it possible to perform various light-emitting effects. However, this is not limited to the above, and other light-emitting means such as lamps or liquid crystal displays may be arranged at the rear of the play board 30 in place of or in addition to the LED board 48A, etc.

(d-2) Instead of or in addition to the above embodiment, light emitting means such as lamps or LEDs may be arranged at least at one of the top, bottom, left and right end faces of the game board 30 so as to face the end face, and the light emitted from the light emitting means may be incident on the game board 30, and part of the light may be emitted from a predetermined position on the front part of the game board 30 and become visible to the player. In other words, the game board 30 may be configured to function as a light emitting member or a light guiding member. Of course, the game board 30 may be configured so that part of the light incident from a first position on the front part (or rear part) of the game board 30 as viewed from the front is emitted from a second position on the front part of the game board 30 as viewed from the front, and becomes visible to the player.

(d-3) Instead of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display device having a display screen that is large enough to cover substantially the entire back side of the play area or substantially the entire back side of the play board 30 may be provided at the rear of the play board 30.

In addition, the game board 30 may be configured so that it covers the front side of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the performance display device 42. In this case, a nail or the like may be placed on the front part of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the performance display device 42, to make this area into an area through which the game balls can flow down. Of course, this area may also be made into an area through which the game balls cannot flow down.

(e) The configuration of the first rotating means is not limited to the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating body in the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means (first rotating body), is configured to perform a rotating operation on the front side of the display unit (liquid crystal display unit) 42a of the performance display device 42, which is the performance area (predetermined area), but the area in which the first rotating means performs a rotating operation is not limited to this.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotating operation in the front region of the center frame 47. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotating means is fixed, or a configuration may be adopted in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotating means is displaceable.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotation means performs a rotational operation in the internal area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32. Here, the rotation axis of the first rotation means may be fixed, or the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means may be displaceable.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotating operation in the front area (play area) of the game board 30. Here, the rotation axis of the first rotating means may be fixed, or the position of the rotation axis of the first rotating means may be displaceable.

(e-2) The movement mechanism of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the support arm 814 is swung and displaced, so that the upper rotating body 820 (upper movable role 811) is displaced between a standby position behind the upper edge portion 47a of the center frame 47 and a performance position in front of the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42.

In addition to this, for example, the position of the upper rotating body 820 (upper movable part 811) may be configured to move linearly between the standby position and the performance position, such as in the vertical or horizontal directions, or may be configured to move between the standby position and the performance position by combining multiple movements, such as linear and curvilinear movements. Of course, the first rotating means may be configured to be rotatably supported (fixed) at a predetermined position without moving.

(e-3) The shape of the first rotating means (first rotating body) and the configuration related to the light-transmitting portion are not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is configured to have six movable pieces 825 resembling petals as light-transmitting portions, but the number, arrangement, shape, etc. of the light-transmitting portions are not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted. A configuration with only one light-transmitting portion may also be used.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the movable piece 825, which is the light-transmitting part, slides and displaces in the radial direction of the upper rotating body 820, causing the upper rotating body 820 to expand or contract in diameter, but this is not limiting, and the light-transmitting part may not be displaced in the radial direction of the first rotating means, that is, the size of the first rotating means may not change. For example, the first rotating means may be a disk body that is circular when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the general part of each movable piece 825 is made of a semi-transparent material that makes it difficult to identify the display object displayed on the display unit 42a, but this is not limited thereto, and the movable piece 825 may be made of a transparent material that allows the display object displayed on the display unit 42a to be identified.

Moveable piece 825 does not need to be made of a light-transmitting material, and movable piece 825 may be made of a light-shielding material. In such a case, each specific movable piece 825 may be configured to have a through hole or a cutout portion that is light-transmitting (visible). Also, a first rotating means may be used in which a predetermined number of through holes or the like that become light-transmitting portions are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of a disk body that is circular when viewed from the front. In other words, the first rotating means may have portions with different light transmittances.

(e-4) In the above embodiment, a magnifying lens portion 828 is formed in one of the six movable pieces 825 (specific movable piece 825A) as an acting portion that acts on the acted portions (information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means (second rotating body).

This is not a limitation, and the configuration may omit the magnifying lens unit 828. Also, instead of or in addition to the magnifying lens unit 828, a reduction lens unit may be provided as the acting unit. By using this, for example, a miss effect may be performed in which the acted upon parts (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are displayed in a reduced size.

(e-5) The rotation drive source of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is configured to rotate using the upper rotating body drive motor 821 as a drive source, but this is not limiting, and other actuators such as solenoids may be used as the rotation drive source.

A configuration may also be adopted in which the first rotation means rotates using game balls that are shot into the play area. For example, a rotation drive member such as a waterwheel may be placed inside the outlet 36, and a drive transmission mechanism may be placed that transmits the force of the rotation drive member to the first rotation means, and the first rotation means may be rotationally driven using out balls that are frequently discharged from the outlet 36. The first rotation means may also rotate using game balls that flow down a predetermined position in the play area. In short, any configuration is acceptable as long as the first rotation means can rotate using game balls that are launched into the play area by the launching means.

(f) The configuration of the second rotating means is not limited to the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B as the second rotating body in the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, plate-shaped lower rotors 856A, 856B that are generally rectangular when viewed from the front are used as the second rotation means (second rotor), but the number and shape of the second rotation means and the configuration related to the information writing section are not limited to those in the above embodiment.

For example, either the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B may be omitted, and a configuration having only one second rotating means may be provided. Also, a configuration having three or more second rotating means may be provided.

The second rotation means may be, for example, a rotating body that is circular when viewed from the front and can rotate around its axial direction, and the rotating body may be provided with one or three or more information-writing sections.

(f-2) The second rotating means may be a rotating body of a different shape, such as a sphere.

For example, as shown in FIG. 114, a movable part for the second rotating means (second rotating body) may be adopted, which includes a predetermined support section 880 that is movable by a moving drive means (not shown), a storage section 881 provided at the upper end of the support section 880, a spherical member 882 as the spherical second rotating means (spherical body) stored in the storage section 881, and a rotation drive means consisting of a plurality of actuators (not shown) for controlling the attitude, orientation, etc. of the spherical member 882.

In the movable part illustrated in FIG. 114, one of the information sections 884 provided at multiple locations (e.g., four locations) on the surface of the ball member 882 can be seen through an opening 883 formed in the front portion of the container 881. Such information section 884 may contain text information such as "hit" or "miss."

Here, the spherical member 882 may be made of a translucent material. Then, light emitted from a predetermined light-emitting means arranged behind the storage unit 881 may enter the spherical member 882 through a rear opening (not shown) of the storage unit 881 and become visible to the player through the opening 883.

Alternatively, the ball member 882 may be made of a metal material, or the surface of the ball member 882 may be plated or the like. Then, light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means (including light entering from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 101) may be irradiated onto the ball member 882 from the front through the opening portion 883, and the light reflected here may be visible to the player.

(f-3) In the above embodiment, the lower rotors 856A, 856B are configured to be rotatable with the axial direction being the front-to-rear direction, but the axial direction of the second rotating means is not limited to this.

For example, the ball member 882 as the second rotating means illustrated in FIG. 114 may be configured to rotate with the rotation axis direction being vertical, horizontal, or diagonal. Furthermore, the rotation axis direction (attitude) of the second rotating means may be configured to be changeable. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 114, the eight corners of the storage section 881 may be provided with ball receiving members (not shown) capable of supporting the ball member 882, and by controlling the ball receiving members, the three-dimensional attitude of the ball member 882 may be controlled via the ball receiving members.

(f-4) In the above embodiment, the information display sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are made of a material having translucency and are configured to transmit light emitted from the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 located at the rear with a predetermined transmittance.

In addition, at least the information writing portion 856Aa, etc. (which may be the entire lower rotor 856A, 856B) may be made of an opaque material that does not have light-transmitting properties (e.g., a metal material). Furthermore, the information writing portion 856Aa, etc. may be polished or plated to become a reflective portion that can reflect light.

The light emitted from a specified light emitting means (including light entering from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 101) may be irradiated from the front onto the information writing portion 856Aa, etc., via the movable piece 825 of the upper rotating body 820.

Furthermore, the information written in the information writing section 856Aa, etc. may be made visible to the player through the magnifying lens section 828.

In addition, the information writing section 856Aa etc. may be configured to be curved in a spherical shape so that it is convex outward. With such a configuration, not only the light incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 but also the light irradiated from multiple directions, such as the side of the game board 30, can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

(f-5) The movement mechanism of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, a vertical drive mechanism 852 is provided to move the lower movable part 851 up and down, and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are configured to move vertically between a standby position on the back side of the lower edge portion 47b of the center frame 47 and a performance position on the front side of the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42.

Without being limited to this, for example, the position of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable part 851) may be configured to be movable not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction, front-rear direction, etc.

In addition, in a configuration that allows movement in the forward and backward directions, for example, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable role 851) may be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30. Furthermore, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable role 851) may be configured to be movable in the up-down or left-right directions in the rear area of the game board 30. In this case, the configuration may include a guide member as a rear guide means that can guide the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B that have moved to the rear area of the game board 30 to a predetermined position.

Furthermore, the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B may be configured to be independently movable and to be able to move relative to each other. Of course, each may be configured to be able to move individually in the up-down direction, left-right direction, front-back direction, etc. Also, each may be configured to be able to move individually from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30, or each may be configured to be able to move individually in the rear area of the game board 30.

The configuration may also be such that the movement path, movement speed, rotation speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are set in multiple ways (multiple patterns), and the movement path, movement speed, rotation speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B change appropriately. In addition, the configuration may also be provided with a path changing means capable of executing a process to change the path along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move. For example, a predetermined lottery is held to change the movement path, and the movement path of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is determined based on the results of this lottery.

(f-6) The rotation drive source of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are configured to rotate using the lower rotating body drive motors 855A, 855B as the drive source, but this is not limiting, and other actuators such as solenoids may be used as the rotation drive source.

Also, a specific movable member that can contact the lower rotors 856A, 856B and cause a change in the movement of the lower rotors 856A, 856B may be provided, and the lower rotors 856A, 856B may be moved by the force received from the movable member.

For example, the lower rotors 856A, 856B may be configured to start moving or rotating by colliding a specific movable member (such as a hammer-type device) with the lower rotors 856A, 856B, which are in a stopped state.

(f-7) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, are configured to perform a rotating operation on the front side of the display unit (liquid crystal display unit) 42a of the performance display device 42, which is the performance area (predetermined area). However, as with the first rotating means, the area in which the second rotating means performs a rotating operation is not limited to this.

For example, the second rotation means may be configured to be rotatable and movable in the front area of the center frame 47, in the internal areas of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32, or in the front area (play area) of the game board 30. Also, the second rotation means may be configured to perform a rotational operation in the rear area of the game board 30.

(g) The configuration related to the rotating body performance, such as the time when the rotating body performance using the first rotating means and the second rotating means (upper rotating body 820 and lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) is performed, is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is performed as an additional effect when a support continuation effect (roulette effect) is performed. However, this is not limited to the above, and the rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be performed in a different situation, such as an additional effect of a reach effect.

For example, the no-development pattern (spinning effect of only the upper rotating body 820 without any lower role effects) may be used for a one-shot announcement effect to notify the player that they have won the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the support mode will continue after the end of the jackpot (the number of support rounds), but the present invention is not limited to this. At the same time as the jackpot lottery or during the jackpot lottery, a type lottery is held to determine the type of jackpot state (number of rounds) based on the ball entering a specified ball entry means, and a rotating body effect such as the various development effect patterns described above (effects using upper rotating body 820 and lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) may be performed as an effect to inform the user of the result of the lottery.

In addition, when performing a rotating body effect during or at the end of a jackpot state, for example, if the lottery results reserved when the ball enters a predetermined ball entry means during a jackpot state include a jackpot winning result (when a so-called reserved streak occurs), the first information section 856Aa's "Strong/SMALL" (or the first information section 856Ba's "Strong/BIG") of both information sections 856Aa, 856Ab (or the information sections 856Ba, 856Bb) of the lower left rotating body 856A may be configured to be displayed as enlarged and stopped (or may be configured to be easily displayed as enlarged and stopped) or may be configured to be easily displayed as enlarged and stopped. On the other hand, if the reserved lottery results do not include a jackpot winning result (when a so-called reserved streak does not occur), the second information section 856Ab's "Weak/SMALL" (or the second information section 856Bb's "Weak/BIG") may be configured to be displayed as enlarged and stopped (or may be configured to be easily displayed as enlarged and stopped).

(g-3) In the above embodiment, the rate at which the special effects and further development effects (rotating body effects using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) are performed is changed according to the expected degree that the high support mode will continue to be granted (the expected degree that game value will be granted).

In addition to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained through a predetermined lottery process (a result that indicates that a game value such as a big win, a small win, a high probability mode, or a high support mode is awarded), the configuration may be such that the rate at which a special effect or even an advanced effect (a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) is performed is higher than when a winning result is not obtained.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the role effect or its developed effect (rotating body effect using upper rotating body 820 and lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) is performed as a confirmed effect only when the high support mode continues to be awarded (when game value is awarded), or only when a winning result is obtained through a predetermined lottery process (a result indicating that game value such as a big win, small win, high probability mode, or high support mode will be awarded).

(h) In the above embodiment, the acting portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, acts on the acted portions (information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means. However, the configuration in which the first rotating means and the second rotating means act on each other is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

(h-1) For example, the lower rotors 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, may act on the acted portion of the upper rotor 820, which is the first rotating means. As a specific configuration, for example, in the upper rotor 820, a "specific information section (e.g., characters such as "win")" may be provided as the acted portion instead of the "magnifying lens section 828", and in the lower left rotor 856A, a "reducing lens section" may be provided as the first acting portion instead of the "first information section 856Aa", and a "magnifying lens section" may be provided as the second acting portion instead of the "second information section 856Ab". In this configuration, the lower left rotor 856A may be configured to rotate and stop at a position forward of the upper rotor 820, and when the upper rotor 820 and the lower left rotor 856A are stopped, the specific information section (characters such as "win") may be enlarged by the "magnifying lens section" or reduced by the "reducing lens section".

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the probability of a predetermined advantageous state being achieved that is advantageous to the player is higher when the display acts in the second manner (when the display is enlarged by the "magnifying lens unit") than when the display acts in the first manner (when the display is reduced by the "reducing lens unit"). Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the probability of a second advantageous state being achieved that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state is higher when the display acts in the second manner than when the display acts in the first manner.

(h-2) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, are configured to maintain a distance from each other even when they are in close proximity.

In addition to this, for example, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, may be configured to be in close proximity and capable of contacting each other.

For example, when the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A, 856B are stopped, the peripheral portion of the action portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotor 820 may be configured to come into contact with the peripheral portion of the information recording portion 856Aa, etc. of the lower rotors 856A, 856B. This makes it less likely that a gap will occur between the peripheral portion of the information recording portion 856Aa, etc. of the lower rotors 856A, 856B and the peripheral portion of the action portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotor 820. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as light leaking from the gap, making the information recording portion 856Aa, etc. difficult to see due to the leaked light, or reducing the brightness of the information recording portion 856Aa, etc.

(i) In the above embodiment, a performance button 125 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operating means for the performance. The configuration of the operating means and the performance using this are not limited to the above embodiment.

(i-1) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 125, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotation means, start to operate, and a development effect (a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) is performed. This is not limited to this, and the development effect may be started in accordance with a predetermined effect program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(i-2) The operating mode of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to change depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

For example, a slide lever may be provided as a first operating unit capable of adjusting the amount of left-right movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, and a performance button 125 may be provided as a second operating unit capable of determining the start and stop timing of the upward movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, so that the coordinate position at which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B perform their rotational movement may be adjusted two-dimensionally, up, down, left, and right.

In addition, in the stage where the above-mentioned development performance is performed, a display performance may be performed in which, in conjunction with the rising action of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, a character is displayed on the display unit 42a, and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are pushed downward to prevent the development performance from being executed. In response to this, a performance may be performed in which the player repeatedly taps the performance button 125 to stop the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B from being pushed downward.

(i-3) The lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured with a return restriction means (e.g., a ratchet mechanism) that can restrict the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B guided into the performance area from returning outside the specified area (to the standby position). This allows the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B to operate more stably in the performance area.

(j) In the above embodiment, various performances related to the rotating body performances are performed by controlling the operation (motor control, etc.) of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in accordance with a predetermined performance program.

In addition to this, a detection means may be provided that can detect the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B passing through a specified position in the performance area (specified area), and various performances related to the rotating body performance may be executed based on the detection of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B by the detection means.

For example, in the case where the player is able to determine the coordinate positions at which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B rotate in two dimensions (up, down, left, right) as described above, the coordinate positions of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B determined by the player may be identified by multiple detection means, and the rotational mode of the upper rotating body 820 and the stopping position of the magnifying lens section 828 may be changed according to the identified coordinate positions.

The detection means can be of any type as long as it is capable of detecting the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B. However, taking into consideration that the performance area is an area visible to the player, it is preferable to use a type of detection means, such as a distance measuring sensor, that can detect the presence or absence of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B without contact.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, there is a risk that static electricity may be charged in rotors such as the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B due to friction during rotation. In view of this, the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B may be configured with an earth structure that allows static electricity to escape.

For example, the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be provided with conductive parts having electrical conductivity, and a specified conductive member having electrical conductivity may be provided outside the performance area (specified area) such as the center frame 47, and when the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in a standby state, the conductive parts of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may come into contact with the conductive member such as the center frame 47. By electrically connecting the conductive member such as the center frame 47 to a specified earth terminal (not shown), static electricity charged to the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B can be removed.

Here, the lower rotors 856A and 856B, which have a relatively simple structure, may be configured to be made at least in part or entirely from a conductive metal material. Alternatively or in addition to this, the surfaces of the lower rotors 856A and 856B may be plated or otherwise processed.

In addition, a long conductive member made of a conductive material may be arranged along part of the path along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move from a predetermined waiting position to the performance area (predetermined area).

Furthermore, at least the conductive portion of the lower rotors 856A and 856B that comes into contact with the conductive member may be configured to be curved in a spherical shape so that it is convex outward. In other words, it may be configured with a semi-spherical convex conductive portion.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional Issue VA. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and blinks in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, so the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest.

Means VA1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line of sight of the player) as an axial direction and to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a light transmitting part that can transmit light;
A light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
A relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
In the first positional relationship,
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

The above-mentioned "predetermined trigger" may be, for example, "a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means provided within the game area" (the same applies to the various means described below).

In addition, granting "game value" includes, for example, paying out game media such as prize balls, and granting a special game state (such as a winning state or game mode) that is advantageous to the player (the same applies to the various means described below).

In addition, the configuration in which the second rotating means is "rotatable in a predetermined manner" includes, for example, a configuration in which the second rotating means is rotatable around the front-to-rear direction as an axial direction, similar to the first rotating means (this also applies to the various means described below). Of course, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable in a different manner (this also applies to the various means described below). For example, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable around the left-to-right direction as an axial direction.

In addition, a configuration in which "the second rotating means is movable relative to the first rotating means" means a configuration in which, for example, when viewed from the front of a specified area in the front-to-back direction (when viewed from the front of the game board), the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the second rotating means is movable in the up-down direction, left-to-right direction, etc., with the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the first rotating means as a reference (the same applies to the various means described below). Therefore, it does not include a configuration in which the positional relationship between the center positions of the first rotating means and the second rotating means does not change when viewed from the front of a specified area, in other words, a configuration in which the centers of the two rotating means are arranged so that they are aligned on the same axis in the front-to-back direction, the positional relationship in the front view is fixed, and the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means changes only in the circumferential direction.

By using the above-mentioned means VA1, the two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes can overlap and separate, making it possible to produce a more dynamic game presentation.

In particular, with this means, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

One type of presentation device that uses a rotating means to create a game presentation is a versawriter, which is equipped with multiple light-emitting means and displays letters, figures, and the like as afterimages by flashing the light-emitting means in a predetermined pattern while rotating the rotating means.

However, in configurations where multiple light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means, such as a versa writer, the rotating means becomes larger and heavier, which may reduce the operability of the rotating means.

Furthermore, when multiple light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means that is driven to rotate, the signal lines and power lines connecting the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means to a control device installed outside the rotating means must usually be electrically connected via slip rings or the like, which can complicate the wiring and control.

As a result, in such devices, the operability of the rotation means is low, and the performance of the rotation means' movements tends to be monotonous.

In contrast, with this method, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed by changing the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means, so that it is possible to prevent the rotating means from becoming larger and heavier without mounting a light emitting means on the rotating means, and to improve the operability of each rotating means.

If a single rotating means is used and the diameter of the rotating means is increased in order to increase the speed at which the light visibility state is switched (the speed of the outer periphery of the rotating means), there is a risk that the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. will increase due to the effects of inertia, etc.

In contrast, according to the present invention, by overlapping two rotating means, it is possible to increase the speed at which the light visibility state can be switched without increasing the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the rotating means, motor, etc.

Means VA2. The first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close proximity state),
A gaming machine described in means VA1, characterized in that it is configured to increase the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state that is advantageous to the player occurs.

By using the above-mentioned means VA2, it is possible to produce a game presentation in which the probability of achieving a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the difference in the positional relationship (proximity state) between the two rotation means.

As a result, the player will be more likely to pay close attention to the operation of the second rotation means with anticipation, which will increase the player's interest.

Means VA3. A first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state advantageous to a player more advantageous than the first advantageous state are configured to be generated;
than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close proximity state),
A gaming machine described in means VA1, characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of the second advantageous state being reached is higher than the probability of the first advantageous state being reached.

The above-mentioned means VA3 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means VA2.

Means VA4. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, compared with when the condition is not satisfied,
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA3, characterized in that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured to increase the proportion (frequency) of being in the second positional relationship (close proximity state).

According to the above-mentioned means VA4, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process), the first rotation means and the second rotation means are more likely to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a winning result is not obtained by the predetermined lottery process).

In other words, the ratio at which the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship changes depending on the game situation. As a result, the game becomes more interesting and the player's interest is enhanced.

Means VA5. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be relatively movable with each other;
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA4, characterized in that the multiple second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be individually close to each other).

According to the above-mentioned means VA5, by providing a plurality of second rotation means that are movable relative to each other and being configured so that these can act individually on the first rotation means, it is possible to further diversify the game presentation. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

Here, for example, a specific second rotation means among the multiple second rotation means may be configured to be able to act on the other second rotation means. This allows for further diversification of game presentations.

Means VA6. The first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light transmitting portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means at equal intervals (for example, at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis),
A light emission control means capable of controlling the light emission means,
A gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA5, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emission means.

According to the above-mentioned means VA6, by adjusting (changing) the rotation period of the first rotating means and the blinking period of the light emitting means, it is possible to perform a rotating means presentation that utilizes a stroboscopic phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) or the like, and it is possible to change the apparent operating mode of the rotating means (translucent portion). As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and increase the interest of the player.

Here, "blinking control" refers to control in which the light-emitting means periodically repeats an on state and an off state.

For example, if blinking control is executed such that the blinking period of the light-emitting means is shorter than the light-transmitting section movement period (the period during which the light-transmitting sections move one formation pitch interval) during which the N light-transmitting sections move the distance of the specified interval, the light-transmitting section that is viewed by the player when the light-emitting means lights up at a specified timing will be viewed at a position closer to the player that has not yet reached the distance of one formation pitch interval when the light-emitting means next lights up.

This configuration can create a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating means (translucent portion) appears to be rotating in the opposite direction to its actual direction. This can create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating means, which is rotating in the forward direction, suddenly reverses direction.

In addition, there are mechanical limitations to the control of the rotation drive of the rotating means using a motor, etc. For this reason, depending on the operating mode, the operation may appear slow, which may reduce the interest of the player.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control to suddenly reverse the direction of rotation of a rotating means (motor) that is rotating in a forward direction without a deceleration period due to the effects of inertia, etc. In addition, if the direction of rotation of the rotating means (motor) is suddenly reversed, the load on the rotating means and motor, etc. may become significantly large. This may result in a decrease in durability, such as a rattle occurring in the assembled state of the rotating means and motor.

In contrast, with the above configuration, it is possible to produce an effect in which, for example, a rotating means rotating in the forward direction suddenly reverses direction without increasing the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and increase the interest of the player.

Means VA7. A gaming machine described in any one of means VA1 to VA6, characterized in that the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a specified area is at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means.

If the diameter of the second rotating means moving within the specified area is relatively large, the load on the drive mechanism, etc., may increase due to the influence of inertia, and it may become difficult to control the movement of the second rotating means.

In this regard, the above-mentioned means VA7 can improve braking performance and suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means VA8. The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA7, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VA8 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, similar to means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may have an information-inscribed portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VA9. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VA1 to VA8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VA9 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC2, it may be configured such that "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VA10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means for detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VA1 to VA9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

Measure VA10 provides the same effect as measure VD1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA10, similar to means VD2, "a light-emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to means VD3, "the light-emitting means may be provided with a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changeable as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VD3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA10, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VA11. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

Measure VA11 provides the same effect as measure VE1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA11, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VE5.

Means VA12. One of the first and second rotating means has at least one acted portion that is acted on by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA11, characterized in that when the other rotation means acts on the acted upon portion of one of the rotation means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Measure VA12 provides the same effect as measure VF1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA12, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA12, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA12, similarly to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA12, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA12, similar to means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can contact the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VF6.

Means VA13. The game board is made of a translucent material, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VA1 to VA12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

Measure VA13 provides the same effect as measure VG1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA13, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional problem VB. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A). For example, some create dramatic effects by turning on or blinking the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means while the rotating means is rotating.

Alternatively, for example, the rotating means and the light emitting means may be provided separately, and the rotating means may be rotated in front of the light emitting means to produce various game effects.

However, under this configuration, if at least a part of the rotating means is made of a light-blocking material that does not transmit light, the design surface on the front side of that part may appear dark to the player's eyes, making it difficult to see the design surface.

As a result, the design of the rotation means may be compromised, which may reduce the interest of players.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VB1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with a front-rear direction (the line of sight of a player) as an axial direction and to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, the first rotating means having a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (front view of a game board) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) is configured to be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

According to the above-mentioned means VB1, the two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes can overlap and separate, making it possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation.

Furthermore, according to this means, in the second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion of the first rotating means and at least a portion of the second rotating means overlap, light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) is irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

As a result, even if at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a light-blocking material that does not transmit light, the front design surface of that portion will appear dark to the player's eyes, making it difficult to see the design surface, and other problems will be less likely to occur.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in design quality and ultimately increase the interest of players.

Means VB2. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
The gaming machine described in means VB1 is characterized in that it is configured so that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means.

According to the above-mentioned means VB2, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB2, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player being achieved is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB2, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB2, similarly to means VA4, "when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the proportion (frequency) at which the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) may be increased compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB2, similarly to means VA5, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are able to approach each other individually)" may be configured. This provides the same effect as means VA5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB2, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting sections arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB2, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VB3. The gaming machine described in means VB1 or VB2, characterized in that the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that is capable of transmitting light.

When a light-transmitting member is disposed between the light-emitting means and the first rotating means, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting means decreases as the light passes through the light-transmitting member.

For example, in a configuration in which a translucent member such as a cover member is arranged on the front side of an LED or other light-emitting means, such as an illumination device, the brightness of the light emitted from the LED or other light source decreases as the light passes through the cover member or other member.

Similarly, in a configuration such as a liquid crystal display device in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members is arranged on the front side of a backlight serving as a light-emitting means, the brightness of the light emitted from the backlight decreases as the light passes through the various translucent members.

Therefore, under the configuration related to this means VB3, the effects of the above means VB1 etc. will be more effective.

Means VB4. A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB3, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is made of a metal material.

The above-mentioned means VB4 can increase the rigidity of the second rotating means, and can improve its durability and wear resistance. Furthermore, the reflecting portion can be formed simply by polishing a specific portion of the second rotating means, simplifying the manufacturing process. In addition, the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be configured to have been subjected to rust prevention treatment, etc.

Means VB5. A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB4, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is polished.

According to the above-mentioned means VB5, a polishing process (mirror finish) is performed, so that a reflective part with a higher shine can be formed. As a result, the effect of the above-mentioned means VB1, etc. can be further enhanced.

Means VB6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB5, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.).

The above-mentioned means VB6 can increase the reflectance of light at the reflective portion, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means VB1, etc.

Means VB7. A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB6, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in an outwardly convex spherical shape).

The above-mentioned means VB7 can reflect not only light irradiated from the front side of the gaming machine (outside the gaming machine), but also light irradiated from multiple directions, such as the sides of the gaming board, to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the effect of the above-mentioned means VB1 etc. can be further improved.

Means VB8. A gaming machine as described in any one of means VB1 to VB7, characterized in that at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) is provided with an information display section on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is displayed.

By using the above-mentioned means VB8, the player can view the specified information written on the information writing section of the reflective section through the light-transmitting section of the first rotating means.

This allows for further diversification of game presentations using two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means), further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means VB1.

Means VB9. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VB9 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similar to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VB10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VB1 to VB9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

Means VB10 provides the same effects as means VD1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB10, similar to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to means VD3, "the light-emitting means may be provided with a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changeable as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VD3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB10, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VB11. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VB1 to VB10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

Means VB11 provides the same effect as means VE1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB11, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VE5.

Means VB12. One of the first and second rotating means has at least one acted portion that is acted on by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VB1 to VB11, characterized in that when the other rotating means acts on the acted upon portion of one of the rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Means VB12 provides the same effect as means VF1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similarly to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB12, similar to means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VF6.

Means VB13. The game board is made of a light-transmitting member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VB1 to VB12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

Measure VB13 provides the same effect as measure VG1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to one another, and the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB13, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional Issue VC. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, when a certain performance condition is met, the rotation means rotates in a preset manner. This means that the performance of the rotation means tends to be monotonous, and players tend to lose interest in the operation of the rotation means. In this respect, there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VC1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable about an axial direction in a predetermined area (the direction of the player's line of sight) and is configured to be capable of changing between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (front view of a game board) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
The game machine includes an operating means operable by a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is changeable in response to the operation mode of the operation means operated by a player.

According to the above-mentioned means VC1, it is possible to perform a more dynamic game presentation by performing the operation of overlapping and separating two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes.

Furthermore, according to this means, the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to change according to the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player. As a result, the relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means can be changed. As a result, the player can feel more aware that he or she is actively participating in the game, which can increase the player's interest.

Here, the "operation mode of the operating means" includes, for example, the number of operations and the amount of operation displacement. For example, it includes the number of times a button-type operating means is pressed, and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or slide lever.

Means VC2. The gaming machine described in means VC1, characterized in that the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation means being operated by a player.

By using the above-mentioned means VC2, the player himself can decide the timing to start the operation of the second rotation means, which had been in a standby state until then. This strengthens the player's awareness that he is actively participating in the game, further increasing the player's interest.

Means VC3. A gaming machine described in means VC1 or VC2, characterized in that the amount of movement of the second rotation means (amount of movement in the vertical direction and amount of movement in the horizontal direction) is configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means.

By using the above-mentioned means VC3, the player can change the amount of movement of the second rotation means based on the amount of operational displacement of the operating means. This makes the player feel more aware that he or she is actively participating in the game, further increasing the player's interest.

Means VC4. A gaming machine described in any one of means VC1 to VC3, characterized in that it is provided with a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more.

Under the configuration related to the above means VC1, etc., if the player were able to change the amount of movement of the second rotation means as desired, there is a risk that some players will attempt to move the second rotation means more than the amount of movement intended by the developer. If an attempt is made to move the second rotation means more than the predetermined amount, there is a risk that the second rotation means will collide with a specified part, causing damage to the second rotation means or the specified part.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means VC4 is provided with the movement restriction means, which can reduce the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means VC5. A gaming machine described in any one of means VC1 to VC4, characterized in that it is provided with a guide means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area.

Under the configuration related to the above means VC1, etc., if the amount of movement of the second rotation means were to be changed as the player desired, there is a risk that the second rotation means would not be properly guided to the specified area that is the performance area of the first rotation means.

In contrast, the above-mentioned means VC5, by being provided with the above-mentioned guide means, can reduce the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means VC6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VC3 to VC5, characterized in that it is provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the specified area from returning outside the specified area (to a standby position).

Under the configuration related to the above means VC1, if the second rotation means were configured to operate as the player intended, there is a risk that the second rotation means, once guided into a specified area, may return to outside the specified area (standby position), resulting in a situation in which the rotation means presentation is not performed properly.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means VC6 is provided with the return restriction means, which can reduce the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means VC7. A gaming machine described in any one of means VC1 to VC6, characterized in that the operation means includes at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation.

By using the above-mentioned means VC7, the player is able to make many of the decisions on his/her own, which further strengthens the player's awareness that he/she is actively participating in the game, and can further increase the interest of the player.

Means VC8. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
the first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC7, characterized in that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means is blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means.

According to the above-mentioned means VC8, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, it is possible to change the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control such as turning on or blinking the light emitting means.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC8, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player being achieved is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC8, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC8, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC8, similar to means VA5, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are able to approach each other individually)" may be configured. This provides the same effect as means VA5.

Here, under the configuration of means VC8, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting portions arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC8, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VC9. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotation means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC8, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VC9 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC9, similar to means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may have an information-inscribed portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VC10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VC1 to VC9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

Means VC10 provides the same effects as means VD1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC10, similar to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to means VD3, "the light-emitting means may be provided with a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changeable as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VD3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC10, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VC11. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

Measure VC11 provides the same effect as measure VE1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC11, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VE5.

Means VC12. One of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that is acted on by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC11, characterized in that when the other rotating means acts on the acted upon part of one of the rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Measure VC12 provides the same effect as measure VF1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC12, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC12, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC12, similarly to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC12, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC12, similar to means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VF6.

Means VC13. The game board is made of a translucent material, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VC1 to VC12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

Measure VC13 provides the same effect as measure VG1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional Issue VD. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means performs a predetermined rotating operation, and the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up or flashes. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

In light of this, it is conceivable to create an effect in which multiple movable bodies, including a rotating means, are linked together; however, with such a configuration, there is a risk that a situation will arise in which the multiple movable bodies cannot be linked together or stopped in the effect that the player wishes to see due to misalignment of the movements of the multiple movable bodies, etc. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the interest of the player will be significantly reduced.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VD1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable about an axial direction in a predetermined area (the direction of the player's line of sight) and is configured to be capable of changing between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (front view of a game board) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
In the predetermined region,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

According to the above-mentioned means VD1, the two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes can overlap and separate, making it possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation.

However, in a configuration in which the second rotating means moves within a specified area, there is a risk that the second rotating means may become misaligned due to assembly errors, deterioration over time, etc. If such a misalignment occurs, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means will not be appropriate, and there is a risk that the performance effect described above will not be properly achieved.

In the past, in order to grasp the position of the movable body, a detection means for detecting the movable body in a standby position (reference position) was often provided. However, with only this configuration, it is not possible to grasp the position of the movable body in the performance area (predetermined area) where the performance is actually performed, and there is a risk of the problems described above occurring.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means VD1 is configured to include a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means that has passed a predetermined position in a predetermined area that is the performance area, and is capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

This makes it less likely that a time lag will occur between the operation of the rotation means and the start timing of a specified performance when the performance is being performed in a specified area, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

As a result, it is possible to prevent players from losing interest.

Means VD2. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The gaming machine described in means VC1 is characterized in that the light emission mode of the light emission means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

By using the above-mentioned means VD2, it is possible to execute a performance that produces a visual effect, such as changing the light emission mode of the light-emitting means, at an appropriate timing.

Means VD3. The light emitting means is provided with a predetermined display means,
The gaming machine described in means VD2 is characterized in that the display mode of the display means is changeable as the light emission mode of the light emitting means.

By using the above-mentioned means VD3, it is possible to execute a performance that produces a visual effect, such as changing the display mode of the display means, at an appropriate timing.

Means VD4. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in either means VD2 or VD3, characterized in that at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means is configured to be able to block at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the above-mentioned means VD4, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD4, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD4, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD4, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD4, similar to means VA5, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are able to approach each other individually)" may be configured. This provides the same effect as means VA5.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting sections arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD4, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VD5. The detection means is provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VD1 to VD4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute different presentations depending on which of the multiple detection means detects the second rotation means.

By using the above-mentioned means VD5, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and further increase the interest.

Means VD6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VD1 to VD5, characterized in that the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable and individually pass through the predetermined position in the predetermined area.

By using the above-mentioned means VD6, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and further increase the interest.

Means VD7. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VD1 to VD6, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VD7 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD7, as in means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be provided with an information-inscribed portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VD8. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VD1 to VD7, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VD8 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VD9. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VD1 to VD8, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

Measure VD9 provides the same effect as measure VE1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD9, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD9, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD9, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD9, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VE5.

Means VD10. One of the first and second rotating means has at least one acted portion that is acted on by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VD1 to VD9, characterized in that when the other rotating means acts on the acted upon portion of one of the rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Means VD10 provides the same effects as means VF1.

Here, under the configuration of means VD10, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD10, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD10, similar to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD10, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD10, similar to means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VF6.

Means VD11. The game board is made of a light-transmitting material, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VD1 to VD10, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

Measure VD11 provides the same effect as measure VG1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD11, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD11, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD11, similar to means VG4, "a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves in the front area of the game board may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD11, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD11, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional Issues VE. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, there is a risk that the rotating means may become charged with static electricity due to friction during rotation. If the rotating means is configured to be movable, and the rotating means comes into contact with or close to other electrical equipment (including other rotating means), static electricity may flow to the electrical equipment, which may have a significant impact on the gaming machine as well as the electrical equipment itself.

For example, there are concerns that the display screen may be distorted or that noise may be mixed into the control signal, and in severe cases, various problems may occur, such as damage to electrical equipment or malfunction of electrical equipment.

As a result, the game presentation may not be performed properly, which may reduce the player's interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VE1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable in a predetermined area with a front-rear direction (the line of sight of a player) as an axial direction and is configured to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (front view of a game board) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having electrical conductivity.

According to the above-mentioned means VE1, it is possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation by performing the operation of overlapping and separating two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes.

Furthermore, according to this means, the second rotating means has at least a part that is conductive, and is configured to include a conductive member (earth member) that can come into contact with the conductive portion of the second rotating means.

This allows the static electricity stored in the second rotating means to escape via the conductive member, thereby preventing the occurrence of the various problems caused by static electricity.

This in turn helps prevent malfunctions of various presentation devices, such as movable props and display devices, and helps prevent players from losing interest in the game.

Means VE2. The gaming machine described in means VE1, characterized in that the conductive member is provided in an area different from the predetermined area (outside the predetermined area).

If the conductive material were placed within a specific area that would be the performance area, it would be visible to the player, which could reduce the design quality.

In response to this, the above-mentioned means VE2 can prevent such problems from occurring.

Means VE3. The gaming machine described in means VE1 or VE2, characterized in that the conductive member is disposed along a portion of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area.

The above-mentioned means VE3 allows static electricity charged to the second rotating means to escape during the movement in the previous stage where it may come into contact with the first rotating means, thereby further enhancing the effect of the above-mentioned means VE1, etc.

VE4. A gaming machine according to any one of VE1 to VE3, characterized in that the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves.

The above-mentioned means VE4 allows the second rotating means to easily come into contact with the conductive member, and allows static electricity to be more reliably released.

Means VE5. A gaming machine described in any one of means VE1 to VE4, characterized in that at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward).

By using the above-mentioned means VE5, the contact area between the conductive part of the second rotating means and a specific conductive member can be reduced, and frictional resistance during movement of the second rotating means can be reduced. As a result, the second rotating means can be moved smoothly, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented.

Means VE6. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
the first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in any of means VE1 to VE5, characterized in that at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means is configured to be able to block at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means.

According to the above-mentioned means VE6, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, it is possible to change the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control such as turning on or blinking the light emitting means.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player being achieved is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, similar to means VA5, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are able to approach each other individually)" may be configured. This provides the same effect as means VA5.

Here, under the configuration of means VE6, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting sections arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VE7. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VE1 to VE6, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VE7 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE7, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE7, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE7, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE7, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE7, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE7, as in means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be provided with an information-indicating portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VE8. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VE1 to VE7, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VE8 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE8, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VE9. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VE1 to VE8, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

Measure VE9 provides the same effect as measure VD1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE9, similar to means VD2, "a light-emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to means VD3, "the light-emitting means may be provided with a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changeable as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VD3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE9, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE9, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VE10. One of the first and second rotating means has at least one acted upon portion that is acted upon by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VE1 to VE9, characterized in that when the other rotation means acts on the acted upon portion of one of the rotation means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Means VE10 provides the same effects as means VF1.

Here, under the configuration of means VE10, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE10, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE10, similar to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE10, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE10, similar to means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VF6.

Means VE11. The game board is made of a translucent material, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VE1 to VE10, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board, and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

Measure VE11 provides the same effect as measure VG1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE11, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE11, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE11, similar to means VG4, "path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves in the front area of the game board" may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE11, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE11, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional Issues VF. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, there is known a pachinko machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, there is known a pachinko machine in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and blinks in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, so the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

In response to this, it is conceivable to provide multiple rotation means, but if these simply rotate independently without affecting each other, the presentation of the rotation means can easily become monotonous, and there is a need to further increase interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VF1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable in a predetermined area with a front-rear direction (a line of sight of a player) as an axial direction and is configured to be able to change between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (front view of a game board) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
One of the first and second rotating means includes at least one acted-on portion that is acted on by the other rotating means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the other rotating means acts on the acted-on portion of one of the rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

According to the above-mentioned means VF1, the two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes can overlap and separate, making it possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation.

Furthermore, according to this means VF1, when one rotating means (e.g., the first rotating means) acts on the acted part of the other rotating means (e.g., the second rotating means) in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

In other words, one rotating means operates in a different manner depending on the manner in which the other rotating means acts on the acted portion of the other rotating means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the operating modes of the two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means), thereby increasing the interest of the player.

Means VF2. The one rotating means is
When the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first manner, the other rotating means operates in a first operating manner corresponding to the first manner,
The gaming machine described in means VF1 is characterized in that when the other rotation means acts on the acted upon portion in a second manner, it is configured to operate in a second operating manner corresponding to the second manner.

The above-mentioned means VF2 can further enhance the effect of the above-mentioned means VF1.

Means VF3. When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode, the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode,
A gaming machine described in means VF2, characterized in that it is configured to increase the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs.

By using the above-mentioned means VF3, it is possible to produce a game presentation in which the rate of a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the operating mode of the rotation means. As a result, the player will be able to pay close attention to the operation of the rotation means with a sense of expectation, which can increase the player's interest.

Means VF4. A first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state advantageous to a player more advantageous than the first advantageous state are configured to be generated;
When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode, the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode.
A gaming machine described in means VF2, characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of the second advantageous state being reached is higher than the probability of the first advantageous state being reached.

The above-mentioned means VF4 provides the same effect as the above-mentioned means VF3.

Means VF5. A gaming machine described in any one of means VF1 to VF4, characterized in that the other rotating means is configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means.

If the acted upon portion is configured as a light-transmitting portion that can transmit light, and a gap occurs between the other rotating means and the acted upon portion of one rotating means, light will leak from the gap, and the leaked light may cause problems such as making the acted upon portion difficult to see or reducing the brightness of the acted upon portion itself.

In response to this, the above-mentioned method VF5 can prevent such problems from occurring.

Means VF6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VF1 to VF5, characterized in that it is provided with a predetermined movable member that can contact the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means.

According to the above-mentioned means VF6, the operating mode of the second rotating means is changed when the movable body comes into contact with the second rotating means. As a result, the operating modes of the rotating means, etc. are diversified, which can increase the interest of the player.

For example, the second rotating means may be configured to start operating when a specific movable member (e.g., a hammer-type device) acts on the second rotating means, which is in a stopped state.

Means VF7. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
the first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in any of means VF1 to VF6, characterized in that at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means is configured to be able to block at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the above-mentioned means VF7, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, it is possible to change the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control such as turning on or blinking the light emitting means.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player being achieved is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similar to means VA5, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are able to approach each other individually)" may be configured. This provides the same effect as means VA5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting sections arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF7, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VF8. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VF1 to VF7, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VF8 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF8, similar to means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be provided with an information-inscribed portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VF9. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VF1 to VF8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VF9 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VF10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VF1 to VF9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

Means VF10 provides the same effects as means VD1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF10, similar to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to means VD3, "the light-emitting means may be provided with a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changeable as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VD3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF10, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VF11. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VF1 to VF10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

Means VF11 provides the same effects as means VE1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF11, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VE5.

Means VF12. The game board is made of a light-transmitting member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front;
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine described in any of means VF1 to VF11, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board and to be movable in the rear region of the gaming board.

Means VF12 provides the same effects as means VG1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG2, "the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG3, "multiple paths may be provided along which the second rotation means can move from the front region to the rear region of the game board." This provides the same effect as means VG3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG4, "path changing means may be provided in the front area of the game board that can change the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VG4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG5, "a rear guide means may be provided that can guide the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position." This provides the same effect as means VG5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF12, similar to means VG6, "the second rotating means may be configured so that the direction of the rotation axis can be changed." This provides the same effect as means VG6.

Conventional Issue VG. Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

Some of these pachinko machines create dramatic effects by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, JP 2015-100385 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means performs a predetermined rotating operation, and the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up or flashes. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertainment value.

In light of this, it is conceivable to create a performance using multiple rotation means that can be displaced relative to one another; however, in such a configuration, the positioning and operation of one rotation means may limit the operation of the other rotation means, making it difficult to create a dynamic performance.

As a result, the effects using rotational devices tended to become monotonous, and there was a need to further improve the entertainment value.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means VG1. A game board having a play area on the front side;
A lottery means for conducting a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
and a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery.
A first rotating means is provided that is rotatable about an axial direction in a predetermined area (the direction of the player's line of sight) and is configured to be capable of changing between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
A relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means do not overlap, and a second positional relationship (proximate state) in which at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means overlap,
The game board is made of a light-transmitting member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
The second rotation means is configured to be movable from a front region to a rear region of the game board and to be movable within the rear region of the game board.

With the above-mentioned means VG1, it is possible to execute a more dynamic game presentation by having two rotation means (first rotation means and second rotation means) whose relative positional relationship changes, overlapping and separating.

Note that if the first and second rotation means were placed together in the front (or rear) area of the game board, there is a risk that the operation of both rotation means would be restricted, such as the two rotation means not being able to pass each other due to the space between the front and rear.

In this regard, according to the present method VG1, the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front region to the rear region of the game board, and also movable in the rear region of the game board, so that the second rotation means can be freely operated in the rear position of the game board without being restricted by the first rotation means arranged in the front region of the game board.

In addition, the player can visually observe the operation of this second rotation means through the game board, which is made of a translucent material.

As a result, it becomes possible to create more dynamic and diverse gameplay effects, further increasing the excitement for players.

Means VG2. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be relatively movable with each other;
The gaming machine described in means VG1, characterized in that the multiple second rotation means are individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the gaming board and are configured to be movable within the rear area of the gaming board.

The above-mentioned means VG2 is provided with multiple second rotation means that can move relative to each other, and these are configured to be able to move individually to the rear area of the game board, which further diversifies the game presentation. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player.

Means VG3. A gaming machine as described in means VG1 or VG2, characterized in that a plurality of paths are provided along which the second rotating means can move from the front region to the rear region of the gaming board.

By using the above-mentioned means VG3, the operating modes of the second rotation means can be diversified, further increasing the interest.

Means VG4. A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG3, characterized in that it is provided with a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves in the front area of the gaming board.

By using the above-mentioned means VG4, the operating mode of the second rotation means can be further diversified, further increasing the interest.

Means VG5. A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG4, characterized in that it is provided with a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the gaming board to a predetermined position.

Since many devices, such as display devices and presentation devices, are arranged in the rear area of the game board, there is limited space for moving the movable body compared to the front area of the game board, and it is therefore necessary to move the second rotation means more accurately.

In contrast, the above-mentioned means VG5 is provided with the rear guide means, so that the second rotation means can be accurately guided to a predetermined position.

Means VG6. A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG5, characterized in that the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable.

If the direction of the rotation axis were fixed and the only effect was one in which the direction of rotation changed, the game presentation would be monotonous.

In contrast, with the above-mentioned means VG6, the rotation axis direction is made changeable, making it possible to implement a wider variety of effects, further increasing the interest.

Means VG7. Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
the first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A gaming machine described in any of means VG1 to VG6, characterized in that at least a portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent portion of the first rotating means is configured to be able to block at least a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means.

According to the above-mentioned means VG7, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, it is possible to change the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control such as turning on or blinking the light emitting means.

This allows for light effects to be produced in addition to the motion effects of the first and second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game effects and dramatically increase the interest of players.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA2, "the configuration may be such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player being achieved is higher when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (close proximity state) than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close proximity state)." This provides the same effect as means VA3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA4, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means may be configured to be in the second positional relationship (close proximity state) at a higher rate (frequency) when a predetermined condition is satisfied compared to when the condition is not satisfied." This provides the same effect as means VA4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA5, "the second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the specified area and to be movable relative to each other, and the second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are able to approach each other individually)." This provides the same effect as means VA5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting portions arranged at equal intervals (e.g., at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle 360°/N around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means, and includes a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling the blinking of the light emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VA6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG7, as in means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area may be smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VA7.

Means VG8. The first rotating means has a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light;
the second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light);
In the second positional relationship,
A gaming machine described in any of means VG1 to VG7, characterized in that light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) can be irradiated from the front through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means to at least a portion of the reflective portion of the second rotating means that overlaps with the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means.

Measure VG8 provides the same effect as measure VB1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, similar to means VB3, "the first rotating means may be rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined light-transmitting member that is capable of transmitting light." This provides the same effect as means VB3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material." This provides the same effect as means VB4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, as in means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." This provides the same effect as means VB5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be plated (e.g., chrome plated, etc.)." This provides the same effect as means VB6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, as in means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VB7.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG8, similar to means VB8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may have an information inscription portion on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is inscribed." This provides the same effect as means VB8.

Means VG9. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

Measure VG9 provides the same effect as measure VC1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player." This provides the same effect as means VC2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC3, "the movement amount (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable based on at least the amount of operational displacement of the operating means." This provides the same effect as means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC4, "a movement restriction means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotation means to a predetermined amount or more may be provided. This provides the same effect as means VC4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC5, "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VC5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area may be provided with a return restriction means capable of restricting the second rotating means from returning outside the predetermined area (to a standby position)." This provides the same effect as means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similar to means VC7, "the operation means may include at least a first operation unit capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation unit capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation." This provides the same effect as means VC7.

Means VG10. In the predetermined area,
a detection means capable of detecting the second rotating means passing a predetermined position;
A gaming machine described in any one of means VG1 to VG9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined presentation based on the second rotation means being detected by the detection means.

Means VG10 provides the same effects as means VD1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG10, similar to means VD2, "a light-emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means." This provides the same effect as means VD2.

In addition, similar to means VD3, "the light-emitting means may be provided with a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changeable as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means." This provides the same effect as means VD3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG10, similar to means VD5, "the detection means may be provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and different effects may be executed depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotation means." This provides the same effect as means VD5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG10, similar to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be individually movable in the predetermined region and to be able to pass through the predetermined position individually." This provides the same effect as means VD6.

Means VG11. The second rotating means has at least a part of a conductive portion having electrical conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material);
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with or be close to each other,
A gaming machine described in any of means VG1 to VG10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a specific conductive member having conductivity.

Means VG11 provides the same effects as means VE1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG11, similar to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)." This provides the same effect as means VE2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member may be disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." This provides the same effect as means VE3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG11, similar to means VE4, "the conductive member may be an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." This provides the same effect as means VE4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG11, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be curved (in a spherical shape that is convex outward)." This provides the same effect as means VE5.

Means VG12. One of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted-on portion that is acted on by the other rotating means;
A gaming machine described in any of means VG1 to VG11, characterized in that when the other rotation means acts on the acted upon part of one of the rotation means in a predetermined manner, the one of the rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operating manner corresponding to the predetermined manner.

Means VG12 provides the same effects as means VF1.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF2, "the one rotating means may be configured to operate in a first operating mode corresponding to the first operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a first operating mode, and to operate in a second operating mode corresponding to the second operating mode when the other rotating means acts on the acted portion in a second operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF2.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF3, "the configuration may be such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved is higher when the one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when the one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF3.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similarly to means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are configured to be able to occur, and the second advantageous state is more likely to occur than the first advantageous state when one of the rotation means operates in the second operating mode than when one of the rotation means operates in the first operating mode." This provides the same effect as means VF4.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to contact the acted-on portion of the one rotating means." This provides the same effect as means VF5.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can contact the second rotating means and cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means may be provided." This provides the same effect as means VF6.

In addition, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

Similarly, a gaming machine having a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12 may be implemented by arbitrarily combining at least one of the following: a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VA1 to VA13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VE1 to VE11, a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VF1 to VF12, and a part or all of the configuration of any of the above means VG1 to VG12.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. A more detailed example of the form is "a pinball gaming machine that includes an operating means (launch handle, etc.) operated by a player, a launching means (launching device, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a gaming area (game board, etc.) to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and a predetermined ball entry means (general entry port, variable entry device, start-up entry port, etc.) into which any of a plurality of gaming balls guided to the gaming area can enter, and is configured so that the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can be visually observed."

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the pinball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

10... Pachinko machine, 30... Game board, 42... Performance display device, 42a... Display unit, 811... Upper movable part, 820... Upper rotating body, 825... Movable piece, 828... Magnifying lens unit, 851... Lower movable part, 856A... Lower left rotating body, 856Aa... First information recording unit, 856Ab... Second information recording unit, 856B... Lower right rotating body, 856Ba... First information recording unit, 856Bb... Second information recording unit.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball;
a play area to which the launched game ball is guided;
A variable ball entry means having an opening and closing member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter an inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area;
A special ball entry means through which a game ball that has entered the internal area can enter the ball;
A gaming machine including a special game state providing means for providing a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined ball is entered into the special ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is configured to allow only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the inner area,
This gaming machine is
A first opportunity ball entry means for allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game;
A second opportunity ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the game ;
A first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball entry means;
A second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball entry means ;
A route allocation means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
The game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entry means is configured to be changed by a variable means capable of changing the value of a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined route to the special ball entry means by changing a state between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
The variable means is configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means;
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one location and allows the game balls to pass through it one by one;
A ball passage capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a restricting means is provided which allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball from passing in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game balls that have entered the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means are configured not to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter,
The second route is provided with a delay means capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball,
The game ball that has passed through the specific area and flowed down the first route may or may not enter the second opportunity ball entry means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a gaming ball that passes through the specific area and flows down the second route may or may not enter the first trigger ball entry means .

Images